diff options
author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2009-05-23 00:14:50 +0000 |
---|---|---|
committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2009-05-23 00:14:50 +0000 |
commit | ac7c62d7555a6cebca926dc51ebc39cb235982db (patch) | |
tree | 8411809d969764b8f25e7ad5082c08f3577aee00 /Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst | |
parent | af6a89d1cc9fae03dc3a8dc7b19e324266bf0596 (diff) |
use doc subdirs
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@13408 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst')
41 files changed, 0 insertions, 13178 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/README deleted file mode 100644 index 9e5f39cde19..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/README +++ /dev/null @@ -1,116 +0,0 @@ -README for fontinst - -* What is it? - -Fontinst is a program that helps with installing fonts -for (La)TeX. Since it is written entirely in TeX macros, -it is completely portable. - -More precisely, fontinst helps mainly with the number -crunching and shoveling parts of font installation. This -means in practice that it creates a number of files which -give the TeX metrics (and related information) for a font -family that (La)TeX needs to do any typesetting in these -fonts. Fontinst furthermore makes it easy to create fonts -containing glyphs from more than one base font, taking -advantage of e.g. "expert" font sets. - -Fontinst cannot examine files to see if they contain any -useful information or work with binary file formats; those -tasks must normally be done manually or with the help of -some other tool, such as the pltotf and vptovf programs. -Nor can fontinst automatically search for files, but if -they are named according to the fontname scheme (Berry) -then fontinst sometimes succeeds very well in guessing -what the interesting files are called. - - -* Documentation - -The doc directory contains pure documentation; in -particular the doc/manual directory should be of -interest, as it contains the fontinst manual. For all -questions about how one uses fontinst, see this manual. - -Sadly, the manual has been neglected for some time, and -although it was recently revised, much remains to do. -In particular, several commands still lack description and -explanations (although at least the manual now lists -all the syntaxes). Some alternative sources of information -that you may find useful are: - - * Philipp Lehman's "The Font Installation Guide" - Available on CTAN, at info/Type1fonts/fontinstallationguide/ - - * intro98.tex - parts of the 1998 fontinst v1.8 manual - that were split off during the recent revision. - - * The fontinst mailing list and its archives - (See below for relevant addresses.) - - * The fontinst Literate Programming sources (see - source/fisource.dvi). If a command isn't documented - anywhere else, there is probably a discussion of it - in the sources. They're thoroughly indexed. - -The examples directory contains some examples (with -comments) of using fontinst to install a font family. - - -* Installation - -To use fontinst, you only need to make sure the inputs -directory and its subdirectories are on TeX's input path. -Usually you do this by moving it to a suitable location. -In a TDS texmf tree, the inputs directory is usually -made the ${TEXMF}/tex/fontinst directory. - -You will probably also want to move the file fontdoc.sty -in the latex directory to some location where TeX will -find it. Many of the .mtx and .etx files in the inputs -hierarchy are simultaneously fontinst input files and -LaTeX documents; the fontdoc package is needed to typeset -them as the latter. In a TDS texmf tree, the normal place -for fontdoc.sty is in the tex/latex/misc directory. - -Also recall that some TeX implementations maintain a -database over files that have been installed. If you've -placed fontinst in a suitable place but TeX complains it -cannot find the file fontinst.sty then the problem may -be that you need to update this database of files. That -is however nothing that is particular for fontinst. - - -* Latin and other scripts - -The fontinst distribution includes the necessary encoding -definition (.etx) files for the latin script as used in -European languages, but there is nothing in fontinst as -a program that restricts it to these languages. In the T2 -bundle (CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/t2) there are -corresponding fontinst files for the cyrillic scripts -(and in the future it might become part of the main -fontinst distribution). - - -* The test directory - -This is mainly of interest for advanced fontinst users. -It collects some files that were written to test the new -features in various versions of fontinst. - - -* Mailing list - -Questions and bug reports should be sent to the fontinst -mailing list - - fontinst@tug.org - -General information about the mailing list is at: - - http://tug.org/mailman/listinfo/fontinst - - -16 December 2004, -Lars Hellstr\"om diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/encspecs.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/encspecs.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 88911506970..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/encspecs.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1334 +0,0 @@ -\documentclass[a4paper]{article} - -\usepackage{array} - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{l@nohyphenation}{\newlanguage\l@nohyphenation}{} -\DeclareRobustCommand\meta[1]{% - \ensuremath{\langle}% - \sbox{\z@}{% - \setlanguage\l@nohyphenation - \normalfont\itshape #1\/% - \setlanguage\language - }% - \unhbox\z@ - \ensuremath{\rangle}% -} -\makeatother -\DeclareRobustCommand\marg[1]{% - \texttt{\char`\{}\meta{#1}\texttt{\char`\}}% -} -\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}} - -\makeatletter -\DeclareTextFontCommand\textsmaller{% - \fontsize{\scaledsize{\f@size}}{\f@baselineskip}\selectfont -} -\newcommand\scaledsize[1]{% - \ifdim #1\p@>6\p@ - \ifdim #1\p@>7\p@ - \ifdim #1\p@>8\p@ - \ifdim #1\p@>9\p@ - \ifdim #1\p@>10\p@ - \ifdim #1\p@>11\p@ - \ifdim #1\p@>12\p@ - \ifdim #1\p@>14\p@ 14% - \else 12\fi - \else 11\fi - \else 10\fi - \else 9\fi - \else 8\fi - \else 7\fi - \else 6\fi - \else 5\fi -} -\makeatother -\DeclareRobustCommand\ETX{\textsmaller{ETX}} -\DeclareRobustCommand\PDF{\textsmaller{PDF}} - -% From tugboat.cls -\def\thinskip{\hskip 0.16667em\relax} -\def\endash{--} -\def\emdash{\endash-} -\makeatletter -\def\d@sh#1#2{\unskip#1\thinskip#2\thinskip\ignorespaces} -\def\dash{\d@sh\nobreak\endash} -\def\Dash{\d@sh\nobreak\emdash} -\def\ldash{\d@sh\empty{\hbox{\endash}\nobreak}} -\def\rdash{\d@sh\nobreak\endash} -\def\Ldash{\d@sh\empty{\hbox{\emdash}\nobreak}} -\def\Rdash{\d@sh\nobreak\emdash} -\makeatother - -\usepackage{shortvrb} -\MakeShortVerb{\|} -\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}} - -\newcommand{\TeXOmega}{Omega} -\DeclareRobustCommand\eTeX{\ensuremath{\varepsilon}-\kern-.125em\TeX} -\DeclareRobustCommand\package[1]{\textsf{#1}} - -\providecommand*{\href}[2]{#2} -\newcommand*{\ctanref}[2]{\href{ftp://ftp.ctan.org/#1}{#2}} - -\title{Writing \ETX\ format font encoding specifications} -\author{Lars Hellstr\"om} -\date{2003/07/09} - -\begin{document} -\maketitle - -\begin{abstract} - This paper explains how one writes formal specifications of font - encodings for \LaTeX\ and suggests a ratification procedure for such - specifications. -\end{abstract} - - -\tableofcontents - -\vspace{0mm plus 35mm} -\pagebreak[2] - - -\section{Introduction} - -This is a kind of FAQ on some initial questions, and my personal -answers to those. - -\paragraph*{Why should one specify font encodings?} -Because without a specification, font -designers\footnote{Maybe not a good term, since it is really about -making fonts available to \TeX. Some of these people actually -design glyphs, but most of them merely working with the metrics.} -cannot tell whether their fonts will work in general, they can -only test that they work in the cases they know about. Font design -is subject to a surprising amount of obscure technicalities and it -is very hard to consider (or even find documentation that -mentions) them all. - -\paragraph*{Why should one make formal specifications?} -Because the informal specifications that we have today -are incomplete and hard to use. E.g.\ the \LaTeX\ -\meta{enc}\texttt{enc.def} files only say something about the -characters that are accessed via commands, and even for those you -really have to do reverse engineering to figure out what the -encoding contains. To figure out what the remaining characters -should do you have to compile what the various user manuals claim -to work and then work backwards from that, but I don't think the -general problem of which character tokens are allowed in input is -thoroughly treated anywhere. On top of that, \LaTeX\ itself -contributes some character tokens when the document is being -typeset.\footnote{This is basically the ``a \texttt{T}$*$ encoding -must contain the characters \ldots'' problem that was the reason -that the \texttt{T2} encoding had to be split up.} - -On the other side of things there are the files which tell e.g. -\textsf{fontinst} or \textsf{AFMtoTFM} what the target font -encoding is. These are basically recipes which are known (?\@) to -produce valid results, and they do usually provide more -information about the encoding than the sources listed above, but -they don't give much information about where the recipe can be -modified. - -\paragraph*{Why use the \ETX\ format?} -To begin with it is an established format; many of those -who are making fonts already use it, even if for a slightly -different purpose. Another major reason is that an \ETX\ file is both -a \LaTeX\ document and a processable data file; this is the same kind -of bilinguality that has made the \texttt{.dtx} format so useful. -Finally the \ETX\ format makes it easy to create experimental font -installations when a new encoding is being designed; \textsf{fontinst} -can directly read the file, but the file can also be automatically -converted to a PostScript encoding vector if that approach seems more -convenient. - -On the other hand, there are some features (such as the prominent -role of the glyph names) of the \ETX\ format that would -probably had been done differently in a file format that was built -from scratch, but then you would also lose several of the advantages -listed above. - - -\section{Points to keep in mind} - -\subsection{Characters, glyphs, and slots} - -One fundamental difference one must understand is that between -characters and glyphs. A \emph{character} is a semantic entity---it -carries some meaning, even if you usually have to combine several -characters to make up even one word---whereas a \emph{glyph} simply -is a piece of graphics. In printed text, glyphs are used to represent -characters and the first step of reading is to determine which -character(s) a given glyph is representing.\footnote{Some \PDF\ viewers -also try to accomplish this, but in general they need extra -information to do it right. The generic solution provided is to embed -a \emph{ToUnicode CMap}\Ldash which is precisely a map from slots to -characters\Rdash in the \PDF\ font object.} - -In the output, \TeX\ neither deals with characters nor glyphs, really -(although many of its messages speak of characters), but with -\emph{slots}, which essentially are numbered positions in a font. To -\TeX, a slot is simply something which can have certain metric -properties (width, height, depth, etc.\@) but to the driver which -actually does the printing the slot also specifies a glyph. The same -slot in two different fonts can correspond to two quite different -characters. - -For completeness it should also be mentioned that the \emph{input} of -\TeX\ is a stream of semantic entities and thus \TeX\ is dealing with -characters on that side, but the input is not the subject of this -paper. - - -\subsection{Ligatures} - -In typography, a \emph{ligature} is a glyph which has been formed by -joining glyphs that represent two or more characters; this joining can -involve quite a lot of deformation of the original shapes. Examples -of ligatures are the `fi' ligature (from `f' and `i'), the `\AE' -ligature (from `A' and `E'), and the `\textit{\&}' character (from `E' -and `t'), the latter two of which has evolved to become characters of -their own. For those ligatures (such as `fi') that have not evolved to -characters, \TeX\ has a mechanism for forming the ligature out of the -characters it is composed from, under the guidance of ligature\slash -kerning programs found in the font. - -More technically, what happens is really that if the |\char| (or -equivalent) for one slot is immediately followed by the |\char| (or -equivalent) for another (or the same) slot and there is a ligaturing -instruction in the \texttt{\small LIGKERN} table of the current font -which applies to this slot pair then this ligaturing instruction is -executed. This usually replaces the two slots in the pair with a -single new slot specified by the ligaturing instruction (it could -also keep one or both of the original slots, but that is less common). -\TeX\ has no idea about whether these replacements change the meaning -of anything, but \TeX\ assumes that it doesn't, and it is up to the -font designer to ensure that this is the case. - -Apart from forming ligatures in text, the ligaturing mechanism of -\TeX\ is traditionally also employed for another task which is much -more problematic. Ligatures are also used to produce certain -characters which are not part of visible ASCII---the most common are -the endash (typed as |--|) and the emdash (typed as |---|). This is a -problem because it violates \TeX's assumption that the meaning is -unchanged; the classical problem with this appears in the \texttt{OT2} -encoding, where the Unicode character \texttt{U+0446} -(\textsc{cyrillic small letter tse}) could be typed as |ts|, whilst -the |t| and |s| by themselves produced Unicode characters -\texttt{U+0442} (\textsc{cyrillic small letter te}) and \texttt{U+0441} -(\textsc{cyrillic small letter es}) respectively. \TeX's hyphenation -mechanism can however decompose ligatures, so it sometimes happened -that the \textsc{tse} was hyphenated as \textsc{te}-\textsc{es}, -which is quite different from what was intended. Since this is such -an obvious disadvantage, the use of ligatures for forming non-English -letters quickly disappeared after 8-bit input encodings became -available. The practice still remains in use for punctuation, however, -and the font designer must be aware of this. For many font encodings -there is a set of ligatures which must be present and replace two or -more characters by a single, different character. These ligatures are -called \emph{mandatory ligatures} in this paper. - -The use of mandatory ligatures in new font encodings is strongly -discouraged, for a number of reasons. The main problem is that they -create unhealthy dependencies between input and output encoding, -whereas these should ideally be totally independent. Using ligatures -in this way complicates the internal representation of text, and it -also makes it much harder to typeset text where those ligatures are not -wanted (such as verbatim text). Furthermore it creates problems with -kerning, since the ``ligature'' has not yet been formed when a kern -to the left of it is inserted. Finally, a much better solution (when -it is available) is to use an \TeXOmega\ translation process -(see~\cite[Sec.~8--11]{Omega-doc}), since that \emph{is} independent -of the font, different translations can be combined, and they can -easily handle even ``abbreviations'' much more complicated than those -ligatures can deal with. - - -\subsection{Output stages} - -On its way out of \LaTeX\ towards the printed text, a character passes -through a number of stages. The following five seem to cover what is -relevant for the present discussion: -\begin{enumerate} - \item \emph{\LaTeX\ Internal Character Representation} (LICR); - see~\cite{LaTeXCompanion}, Section~7.11 for a full description. - At this point the character is a character token (e.g.~|a|), - a text command (e.g.~|\ss|), or a combination (e.g.~|\H{o}|). - \item \emph{Horizontal material;} this is what the character is - en route from \TeX's mouth to its stomach. For most characters - this is equivalent to a single |\char| command (e.g.\ |a| is - equivalent to |\char|\,|97|), but some require more than one, some - are combined using the |\accent| and |\char| commands, some - involve rules and\slash or kerns, and some are built using boxes - that arbitrarily combine the above elements. - \item \emph{DVI commands;} this is the DVI file commands that - produce the printed representation of the character. - \item \emph{Printed text;} this is the graphical representation of - the character, e.g. as ink on paper or as a pattern on a computer - screen. Here the text consists of glyphs. - \item \emph{Interpreted text;} this is essentially printed text - modulo equivalence of interpretation, hence the text doesn't really - reach this stage until someone reads it. Here the text consists of - characters. -\end{enumerate} - -In theory there is a universal mapping from LICR to interpreted text, -but various technical restrictions make it impossible to simultaneously -support the entire mapping. A \LaTeX\ encoding selects a restriction -of this mapping to a limited set which will be ``well supported'' -(meaning kerning and such between characters in the set works), whereas -elements outside this set at best can be supported through temporary -encoding changes. The encoding also specifies a decomposition of the -mapping into one part which maps LICR to horizontal material and one -part which maps horizontal material to interpreted text. The first -part is realized by the text command definitions usually found in the -\meta{enc}\texttt{enc.def} file for the encoding. The second part is -the font encoding, the specification of which is the topic of this -paper. It is also worth noticing that an actual font is a mapping of -horizontal material to printed text. - -An alternative decomposition of the mapping from LICR to interpreted -text would be at the DVI command level, but even though this -decomposition is realized in most \TeX\ implementations, it has very -little relevance for the discussion of encodings. The main reason for -this is that it depends not only on the encoding of a font, but -also on its metrics. Furthermore it is worth noticing that in e.g.\ -pdf\TeX\ there need not be a DVI command level. - - -\subsection{Hyphenation} - -There are strong connections between font encoding and hyphenation because -\TeX's hyphenation mechanism operates on horizontal material; more -precisely the hyphenation mechanism only works on pieces of horizontal -material that are equivalent to sequences of |\char| commands. This -implies that hyphenation patterns, as selected via the |\language| -parameter, are not only for a specific language, they are also for a -specific font encoding. - -The hyphenation mechanism uses the |\lccode| values to distinguish -between three types of slots: lower case letters (|\lccode|\(\,n = -n\)), upper case letters (|\lccode|\(\,n \notin \{0,n\}\)), and -non-letters (|\lccode|\(\,n = 0\)); only the first two types can be -part of a hyphenatable word and only lower case letters are needed -in the hyphenation patters. This does however place severe -restrictions on how letters can be placed in a text font because -\TeX\ uses the same |\lccode| values for all text in a paragraph and -therefore these values cannot be changed whenever the encoding changes. -In \LaTeX\ the |\lccode| table is not allowed to change at all and -consequently all text font encodings must work using the standard set -of |\lccode| values. - -In \eTeX\ each set of hyphenation patterns has its own set of -|\lccode| values for hyphenation, so the problem isn't as severe -there. The hyphenation mechanism of \TeXOmega\ should become -completely independent of the font encoding, although the last time I -checked it was still operating on material encoded according to -a font encoding. - - -\subsection{Production and specification \ETX\ files} - -Finally, it is worth pointing out the difference between an \ETX\ file -created for the specification of a font encoding and one created for -being used in actually producing fonts with this encoding. They are -usually not the same. Specification \ETX s certainly may be of direct -use in the production of fonts---especially experimental fonts -produced as part of the work on a new encoding---but they are usually -not ideal for the purpose. In particular there is often a need to -switch between alternative names for a glyph to accommodate what is -actually in the fonts, but such trickeries are undesirable -complications in a specification. On the other hand a production -\ETX\ file has little need for verbose comments, whereas they are rather -an advantage in a specification \ETX\ file. - -Therefore one shouldn't be surprised if there are two \ETX\ files for a -specific encoding: one which is a specification version and one which -is a production version. If both might need to be in the same -directory then one should, as a rule of thumb, include a -`\texttt{spec}' in the name of the specification version. - - -\section{Font encoding specifications} - -\subsection{Basic principles} - -Most features of the font encoding are categorized as either -\emph{mandatory} or \emph{ordinary}. The mandatory features are what -macros may rely on, whereas the ordinary simply are something which -fonts with this encoding normally provide. Font designers may choose -to provide other features than the ordinary, but are recommended to -provide the ordinary features to the extent that the available -resources permit. - -Many internal references in the specification are in the form of -\emph{glyph names} and the choice of these is a slightly tricky -matter. From the point of formal specification, the choices can be -completely arbitrary, but from the point of practical usefulness they -most likely are not. One of the main advantages of the \ETX\ format -for specifications is that such specifications can also be used to -make experimental implementations, but this requires that the glyph -names in the specification are the same as those used in the fonts -from which the experimental implementation should be built. Yet -another aspect is that the glyph names are best chosen to be the ones -one can expect to find in actual fonts, as that will make things -easier for other people that want to make non-experimental -implementations later. For this last purpose, a good reference is -Adobe's technical note on Unicode and glyph names~\cite{unicodesign}. -For most common glyphs, \cite{unicodesign} ends up recommending that -one should follow the Adobe glyph list~\cite{AGL}, which however has -the peculiar trait of recommending names on the form -\texttt{afii}\textit{ddddd} (rather than the Unicode-based alternative -\texttt{uni}\textit{xxxx}) for most non-latin glyphs. This is somewhat -put in perspective by~\cite{ATN5013}. - - -\subsection{Slot assignments} - -The purpose of the slot assignments is to specify for each slot which -character or characters it is mapped to. That one slot is mapped to -many characters is an unfortunate, but not very uncommon, reality in -many encodings, as limitations in font size have often encouraged -identifications of two characters which are almost the same. It should -be avoided in new encodings. - -Slot assignmets are done using the |\nextslot| command and a -|\setslot| \dots\ |\endsetslot| construction as follows: -\begin{quote} - |\nextslot|\marg{slot number}\\* - |\setslot|\marg{glyph name}\\* - \mbox{\quad}\meta{slot commands}\\* - |\endsetslot| -\end{quote} -A typical example of this is -\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim} -\nextslot{65} -\setslot{A} - \Unicode{0041}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A} -\endsetslot -\end{verbatim}\end{quote} -which gets typeset as -\begin{quote} - \textbf{Slot 65 `\texttt{A}'}\\* - Unicode character \texttt{U+0041}, \textsc{latin capital letter a}. -\end{quote} - -The |\nextslot| command does not typeset anything; it simply stores -the slot number in a counter, for later use by |\setslot|. The -|\endsetslot| command increments this counter by one. Hence the -|\nextslot| command is unnecessary between |\setslot|s for consecutive -slots. Besides |\nextslot|, there is also a command |\skipslots| which -increments the slot number counter by a specified amount. The -argument of both |\nextslot| and |\skipslots| can be arbitrary -\package{fontinst} integer expressions (see~\cite{fontinst-man}). All -\TeX\ \meta{number}s that survive full expansion are valid -\package{fontinst} integer expressions, but for example |`\~| isn't, -as |\~| is a macro which will break before the expression is typeset. -These cases can however be fixed by preceding the \TeX\ \meta{number} -by |\number|, as |\number`\~| survives full expansion by expanding to -|126|. - -The main duty of the \meta{slot commands} is to specify the target -character (or characters) for this slot. The simplest way of doing -this is to use the |\Unicode| command, which has the syntax -\begin{quote} - |\Unicode|\marg{code point}\marg{name} -\end{quote} -The \meta{code point} is the number of the character (in hexadecimal -notation, usually a four-digit number) and the \meta{name} is the name. -Case is insignificant in these arguments. If a slot corresponds to a -string of characters rather than to a single character, then one uses -the |\charseq| command, which has the syntax -\begin{quote} - |\charseq|\marg{\cs{Unicode} commands} -\end{quote} -e.g. -\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim} -\nextslot{30} -\setslot{ffi} - \charseq{ - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \Unicode{0069}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I} - } -\endsetslot -\end{verbatim}\end{quote} -Several |\Unicode| commands not in the argument of a |\charseq| -instead mean that each of the listed characters is a valid -interpretation of the slot. - -If a character cannot be specified in terms of Unicode code points then -the specification should simply be a description in text which -identifies the character. Such descriptions are written using the -|\comment| command -\begin{quote} - |\comment|\marg{text} -\end{quote} -It is worth noticing that the \meta{text} is technically only an -argument of |\comment| when the program processing the \ETX\ file is -ignoring |\comment| commands. This means |\verb| and similar -catcode-changing commands \emph{can} be used in the \meta{text}. The -|\par| command is on the other hand not allowed in the \meta{text}. - -The |\comment| command should also be used for any further piece of -explanation of or commentary to the character used for the slot, if the -exposition seems to need it. There can be any number of |\comment| -commands in the \meta{slot commands}. - - -\subsection{Ligatures} - -There are three classes of ligatures in the font encoding -specifications: mandatory, ordinary, and odd. Mandatory ligatures must -be present in any font which complies with the encoding, whereas -ordinary and odd ligatures need not be. No clear distinction can be -made between ordinary and odd ligatures, but a non-mandatory ligature -should be categorized as ordinary if it makes sense for the majority -of users, and as odd otherwise. Hence the `fi' ligature is -categorized as ordinary in the \texttt{T1} encoding (although it -makes no sense in Turkish), whereas the `ij' ligature is odd. - -In the \ETX\ format, a ligature is specified using one of the slot -commands -\begin{quote} - |\Ligature|\marg{ligtype}\marg{right}\marg{new}\\ - |\ligature|\marg{ligtype}\marg{right}\marg{new}\\ - |\oddligature|\marg{note}\marg{ligtype}\marg{right}\marg{new} -\end{quote} -|\Ligature| is used for mandatory ligatures, |\ligature| is used for -ordinary ligatures, and |\oddligature| is used for odd ligatures. The -\meta{right} and \meta{new} arguments are names of the glyphs being -assigned to the slots involved in this ligature. The \meta{right} -specifies the right part in the slot pair being affected by the -ligature, whereas the left part is the one of the |\setslot| \dots\ -|\endsetslot| construction in which the ligaturing command is placed. -The \meta{new} specifies a new slot which will be inserted by the -ligaturing instruction. The \meta{ligtype} is the actual ligaturing -instruction that will be used; it must be |LIG|, |/LIG|, |/LIG>|, -|LIG/|, |LIG/>|, |/LIG/|, |/LIG/>|, or |/LIG/>>|. The slashes specify -retention of the left or right original character; the |>| signs -specify passing over that many slots in the result without further -ligature processing. \meta{note}, finally, is a piece of text which -explains when the odd ligature may be appropriate. It is typeset as a -footnote. - -As an example of ligatures we find the following in the specification -of the \texttt{T1} encoding: -\begin{quote} - |\nextslot{33}|\\ - |\setslot{exclam}|\\ - | \Unicode{0021}{EXCLAMATION MARK}|\\ - | \Ligature{LIG}{quoteleft}{exclamdown}|\\ - |\endsetslot| -\end{quote} -It is typeset as -\begin{quote} - \textbf{Slot 33 `\texttt{exclam}'}\\* - Unicode character \texttt{U+0021}, \textsc{exclamation mark}.\\* - \textbf{Mandatory ligature} - \texttt{exclam}${}*{}$\texttt{quoteleft}${}\rightarrow - {}$\texttt{exclamdown} -\end{quote} -With other \meta{ligtype}s there may be more names listed on the -right hand side and possibly a `$\lfloor$' symbol showing the -position at which ligature processing will start afterwards. - - -\subsection{Math font specialities} - -There are numerous technicalities which are special to math fonts, but -only a few of them are exhibited in \ETX\ files.\footnote{For an -overview of the subject, see for example Vieth~\cite{Vieth2001}.} Most -of these have to do with the \TeX\ mechanisms that find sufficiently -large characters for commands like |\left|, |\sqrt|, and |\widetilde|. - -The first mechanism for this is that a character in a font can sort of -say ``If I'm too small, then then try character \dots\ instead''. This -is expressed in an \ETX\ file using the |\nextlarger| command, which -has the syntax -\begin{quote} - |\nextlarger|\marg{glyph name} -\end{quote} -The second mechanism constructs a sufficiently large character from -smaller pieces; this is known as a `varchar' or `extensible character'. -This is expressed in an \ETX\ file using an ``extensible recipe'', the -syntax for which is -\begin{quote} - |\varchar| \meta{varchar commands} |\endvarchar| -\end{quote} -where each \meta{varchar command} is one of -\begin{quote} - |\varrep|\marg{glyph name}\\ - |\vartop|\marg{glyph name}\\ - |\varmid|\marg{glyph name}\\ - |\varbot|\marg{glyph name} -\end{quote} -There can be at most one of each and their order is irrelevant. The -most important is the |\varrep| command, as that is the part which is -repeated until the character is sufficiently large. The |\vartop|, -|\varmid|, and |\varbot| commands are used to specify some other part -which should be put at the top, middle, and bottom of the extensible -character respectively. Not all extensible recipes use all of these, -however. - -As an example, here is how a very large left brace is constructed: -\begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{>{% - \fontencoding{OMX}\fontfamily{cmex}\selectfont - $\vcenter\bgroup\hbox\bgroup - }l<{\egroup\egroup$} l} - \char"38& For |\vartop{bracelefttp}|\\ - \char"3E& For |\varrep{braceex}|\\ - \char"3C& For |\varmid{braceleftmid}|\\ - \char"3E& Again for |\varrep{braceex}|\\ - \char"3A& For |\varbot{braceleftbt}| - \end{tabular} -\end{center} - -Both |\nextlarger| and |\varchar| commands are like |\ligature| in -that they describe ordinary features for the encoding; they appear in -a specification \ETX\ file mainly to explain the purpose of some -ordinary character. There is no such thing as a mandatory |\nextlarger| -or |\varchar|, but varchars are occationally used to a similar effect. -In these cases, the character generated by the extensible recipe is -something quite different from what a |\char| for that slot would -produce. Thus for the slot to produce the expected result it must be -referenced using a |\delimiter| or |\radical| primitive, since those -are the only ones which make use of the extensible recipe. The effect -is that the slot has a \emph{semimandatory} assignment; the result of -|\char| is unspecified (as for a slot with an ordinary assignment), but -the result for a large delimiter or radical is not (as for a slot with -a mandatory assignment). - -Thus some math fonts have an extra section ``Semimandatory characters'' -between the mandatory and ordinary character sections. In that section -for the \texttt{OMX} encoding we find for example -\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim} -\nextslot{60} -\setslot{braceleftmid} - \Unicode{2016}{DOUBLE VERTICAL LINE} - \comment{This is the large size of the |\Arrowvert| - delimiter, a glyphic variation on |\Vert|. - The \texttt{braceleftmid} glyph ordinarily - placed in this slot must not be too tall, - or else the extensible recipe actually producing - the character might sometimes not be used.} - \varchar - \varrep{arrowvertex} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot -\end{verbatim}\end{quote} -which is typeset as -\begin{quote} - \textbf{Slot 60 `\texttt{braceleftmid}'}\\* - Unicode character \texttt{U+2016}, \textsc{double vertical line}.\\ - This is the large size of the |\Arrowvert| - delimiter, a glyphic variation on |\Vert|. - The \texttt{braceleftmid} glyph ordinarily - placed in this slot must not be too tall, - or else the extensible recipe actually producing - the character might sometimes not be used.\\ - \textbf{Extensible glyph:}\\* - \textbf{Repeated} \texttt{arrowvertex} -\end{quote} - - - - -\subsection{Fontdimens} - -Each \TeX\ font contains a list of fontdimens, numbered from $1$ and -up, which are accessible via the |\fontdimen| \TeX\ primitive. Quite a -few are also used implicitly by \TeX\ and therefore cannot be left out -even if they are totally irrelevant, but as one can always include -some extra fontdimens in a font---the only bounds on how many -fontdimens there may be are the general bound on the size of a TFM -file and the amount of font memory \TeX\ has available---this is -usually not a problem. - -The reason fontdimens are part of font encoding specifications is -that the meaning of e.g.\ |\fontdimen|\,|8| varies between different -fonts depending on their encoding; thus the encoding specification -must define the quantity stored in each |\fontdimen| parameter. This -is done using the |\setfontdimen| command, which has the syntax -\begin{quote} - |\setfontdimen|\marg{number}\marg{name} -\end{quote} -The \meta{number} is the fontdimen number (as a sequence of decimal -digits where the first digit isn't zero) and the \meta{name} is a -symbolic name for the quantity. - -The standard list of symbolic names for fontdimen quantities appears -below; the listed quantities should always be described using the names -in this list. Encoding specifications that employ other quantities as -fontdimens should include definitions of these quantities. Those -quantities that are defined as ``Formula parameter \dots'' have to -do with how mathematical formulae are rendered and are usually much -too complicated to explain here. For exact definitions of these -parameters, the reader is referred to Appendix~G of \textit{The -\TeX book}~\cite{TeXbook}. -\begin{list}{}{% - \setlength\labelwidth{0pt}% - \setlength\itemindent{-\leftmargin}% - \def\makelabel#1{\hspace{\labelsep}\normalfont\itshape #1}% - \setlength\itemsep{0.5\itemsep}% - \setlength\parsep{0.5\parsep}% -} -\item[acccapheight] - The height of accented full capitals. -\item[ascender] - The height of lower case letters with ascenders. -\item[axisheight] Formula parameter $\sigma_{22}$. -\item[baselineskip] - The font designer's recommendation for natural length of the - \TeX\ parameter |\baselineskip|. -\item[bigopspacing1] Formula parameter $\xi_{9}$. -\item[bigopspacing2] Formula parameter $\xi_{10}$. -\item[bigopspacing3] Formula parameter $\xi_{11}$. -\item[bigopspacing4] Formula parameter $\xi_{12}$. -\item[bigopspacing5] Formula parameter $\xi_{13}$. -\item[capheight] - The height of full capitals. -\item[defaultrulethickness] Formula parameter $\xi_{8}$. -\item[delim1] Formula parameter $\sigma_{20}$. -\item[delim2] Formula parameter $\sigma_{21}$. -\item[denom1] Formula parameter $\sigma_{11}$. -\item[denom2] Formula parameter $\sigma_{12}$. -\item[descender] - The depth of lower case letters with descenders. -\item[digitwidth] - The median width of the digits in the font. -\item[extraspace] - The natural width of extra interword glue at the end of a sentence. - \TeX\ implicitly uses this parameter if |\spacefactor| is $2000$ or - more and |\xspaceskip| is zero. -\item[interword] - The natural width of interword glue (spaces). \TeX\ implicitly uses - this parameter unless |\spaceskip| is nonzero. -\item[italicslant] - The slant per point of the font. Unlike all other fontdimens, it is - not proportional to the font size. -\item[maxdepth] - The maximal depth over all slots in the font. -\item[maxheight] - The maximal height over all slots in the font. -\item[num1] Formula parameter $\sigma_{8}$. -\item[num2] Formula parameter $\sigma_{9}$. -\item[num3] Formula parameter $\sigma_{10}$. -\item[quad] - The quad width of the font, normally approximately equal to the - font size and\slash or the width of an `M'. Also implicitly available - as the length unit |em| and used for determining the size of the - length unit |mu|. -\item[shrinkword] - The (finite) shrink component of interword glue (spaces). \TeX\ - implicitly uses this parameter unless |\spaceskip| is nonzero. -\item[stretchword] - The (finite) stretch component of interword glue (spaces). \TeX\ - implicitly uses this parameter unless |\spaceskip| is nonzero. -\item[sub1] Formula parameter $\sigma_{16}$. -\item[sub2] Formula parameter $\sigma_{17}$. -\item[subdrop] Formula parameter $\sigma_{19}$. -\item[sup1] Formula parameter $\sigma_{13}$. -\item[sup2] Formula parameter $\sigma_{14}$. -\item[sup3] Formula parameter $\sigma_{15}$. -\item[supdrop] Formula parameter $\sigma_{18}$. -\item[verticalstem] - The dominant width of vertical stems. This quantity is meant to be used - as a measure of how ``dark'' the font is. -\item[xheight] - The x-height (height of lower case letters without ascenders). Also - implicitly available as the length unit |ex|. -\end{list} - - -\subsection{The codingscheme} - -The final encoding-dependent piece of information in a \TeX\ font is -the codingscheme, which is essentially a string declaring what -encoding the font has. This information is currently only used by -programs that convert the information in a \TeX\ font to some other -format and these use it to identify the glyphs in the font. Therefore -this string should be chosen so that the contents of the slots in the -font can be positively identified. Observe that the encoding -specification by itself does not provide enough information for this, -since there are usually a couple of slots that do not contain -mandatory characters. On the other hand, it is not a problem in this -context if the font leaves some of the slots (even mandatory ones) -empty as that is anyway easily detected. The only problem is with -fonts where the slots are assigned to other characters than the ones -specified in the encoding. - -For that reason, it is appropriate to assign two codingscheme strings -to each encoding. The main codingscheme is for fonts were all slots -(mandatory and ordinary alike) have been assigned according to the -specification or have been left empty. The variant codingscheme is for -fonts where some ordinary slots have been assigned other characters -than the ones listed in the specification, but where the mandatory -slots are still assigned according to the specification or are left -empty. The font encoding specification should give the main -codingscheme name, whereas the variant codingscheme name could be -formed by adding \verb*| VARIANT| to the main codingscheme name. - -Technically the codingscheme is specified by setting the -\texttt{codingscheme} string variable. This has the syntax -\begin{quote} - |\setstr{codingscheme}|\marg{codingscheme name} -\end{quote} -e.g. -\begin{quote} - |\setstr{codingscheme}{EXTENDED TEX FONT ENCODING - LATIN}| -\end{quote} -which is typeset as -\begin{quote} - \textbf{Default} s(\texttt{codingscheme}) = - \verb*|EXTENDED TEX FONT ENCODING - LATIN| -\end{quote} -A codingscheme name may be at most 40 characters long and may not -contain parentheses. If the entire \verb*| VARIANT| cannot be suffixed -to a main name because the result becomes to long (as in the above -example) then use the first 40 characters of the result. - - -\subsection{Overall document structure} -\label{Ssec:Structure} - -The overall structure of a font encoding specification should be -roughly the following -\begin{quote} - |\relax|\\ - |\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}|\\ - |\usepackage[specification]{fontdoc}|\\ - \meta{preamble}\\ - |\begin{document}|\\ - \meta{title}\\ - \meta{manifest}\\ - |\encoding|\\ - \meta{body}\\ - |\endencoding|\\ - \meta{discussion}\\ - \meta{change history}\\ - \meta{bibliography}\\ - |\end{document}| -\end{quote} -The commands described in the preceding subsections must all go in -the \meta{body} part of the document, as that is the only part of the -file which actually gets processed as a data file. The part before -|\encoding| is skipped and the part after |\endencoding| is never -even input, so whatever appears there is only part of the \LaTeX\ -document. For the purposes of processing as a data file, the -important markers in the file are the |\relax|, the |\endcoding|, and -the |\endencoding| commands. - -The \meta{title} is the usual |\maketitle| (and the like) stuff. The -person or persons who appear as author(s) are elsewhere in this paper -described as the \emph{encoding proposers}. The \meta{title} should -also give the date when the specification was last changed. - -The \meta{manifest} is an important, although usually pretty short, -part of the specification. It is a piece of text which explains the -purpose of the encoding (in particular what it can be used for) and -the basic ideas (if any) which have been used in its construction. It -is often best marked up as an abstract. - -The \meta{discussion} is the place for any longer comments on the -encoding, such as analyses of different implementations, comparisons -with other encodings, etc. This is also the place to explain any more -general structures in the encoding, such as the arrow kit in the -proposed \texttt{MS2} encoding~\cite{ClasenVieth}. In cases where the -specification is mainly a formulation of what is already an -established standard the \meta{discussion} is often rather short as -the relevant discussion has already been published elsewhere, but -it is anyway a service to the reader to include this information. -References to the original documents should always be given. - -It might be convenient to include an FAQ section at the end of the -discussion. This is particularly suited for explaining things where -one has to look for a while and consult the references to find the -relevant information. - -The \meta{change history} documents how the specification has changed -over time. It is preferably detailed, as each detail in an encoding -is important, but one should not be surprised if it is anyway rather -short due to that there haven't been that many changes. - -The \meta{bibliography} is an important part of the specification. It -should at the very least include all the sources which have been used -in compiling the encoding specification, regardless of whether they -are printed, available on the net, merely ``personal communication'', -or something else. It is also a service to the reader to include in -the bibliography some more general references for related matters. - -The \meta{preamble} is just a normal \LaTeX\ preamble and there are no -restrictions on defining new commands in it, although use of such -commands in the \meta{body} part is subject to the same restrictions -as use of any general \LaTeX\ command. The preamble should however -\emph{not} load any packages not part of the required suite of -\LaTeX\ packages, as that may prevent users who do not have these -packages from typesetting the specification. Likewise, the -specification should \emph{not} require that some special font is -available. Glyph examples for characters are usually better -referenced via Unicode character charts than via special fonts. - -An exception to this rule about packages is that the specification -must load the \package{fontdoc} package, as shown in the outline -above, since that defines the |\setslot| etc.\ commands that should -appear in the \meta{body}. This should not be a problem, as the -\package{fontdoc} package can preferably be kept in the same directory -as the collection of encoding specifications (see below). The -\texttt{specification} option should be passed to the package to let it know -that the file being processed is an encoding specification---otherwise -|\Ligature| and |\ligature| will get the same formatting, for one. It -is not necessary to use the \package{article} document class, and -neither must it be passed the \texttt{twocolumn} option, but it is -customary to do so. In principle any other document class within -required \LaTeX\ will do just as well. - -If you absolutely think that using some non-required package -significantly improves the specification, then try writing the code so -that is loads the package only if it is available and provide some -kind of fallback definition for sites where it is not. E.g.\ the -\package{url} package could be loaded as -\begin{verbatim} -\IfFileExists{url.sty}{\usepackage{url}}{} -\providecommand\url{\verb} -\end{verbatim} -The |\url| command defined by this is not equivalent to the command -defined by the \package{url} package, but it can serve fairly well -(with a couple of extra overfull lines as only ill effect) if its -use is somewhat restricted. - -Finally, a technical restriction on the \meta{preamble}, \meta{title}, -and \meta{manifest} is that they must not contain any mismatched -|\if|s (of any type) or |\fi|s, as \TeX\ conditionals will be used for -skipping those parts of the file when it is processed as a data file. -If the definition of some macro includes mismatched |\if|s or |\fi|s -(this will probably occur only rarely) then include some extra code -so that they do match. - - -% All technical parts of the encoding specification (slot assignments, -% fontdimens, etc.\@) have to be in the \meta{encoding commands} part. -% The other parts are suitably used for longer commentry, such as the -% mainfest (see below), revision history, and bibliography. -% -% When the file is being typeset as a \LaTeX\ document there is nothing -% special going on. The |\encoding| and |\endencoding| commands may set -% some internal variables, but otherwise they do very little. When the -% file is being read by \package{fontinst}, things are quite different. -% Everything between the initial |\relax| and |\encoding| is skipped, -% and the file is not read further than to the |\endencoding|. Hence -% the \meta{preamble}, \meta{\LaTeX\ text 1}, and \meta{\LaTeX\ text 2} -% can contain pretty much anything (with a few exceptions) which is -% legal in a \LaTeX\ document. - - -\subsection{Encoding specification body syntax} - -The \meta{body} part of an encoding specification must comply to a -much stricter syntax than the rest of the file. The \meta{body} is -a sequence of \meta{encoding command}s, each of which should be one -of the following: -\begin{quote} - |\setslot|\marg{glyph name} \meta{slots commands} |\endsetslot|\\ - |\nextslot|\marg{number}\\ - |\skipslots|\marg{number}\\ - |\setfontdimen|\marg{number}\marg{name}\\ - |\setstr{codingscheme}|\marg{codingscheme name}\\ - |\needsfontinstversion|\marg{version number} -\end{quote} -The |\needsfontinstversion| command is usually placed immediately -after the |\encoding| command. The \meta{version number} must be at -least |1.918| for many of the features described in this file to be -available, and at least |1.928| if the |\charseq| command is used. - -The \meta{slot commands} are likewise a sequence of \meta{slot -command}s, each of which should be one of the following: -\begin{quote} - |\Unicode|\marg{code point}\marg{name}\\ - |\charseq|\marg{\cs{Unicode} commands}\\ - |\comment|\marg{text}\\ - |\Ligature|\marg{ligtype}\marg{right}\marg{new}\\ - |\ligature|\marg{ligtype}\marg{right}\marg{new}\\ - |\oddligature|\marg{note}\marg{ligtype}\marg{right}\marg{new}\\ - |\nextlarger|\marg{glyph name}\\ - |\varchar| \meta{varchar commands} |\endvarchar| -\end{quote} -where \meta{varchar commands} similarly is a sequence of \meta{varchar -command}s, each of which should be one of the following: -\begin{quote} - |\varrep|\marg{glyph name}\\ - |\vartop|\marg{glyph name}\\ - |\varmid|\marg{glyph name}\\ - |\varbot|\marg{glyph name} -\end{quote} -Finally, one can include any number of \meta{comment command}s between -any two encoding, slot, or varchar commands. The comment commands are -\begin{quote} - |\begincomment| \meta{\LaTeX\ text} |\endcomment|\\ - |\label|\marg{reference label} -\end{quote} -The \meta{\LaTeX\ text} can be pretty much any \LaTeX\ code that can -appear in conditional text. (|\begincomment| is either |\iffalse| or -|\iftrue| depending on whether the encoding specification is -processed as a data file or typeset as a \LaTeX\ document respectively. -|\endcomment| is always |\fi|.) The |\label| command is just -the normal \LaTeX\ |\label| command; when it is used in a \meta{slot -commands} it references that particular slot (by number and glyph -name). - -The full syntax of the \ETX\ format can be found in the -\package{fontinst} manual~\cite{fontinst-man}, but font encoding -specifications only need a subset of that. - - -\subsection{Additional \package{fontdoc} features} - -There is an ``in comment paragraph'' form |\textunicode| of the -|\Unicode| command. Both commands have the same syntax, but -|\textunicode| is only allowed in ``comment'' contexts. A typical use -of |\textunicode| is -\begin{quote} - |\comment{An |\dots\\ - \quad\dots| this is \textunicode{2012}{FIGURE DASH}; in |\dots\\ - |}| -\end{quote} -which is typeset as -\begin{quote} - An \dots\ this is \texttt{U+2012} (\textsc{figure dash}); in \dots -\end{quote} - -The \package{fontdoc} package inputs a configuration file -\texttt{fontdoc.cfg} if that exists. This can be used to pass -additional options to the package. The only currently available -options that this could be of interest for are the \texttt{hypertex} -and \texttt{pdftex} options, which hyperlinks each \texttt{U+}\dots\ -generated by |\Unicode| or |\textunicode| (using Hyper\TeX\ or -pdf\TeX\ conventions\footnote{One could just as well do the same -thing using some other convention if a suitable definition of -\cs{FD@codepoint} is included in \texttt{fontdoc.cfg}. See the -\package{fontinst} sources~\cite{fontinst-pre} for more details.} -respectively) to a corresponding glyph image on the Unicode consortium -website. To use this feature one should put the line -\begin{quote} - |\ExecuteOptions{hypertex}| -\end{quote} -or -\begin{quote} - |\ExecuteOptions{pdftex}| -\end{quote} -in the \texttt{fontdoc.cfg} file. \emph{Please} do not include this -option in the |\usepackage|\nolinebreak[1]|{fontdoc}| of an encoding -specification file as that can be a severe annoyance for people whose -\TeX\ program or DVI viewers do not support the necessary extensions. -% Hyper\TeX\ |\special|s. - - -\section{Font encoding ratification} - -This section describes a suggested ratification process for font -encoding specifications. As there are fewer technical matters that -impose restrictions on what it may look like, it is probably more -subjective than the other parts of this paper. - -\medskip - -A specification in the process of being ratified can be in one of -three different stages: \emph{draft}, \emph{beta}, or \emph{final}. -Initially the specification is in the draft stage, during which it -will be scrutinized and can be subject to major changes. A -specification which is in the beta stage has got a formal approval -but the encoding in question may still be subject to some minor -changes if weighty arguments present themselves. Once the -specification has reached the final stage, the encoding may not -change at all. - - -\subsection{Getting to the draft stage} - -The process of taking an encoding to the draft stage can be -summarized in the following steps. Being in the draft stage doesn't -really say anything about whether the encoding is in any way correct -or useful, except in that some people (the encoding proposers) -believe it is and are willing to spend some time on ratifying it. - -\paragraph{Write an encoding specification} The first step is to -write a specification for the font encoding in question. This -document must not only technically describe the encoding but also -explain what the encoding is for and why it was created. See -Subsection~\ref{Ssec:Structure} for details on how the document is -preferably organised. - -\paragraph{Request an encoding name} The second step is to write to -the \LaTeX3 project and request a \LaTeX\ encoding name for the -encoding. This mail should be in the form of a \LaTeX\ bug report, it -must be sent to -\begin{quote} - \href{mailto:latex-bugs@latex-project.org}% - {\texttt{latex-bugs@latex-project.org}}, -\end{quote} -and it must include the encoding specification file. Suggestions for -an encoding name are appreciated, but not necessarily accepted. -The purpose of this mail is \emph{not} to get an approval of the -encoding, but only to have a reasonable name assigned to it. - -\paragraph{Upload the specification to CTAN} The third step is make -the encoding specification publicly available by uploading it to -CTAN. Encoding specifications are collected in the -\begin{quote} - \ctanref{info/encodings}{\texttt{info/encodings}} -\end{quote} -directory (which should also contain the most recent version of this -paper). The name of the uploaded file should be -\meta{encoding name}\texttt{draft.etx}. The reason for this naming is -that it must be clear that the specification has not yet been ratified. - -\paragraph{Announce the encoding} When the upload has been confirmed, -it is time to announce the encoding by posting a message about it to -the relevant forums. Most important is the \texttt{tex-fonts} mailing -list, since that is where new encodings should be debated. Messages -should also be posted to the \texttt{comp.text.tex} newsgroup and any -forums related to the intended use of the encoding: an encoding for -Sanskrit should be announced on Indian \TeX\ users forums, an -encoding for printing chess positions should be announced on some -chess-with-\TeX\ user forum, etc.; in the extent that such forums exist. - -The full address of the \texttt{tex-fonts} mailing list is -\begin{quote} - \texttt{tex-fonts@math.utah.edu} -\end{quote} -This list rejects postings from non-members, so you need to subscribe -to it before you can post your announcement. This is done by sending -a `subscribe me' mail to -\begin{quote} - \href{mailto:tex-fonts-request@math.utah.edu} - {\texttt{tex-fonts-request@math.utah.edu}} -\end{quote} -The list archives can be found at -\begin{quote} - \href{http://www.math.utah.edu/mailman/listinfo/tex-fonts} - {\textsc{http:}/\slash \texttt{www.math.utah.edu}\slash - \texttt{mailman}\slash \texttt{listinfo}\slash - \texttt{tex-fonts}} -\end{quote} -A tip is to read through the messages from a couple of months -before you write up your announcement, as that should help you get -acquainted with the normal style on the list. Please do not send -messages encoded in markup languages (notably, \textsmaller{HTML}, -\textsmaller{XML}, and word processor formats) to the list. - -\paragraph{Experimental encodings} There is a point in going through -the above procedure even for experimental encodings, i.e., encodings -whose names start with an \texttt{E}. Of course there is no idea in -ratifying a specification of an experimental encoding, as it is very -likely to frequently change, but having a proper name assigned to the -encoding and uploading its specification to CTAN makes it much simpler -for other people to learn about and make references to the encoding. - - -\subsection{From draft to beta stage} - -The main difference between a draft and beta stage specification -respectively is that beta stage specifications have been scrutinized -by other people and found to be free of errors. The practical -implementation of this is that a debate is held (in the normal -anarchical manner of mailing list debates) on the \texttt{tex-fonts} -mailing list. In particular the following aspects of the -specification should be checked: -\begin{enumerate} - \item \emph{Is the encoding technically correct?} - There are many factors which affect what \TeX\ does and it is - easy to overlook some. (The \cs{lccode}s seem to be particularly - troublesome, in this respect.) Sometimes fonts simply cannot work - as an encoding specifies they should and it is important that - such defects in the encoding are discovered on an early stage. - \item \emph{Are there any errors in the specification?} - A font encoding specification is largely a table and typos are - easy to make. Proof-reading may be boring, but it is very, very - important. - \item \emph{Is the specification sufficiently precise?} - Are there any omissions, ambiguities, inaccuracies, or completely - irrelevant material in the specification? There shouldn't be. -\end{enumerate} -During the debate, the encoding proposers should hear what other -people have to say about the encoding draft, revise it accordingly -when some flaw is pointed out, and upload the revised version. This -cycle may well have to be repeated several times before everyone's -content. It is worth pointing out that in practice the debate should -turn out to be more of a collective authoring of the specification -than a defense of its validity. There is no point in going into it -expecting the worst. - -Unfortunately, it might happen that there never is a complete agreement -on an encoding specification---depending on what side on takes, either -the encoding proposers refuse to correct obvious flaws in it, or someone -on the list insists that there is a flaw although there is obviously -not---but hopefully that will never happen. If it anyway does happen -then the person objecting should send a mail whose subject contains the -phrase "formal protest against XXX encoding" (with XXX replaced by -whatever the encoding is called) to the list. Then it will be up to -the powers that be to decide on the fate of the encoding (see below). - -\paragraph{Summarize the debate} When the debate on the encoding is -over---e.g.\ a month after anyone last posted anything new on the -subject---then the encoding proposers should summarize the debate on -the encoding specification draft and post this summary as a follow-up -on the original mail to \texttt{latex-bugs}. This summary should list -the changes that have been made to the encoding, what suggestions there -were for changes which have not been included, and whether there were -any formal protests against the encoding. The summary should also explain -what the proposers want to have be done with the encoding. In the -usual case this is having it advanced to beta stage, but the proposers -might alternatively at this point have reached the conclusion that the -encoding wasn't such a good idea to start with and therefore withdraw -it, possibly to come again later with a different proposal. - -In response to this summary, the \LaTeX-project people may do one of -three things: -\begin{itemize} - \item - If the proposers wants the encoding specification advanced and - there are no formal protests against this, then the encoding - should be advanced to the beta stage. The \LaTeX-project - people do this by adding the encoding to the list of approved - (beta or final stage) encodings that they [presumably] maintain. - \item - If the proposers want to withdraw the encoding specification - then the name assigned to it should once again be made available - for use for other encodings. - \item - If the proposers want the encoding specification advanced but - there is some formal protest against this, then the entire matter - should be handed over to some suitable authority, as a suggestion - some technical TUG committee, for resolution. -\end{itemize} - - -\paragraph{Update the specification on CTAN} When the specification -has reached the beta stage, its file on CTAN should be updated to say -so. In particular the file name should be changed from \meta{encoding -name}\texttt{draft.etx} to \meta{encoding name}\texttt{spec.etx}. - - -\paragraph{Modifying beta stage encodings} If a beta stage encoding is -modified then the revised specification should go through the above -procedure of ratification again before it can replace the previous -\meta{encoding name}\texttt{spec.etx} file on CTAN. The revised -version should thus initially be uploaded as \meta{encoding -name}\texttt{draft.etx}, reannounced, and redebated. It can however -be expected that such debates will not be as extensive as the -original debates. - - -\subsection{From beta stage to final stage} - -The requirements for going from beta stage to final stage are more -about showing that the encoding has reached a certain maturity than -about demonstrating any technical merits of it. The main difference in -usefulness between a beta stage encoding and a final stage encoding is -that the latter can be considered safe for archival purposes, whereas -one should have certain reservations against such use of beta stage -encodings. - -It seems reasonable that the following conditions should have to be -fulfilled before a beta stage encoding can be made a final stage -encoding: -\begin{itemize} - \item At least one year must have passed since the last change was - made to the specification. - \item At least two people other than the proposer must have - succeeded in implemented the encoding in a font. -\end{itemize} -It is quite possible that some condition should be added or some of -the above conditions reformulated. - - -% References updated 2004/08/07. -\begin{thebibliography}{???} -\bibitem{ATN5013} - Adobe Systems Incorporated: - \textit{Adobe Standard Cyrillic Font Specification}, - Adobe Technical Note \#5013, 1998; - \href{http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/pdfs/tn/% - 5013.Cyrillic_Font_Spec.pdf}{\textsc{http}:/\slash - \texttt{partners.adobe.com}\slash \texttt{asn}\slash - \texttt{developer}\slash \texttt{pdfs}\slash \texttt{tn}\slash - \texttt{5013.Cyrillic\_Font\_Spec.pdf}}. -\bibitem{AGL} - Adobe Systems Incorporated: \textit{Adobe Glyph List}, - text file, 1998, - \href{http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/type/glyphlist.txt} - {\textsc{http}:/\slash \texttt{partners.adobe.com}\slash - \texttt{asn}\slash \texttt{developer}\slash \texttt{type}\slash - \texttt{glyphlist.txt}}. -\bibitem{unicodesign} - Adobe Systems Incorporated: - \textit{Adobe Solutions Network: Unicode and Glyph Names}, - web page, 1998, - \href{http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/type/unicodegn.html} - {\textsc{http}:/\slash \texttt{partners.adobe.com}\slash - \texttt{asn}\slash \texttt{developer}\slash \texttt{type}\slash - \texttt{unicodegn.html}}. -\bibitem{ClasenVieth} - Matthias Clasen and Ulrik Vieth: - \textit{Towards a new Math Font Encoding for (La)TeX}, - March 1998, presented at EuroTeX'98; - \href{http://tug.org/twg/mfg/papers/current/mfg-euro-all.ps.gz} - {\textsc{http}:/\slash \texttt{tug.org}\slash \texttt{twg}\slash - \texttt{mfg}\slash \texttt{papers}\slash \texttt{current}\slash - \texttt{mfg-euro-all.ps.gz}}. -\bibitem{fontinst-man} - Alan Jeffrey, Rowland McDonnell, Ulrik Vieth, and Lars Hellstr\"om: - \textit{\package{fontinst}---font installation software for \TeX} - (manual), 2004, - \ctanref{fonts/utilities/fontinst/doc/fontinst.tex}{% - \textsc{ctan}:\discretionary{}{}{\thinspace}% - \texttt{fonts}\slash \texttt{utilities}\slash - \texttt{fontinst}\slash \texttt{doc}\slash \texttt{fontinst.tex}}. -% \bibitem{fontinst} -% Alan Jeffrey, Sebastian Rahtz, and Ulrik Vieth: -% \textit{The \package{fontinst} utility}, documented source code, -% v\,1.801, -% \ctanref{fonts/utilities/fontinst/source}{% -% \textsc{ctan}:\discretionary{}{}{\thinspace}% -% \texttt{fonts}\slash \texttt{utilities}\slash -% \texttt{fontinst}\slash \texttt{source}/}. -\bibitem{fontinst-pre} - Alan Jeffrey, Sebastian Rahtz, Ulrik Vieth, and Lars Hellstr\"om: - \textit{The \package{fontinst} utility}, documented source code, - v\,1.9xx, - \ctanref{fonts/utilities/fontinst/source}{% - \textsc{ctan}:\discretionary{}{}{\thinspace}% - \texttt{fonts}\slash \texttt{utilities}\slash - \texttt{fontinst}\slash \texttt{source}/}. -\bibitem{TeXbook} - Donald E.\ Knuth, Duane Bibby (illustrations): \textit{The \TeX book}, - Ad\-di\-son--Wes\-ley, 1991; - volume A of \textit{Computers and typesetting}. -\bibitem{LaTeXCompanion} - Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens, with Johannes Braams, - David Carlisle, and Chris Rowley: - \textit{The \LaTeX\ Companion} (second edition), - Ad\-di\-son--Wes\-ley, 2004; ISBN~0-201-36299-6. -\bibitem{Omega-doc} - John Plaice and Yannis Haralambous: - \textit{Draft documentation for the Omega system}, - version~1.12, 1999; - \href{http://omega.cse.unsw.edu.au:8080/doc-1.12.ps}{% - \textsc{http:}/\slash \texttt{omega.cse.unsw.edu.au:8080}\slash - \texttt{doc-1.12.ps}}. -% \textsc{ctan}:\discretionary{}{}{\thinspace}% -% \texttt{systems}\slash \texttt{omega}\slash -% \texttt{omega-doc-1.8.tar.gz}. -\bibitem{Vieth2001} - Ulrik Vieth: - \textit{Math typesetting in \TeX: The~good, the~bad, the~ugly}, - to appear in the proceedings of Euro\TeX\ 2001; - \href{http://www.ntg.nl/eurotex/vieth.pdf}{% - \textsc{http}:/\slash \texttt{www.ntg.nl}\slash - \texttt{eurotex}\slash \texttt{vieth.pdf}}. -\end{thebibliography} - - -\end{document}
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/omxdraft.etx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/omxdraft.etx deleted file mode 100644 index efccabde857..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/omxdraft.etx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,985 +0,0 @@ -\documentclass[twocolumn]{article} -\usepackage[specification]{fontdoc}[2001/06/01] - -% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textvisiblespace}{% - \mbox{\kern.06em\vrule height.3ex}% - \vbox{\hrule width.3em}% - \hbox{\vrule height.3ex\kern.06em}} - -\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}} - -\showbranches - -\begin{document} - -\title{\texttt{OMX} encoding draft specification} -\author{Lars Hellstr\"om} -\date{2001/10/20} -\maketitle - -\begin{abstract} - The \TeX\ math extensions (\texttt{OMX}) encoding is a container for - most of the ``growing'' characters in the standard math set-up, but - that is pretty much the extent of it. Some of the characters occur - in ``normal size'' in other encodings; in these cases it is usually - a single math command that usually make use of characters in both - encodings. -\end{abstract} - - -\encoding - -\begincomment -\section{Mandatory characters} - -\subsection{Delimiters} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{0} -\setslot{parenleftbig} - \Unicode{0028}{LEFT PARENTHESIS} - \nextlarger{parenleftBig} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{parenrightbig} - \Unicode{0029}{RIGHT PARENTHESIS} - \nextlarger{parenrightBig} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracketleftbig} - \Unicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET} - \nextlarger{bracketleftBig} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracketrightbig} - \Unicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET} - \nextlarger{bracketrightBig} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{floorleftbig} - \Unicode{230A}{LEFT FLOOR} - \nextlarger{floorleftBig} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{floorrightbig} - \Unicode{230B}{RIGHT FLOOR} - \nextlarger{floorrightBig} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ceilingleftbig} - \Unicode{2308}{LEFT CEILING} - \nextlarger{ceilingleftBig} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ceilingrightbig} - \Unicode{2309}{RIGHT CEILING} - \nextlarger{ceilingrightBig} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{braceleftbig} - \Unicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET} - \nextlarger{braceleftBig} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracerightbig} - \Unicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET} - \nextlarger{bracerightBig} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{angleleftbig} - \Unicode{2329}{LEFT-POINTING ANGLE BRACKET} - \nextlarger{angleleftBig} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{anglerightbig} - \Unicode{232A}{RIGHT-POINTING ANGLE BRACKET} - \nextlarger{anglerightBig} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{barex} - \Unicode{007C}{VERTICAL LINE} - \comment{This is used by the \cs{vert} command. When not accessed - as a delimiter, this character may be much shorter than one - would expect.} - \varchar - \varrep{barex} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bardblex} - \Unicode{2016}{DOUBLE VERTICAL LINE} - \comment{This is used by the \cs{Vert} command. When not accessed - as a delimiter, this character may be much shorter than one - would expect.} - \varchar - \varrep{bardblex} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\setslot{slashbig} - \Unicode{2215}{DIVISION SLASH} - \comment{Although this character is normally accessed via \TeX's - growing delimiter mechanism, it is not used as such in formulae, - but as a large division slash. Since the use is unambigously for - division and the like, it would be inaccurate to identify this - character with \textunicode{002F}{SOLIDUS}.} - \nextlarger{slashBig} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{backslashbig} - \Unicode{005C}{REVERSE SOLIDUS} - \comment{This is \TeX's \cs{backslash} (use for ``double coset''), - not \cs{setminus}, and hence it is not - \textunicode{2216}{SET MINUS}.} - \nextlarger{backslashBig} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{62} -\setslot{braceex} - \Unicode{007C}{VERTICAL LINE} - \comment{This is used by the \cs{bracevert} command.} - \label{braceex} - \varchar - \varrep{braceex} - \endvarchar - \comment{This slot contains the repeatable part of a extensible - brace delimiter. In the standard set-up, the extensible recipes of - slots~\ref{bracelefttp}, \ref{bracerighttp}, \ref{braceleftbt}, - \ref{bracerightbt}, \ref{parenleftbt}, and \ref{parenrightbt} all - make use of this slot.} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{"42} -\setslot{parenleftex} - \Unicode{007C}{VERTICAL LINE} - \comment{As astonishing as it may seem, there is no command which - accesses this slot. The glyph is similar to that in - slot~\ref{braceex}, but shifted to the left.} - \varchar - \varrep{parenleftex} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\setslot{parenrightex} - \Unicode{007C}{VERTICAL LINE} - \comment{As astonishing as it may seem, there is no command which - accesses this slot. The glyph is similar to that in - slot~\ref{braceex}, but shifted to the right.} - \varchar - \varrep{parenrightex} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{"7A} -\setslot{bracehtipdownleft} - \comment{This is \cs{braceld}, a tip (pointing left, bending down) - used to build over- and underbraces.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracehtipdownright} - \comment{This is \cs{bracerd}, a tip (pointing right, bending down) - used to build over- and underbraces.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracehtipupleft} - \comment{This is \cs{bracelu}, a tip (pointing left, bending up) - used to build over- and underbraces.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracehtipupright} - \comment{This is \cs{braceru}, a tip (pointing right, bending up) - used to build over- and underbraces.} -\endsetslot - - - -\begincomment -\subsection{Text style operators} - -With the exception of the integrals, all the following characters -should be \textsc{n-ary \dots}, but some cases there are no such -variants defined in Unicode. -\endcomment - -\nextslot{"46} -\setslot{unionsqtext} - \Unicode{2294}{SQUARE CUP} - \nextlarger{unionsqdisplay} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} -\setslot{contintegraltext} - \Unicode{222E}{CONTOUR INTEGRAL} - \nextlarger{contintegraldisplay} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} -\setslot{circledottext} - \Unicode{2299}{CIRCLED DOT OPERATOR} - \nextlarger{circledotdisplay} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} -\setslot{circleplustext} - \Unicode{2295}{CIRCLED PLUS} - \nextlarger{circleplusdisplay} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} -\setslot{circlemultiplytext} - \Unicode{2297}{CIRCLED TIMES} - \nextlarger{circlemultiplydisplay} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} -\setslot{summationtext} - \Unicode{2211}{N-ARY SUMMATION} - \nextlarger{summationdisplay} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{producttext} - \Unicode{220F}{N-ARY PRODUCT} - \nextlarger{productdisplay} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{integraltext} - \Unicode{222B}{INTEGRAL} - \nextlarger{integraldisplay} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{uniontext} - \Unicode{22C3}{N-ARY UNION} - \nextlarger{uniondisplay} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{intersectiontext} - \Unicode{22C2}{N-ARY INTERSECTION} - \nextlarger{intersectiondisplay} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{unionmultitext} - \Unicode{228E}{MULTISET UNION} - \nextlarger{unionmultidisplay} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{logicalandtext} - \Unicode{22C0}{N-ARY LOGICAL AND} - \nextlarger{logicalanddisplay} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{logicalortext} - \Unicode{22C1}{N-ARY LOGICAL OR} - \nextlarger{logicalordisplay} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{8} -\setslot{coproducttext} - \Unicode{2210}{N-ARY COPRODUCT} - \nextlarger{coproductdisplay} -\endsetslot - - - -\begincomment -\subsection{Accents, arrows, and the radical} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{"62} -\setslot{hatwide} - \Unicode{0302}{COMBINING CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT} - \nextlarger{hatwider} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{2} - -\setslot{tildewide} - \Unicode{0303}{COMBINING TILDE} - \nextlarger{tildewider} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{"70} -\setslot{radicalbig} - \Unicode{221A}{SQUARE ROOT} - \nextlarger{radicalBig} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{"78} -\setslot{arrowtp} - \Unicode{2191}{UPWARDS ARROW} - \varchar - \vartop{arrowtp} - \varrep{arrowvertex} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\setslot{arrowbt} - \Unicode{2193}{DOWNWARDS ARROW} - \varchar - \varrep{arrowvertex} - \varbot{arrowbt} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{"7E} -\setslot{arrowdbltp} - \Unicode{21D1}{UPWARDS DOUBLE ARROW} - \varchar - \vartop{arrowdbltp} - \varrep{arrowdblvertex} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\setslot{arrowdblbt} - \Unicode{21D3}{DOWNWARDS DOUBLE ARROW} - \varchar - \varrep{arrowdblvertex} - \varbot{arrowdblbt} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - - - - - - -\begincomment -\section{Semimandatory characters} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{"3A} -\setslot{braceleftbt} - \comment{This is the \cs{lgroup} delimiter, which looks like a - \textunicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET} with flat middle section. - There does not seem to be such a character in Unicode, but a - close approximation would be a narrowed - \textunicode{3014}{LEFT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET}.} - \label{braceleftbt} - \varchar - \vartop{bracelefttp} - \varrep{braceex} - \varbot{braceleftbt} - \endvarchar - \comment{The slot contains the curved bottom of a - \textunicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET}.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracerightbt} - \comment{This is the \cs{rgroup} delimiter, which looks like a - \textunicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET} with flat middle section. - There does not seem to be such a character in Unicode, but a - close approximation would be a narrowed - \textunicode{3015}{RIGHT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET}.} - \label{bracerightbt} - \varchar - \vartop{bracerighttp} - \varrep{braceex} - \varbot{bracerightbt} - \endvarchar - \comment{The slot contains the curved bottom of a - \textunicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET}.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{braceleftmid} - \Unicode{007C}{VERTICAL LINE} - \comment{This is used by the \cs{arrowvert} command.} - \varchar - \varrep{arrowvertex} - \endvarchar - \comment{The slot contains the middle part of a - \textunicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET}.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracerightmid} - \Unicode{2016}{DOUBLE VERTICAL LINE} - \comment{This is used by the \cs{Arrowvert} command.} - \varchar - \varrep{arrowdblvertex} - \endvarchar - \comment{The slot contains the middle part of a - \textunicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET}.} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} - -\setslot{arrowvertex} - \Unicode{2195}{UP DOWN ARROW} - \varchar - \vartop{arrowtp} - \varrep{arrowvertex} - \varbot{arrowbt} - \endvarchar - \comment{This slot contains the repeatable middle part of a vertical - arrow.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{parenleftbt} - \label{parenleftbt} - \comment{This is the \cs{lmoustache} delimiter, whose top half is - like \cs{lgroup} and whose bottom half is like \cs{rgroup}.} - \varchar - \vartop{bracelefttp} - \varrep{braceex} - \varbot{bracerightbt} - \endvarchar - \comment{This slot contains the curved bottom of a - \textunicode{0028}{LEFT PARENTHESIS}.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{parenrightbt} - \label{parenrightbt} - \comment{This is the \cs{rmoustache} delimiter, whose top half is - like \cs{rgroup} and whose bottom half is like \cs{lgroup}.} - \varchar - \vartop{bracerighttp} - \varrep{braceex} - \varbot{braceleftbt} - \endvarchar - \comment{This slot contains the curved bottom of a - \textunicode{0029}{RIGHT PARENTHESIS}.} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{"77} -\setslot{arrowdblvertex} - \Unicode{21D5}{UP DOWN DOUBLE ARROW} - \varchar - \vartop{arrowdbltp} - \varbot{arrowdblbt} - \varrep{arrowdblvertex} - \endvarchar - \comment{This slot contains the repeatable middle part of a vertical - double arrow.} -\endsetslot - - - - - -\begincomment -\section{Ordinary characters} -\endcomment - - -\begincomment -\subsection{\texttt{Big} size delimiters} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{16} -\setslot{parenleftBig} - \Unicode{0028}{LEFT PARENTHESIS} - \nextlarger{parenleftbigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{parenrightBig} - \Unicode{0029}{RIGHT PARENTHESIS} - \nextlarger{parenrightbigg} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{46} -\setslot{slashBig} - \Unicode{2215}{DIVISION SLASH} - \nextlarger{slashbigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{backslashBig} - \Unicode{005C}{REVERSE SOLIDUS} - \nextlarger{backslashbigg} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{"44} -\setslot{angleleftBig} - \Unicode{2329}{LEFT-POINTING ANGLE BRACKET} - \nextlarger{angleleftbigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{anglerightBig} - \Unicode{232A}{RIGHT-POINTING ANGLE BRACKET} - \nextlarger{anglerightbigg} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{"68} -\setslot{bracketleftBig} - \Unicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET} - \nextlarger{bracketleftbigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracketrightBig} - \Unicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET} - \nextlarger{bracketrightbigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{floorleftBig} - \Unicode{230A}{LEFT FLOOR} - \nextlarger{floorleftbigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{floorrightBig} - \Unicode{230B}{RIGHT FLOOR} - \nextlarger{floorrightbigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ceilingleftBig} - \Unicode{2308}{LEFT CEILING} - \nextlarger{ceilingleftbigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ceilingrightBig} - \Unicode{2309}{RIGHT CEILING} - \nextlarger{ceilingrightbigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{braceleftBig} - \Unicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET} - \nextlarger{braceleftbigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracerightBig} - \Unicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET} - \nextlarger{bracerightbigg} -\endsetslot - - - - - -\begincomment -\subsection{\texttt{bigg} size delimiters} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{18} -\setslot{parenleftbigg} - \Unicode{0028}{LEFT PARENTHESIS} - \nextlarger{parenleftBigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{parenrightbigg} - \Unicode{0029}{RIGHT PARENTHESIS} - \nextlarger{parenrightBigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracketleftbigg} - \Unicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET} - \nextlarger{bracketleftBigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracketrightbigg} - \Unicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET} - \nextlarger{bracketrightBigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{floorleftbigg} - \Unicode{230A}{LEFT FLOOR} - \nextlarger{floorleftBigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{floorrightbigg} - \Unicode{230B}{RIGHT FLOOR} - \nextlarger{floorrightBigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ceilingleftbigg} - \Unicode{2308}{LEFT CEILING} - \nextlarger{ceilingleftBigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ceilingrightbigg} - \Unicode{2309}{RIGHT CEILING} - \nextlarger{ceilingrightBigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{braceleftbigg} - \Unicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET} - \nextlarger{braceleftBigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracerightbigg} - \Unicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET} - \nextlarger{bracerightBigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{angleleftbigg} - \Unicode{2329}{LEFT-POINTING ANGLE BRACKET} - \nextlarger{angleleftBigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{anglerightbigg} - \Unicode{232A}{RIGHT-POINTING ANGLE BRACKET} - \nextlarger{anglerightBigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{slashbigg} - \Unicode{2215}{DIVISION SLASH} - \nextlarger{slashBigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{backslashbigg} - \Unicode{005C}{REVERSE SOLIDUS} - \nextlarger{backslashBigg} -\endsetslot - - - -\begincomment -\subsection{\texttt{Bigg} size delimiters} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{32} -\setslot{parenleftBigg} - \Unicode{0028}{LEFT PARENTHESIS} - \nextlarger{parenlefttp} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{parenrightBigg} - \Unicode{0029}{RIGHT PARENTHESIS} - \nextlarger{parenrighttp} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracketleftBigg} - \Unicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET} - \nextlarger{bracketlefttp} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracketrightBigg} - \Unicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET} - \nextlarger{bracketrighttp} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{floorleftBigg} - \Unicode{230A}{LEFT FLOOR} - \nextlarger{bracketleftbt} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{floorrightBigg} - \Unicode{230B}{RIGHT FLOOR} - \nextlarger{bracketrightbt} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ceilingleftBigg} - \Unicode{2308}{LEFT CEILING} - \nextlarger{bracketleftex} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ceilingrightBigg} - \Unicode{2309}{RIGHT CEILING} - \nextlarger{bracketrightex} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{braceleftBigg} - \Unicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET} - \nextlarger{bracelefttp} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracerightBigg} - \Unicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET} - \nextlarger{bracerighttp} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{angleleftBigg} - \Unicode{2329}{LEFT-POINTING ANGLE BRACKET} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{anglerightBigg} - \Unicode{232A}{RIGHT-POINTING ANGLE BRACKET} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{slashBigg} - \Unicode{2215}{DIVISION SLASH} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{backslashBigg} - \Unicode{005C}{REVERSE SOLIDUS} -\endsetslot - - - -\begincomment -\subsection{Extensible delimiters} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{48} -\setslot{parenlefttp} - \comment{This slot contains the curved top of a - \textunicode{0028}{LEFT PARENTHESIS}.} - \varchar - \vartop{parenlefttp} - \varrep{parenleftex} - \varbot{parenleftbt} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\setslot{parenrighttp} - \comment{This slot contains the curved top of a - \textunicode{0029}{RIGHT PARENTHESIS}.} - \varchar - \vartop{parenrighttp} - \varrep{parenrightex} - \varbot{parenrightbt} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracketlefttp} - \comment{This slot contains the corner top of a - \textunicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET}.} - \varchar - \vartop{bracketlefttp} - \varrep{bracketleftex} - \varbot{bracketleftbt} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracketrighttp} - \comment{This slot contains the corner top of a - \textunicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET}.} - \varchar - \vartop{bracketrighttp} - \varrep{bracketrightex} - \varbot{bracketrightbt} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracketleftbt} - \comment{This slot contains the corner bottom of a - \textunicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET}, but it serves as the - final slot in the chain of larger sizes of - \textunicode{230A}{LEFT FLOOR}.} - \varchar - \varrep{bracketleftex} - \varbot{bracketleftbt} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracketrightbt} - \comment{This slot contains the corner bottom of a - \textunicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET}, but it serves as the - final slot in the chain of larger sizes of - \textunicode{230B}{RIGHT FLOOR}.} - \varchar - \varrep{bracketrightex} - \varbot{bracketrightbt} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracketleftex} - \comment{This slot contains the repeatable middle part of a - \textunicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET}, but it serves as the - final slot in the chain of larger sizes of - \textunicode{2308}{LEFT CEILING}.} - \varchar - \vartop{bracketlefttp} - \varrep{bracketleftex} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracketrightex} - \comment{This slot contains the repeatable middle part of a - \textunicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET}, but it serves as the - final slot in the chain of larger sizes of - \textunicode{2309}{RIGHT CEILING}.} - \varchar - \vartop{bracketrighttp} - \varrep{bracketrightex} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracelefttp} - \comment{This slot contains the curved top of a - \textunicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET}.} - \label{bracelefttp} - \varchar - \vartop{bracelefttp} - \varrep{braceex} - \varmid{braceleftmid} - \varbot{braceleftbt} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracerighttp} - \comment{This slot contains the curved top of a - \textunicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET}.} - \label{bracerighttp} - \varchar - \vartop{bracerighttp} - \varrep{braceex} - \varmid{bracerightmid} - \varbot{bracerightbt} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - - - - - -\begincomment -\subsection{Display style operators} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{"47} -\setslot{unionsqdisplay} - \Unicode{2294}{SQUARE CUP} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} -\setslot{contintegraldisplay} - \Unicode{222E}{CONTOUR INTEGRAL} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} -\setslot{circledotdisplay} - \Unicode{2299}{CIRCLED DOT OPERATOR} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} -\setslot{circleplusdisplay} - \Unicode{2295}{CIRCLED PLUS} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} -\setslot{circlemultiplydisplay} - \Unicode{2297}{CIRCLED TIMES} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{8} -\setslot{summationdisplay} - \Unicode{2211}{N-ARY SUMMATION} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{productdisplay} - \Unicode{220F}{N-ARY PRODUCT} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{integraldisplay} - \Unicode{222B}{INTEGRAL} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{uniondisplay} - \Unicode{22C3}{N-ARY UNION} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{intersectiondisplay} - \Unicode{22C2}{N-ARY INTERSECTION} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{unionmultidisplay} - \Unicode{228E}{MULTISET UNION} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{logicalanddisplay} - \Unicode{22C0}{N-ARY LOGICAL AND} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{logicalordisplay} - \Unicode{22C1}{N-ARY LOGICAL OR} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} -\setslot{coproductdisplay} - \Unicode{2210}{N-ARY COPRODUCT} -\endsetslot - - - -\begincomment -\subsection{Accents} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{"63} -\setslot{hatwider} - \Unicode{0302}{COMBINING CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT} - \nextlarger{hatwiderr} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{hatwiderr} - \Unicode{0302}{COMBINING CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} - -\setslot{tildewider} - \Unicode{0303}{COMBINING TILDE} - \nextlarger{tildewiderr} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{tildewiderr} - \Unicode{0303}{COMBINING TILDE} -\endsetslot - - -\begincomment -\subsection{Radicals} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{"71} -\setslot{radicalBig} - \Unicode{221A}{SQUARE ROOT} - \nextlarger{radicalbigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{radicalbigg} - \Unicode{221A}{SQUARE ROOT} - \nextlarger{radicalBigg} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{radicalBigg} - \Unicode{221A}{SQUARE ROOT} - \nextlarger{radicalbt} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{radicalbt} - \Unicode{221A}{SQUARE ROOT} - \varchar - \varbot{radicalbt} - \vartop{radicaltp} - \varrep{radicalvertex} - \endvarchar -\endsetslot - -\setslot{radicalvertex} - \comment{This is the repeatable, vertically middle part of an - extensible \textunicode{221A}{SQUARE ROOT}.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{radicaltp} - \comment{This is the top corner part of an extensible - \textunicode{221A}{SQUARE ROOT}.} -\endsetslot - - - - - -\begincomment -\section{Fontdimens and codingscheme} - -\texttt{OMX} fonts have the necessary fontdimens to serve as a math -group 3 font. -\endcomment - -\setfontdimen{1}{italicslant} % italic slant -\setfontdimen{2}{interword} % interword space -\setfontdimen{3}{stretchword} % interword stretch -\setfontdimen{4}{shrinkword} % interword shrink -\setfontdimen{5}{xheight} % x-height -\setfontdimen{6}{quad} % quad -\setfontdimen{7}{extraspace} % extra space after . - -\setfontdimen{8}{defaultrulethickness} % default rule thickness -\setfontdimen{9}{bigopspacing1} % bigopspacing 1 -\setfontdimen{10}{bigopspacing2} % bigopspacing 2 -\setfontdimen{11}{bigopspacing3} % bigopspacing 3 -\setfontdimen{12}{bigopspacing4} % bigopspacing 4 -\setfontdimen{13}{bigopspacing5} % bigopspacing 5 - -\setstr{codingscheme}{TEX MATH EXTENSION} - - - - - -\endencoding - - -\section{Discussion} - - - -\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/ot1draft.etx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/ot1draft.etx deleted file mode 100644 index 6f07bbd6f4a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/ot1draft.etx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1027 +0,0 @@ -\relax -\documentclass[twocolumn]{article} -\usepackage[specification]{fontdoc}[2004/11/28] - -\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}} - -\showbranches - -\begin{document} - -\title{\texttt{OT1} encoding draft specification} -\author{Lars Hellstr\"om} -\date{2004/12/16} -\maketitle - -\begin{abstract} - The \texttt{OT1} encoding is an attempt to describe the encoding of - the text fonts in Donald~E.~Knuth's \emph{Computer Modern} family - of fonts~\cite{ComputerModern}. This is an impossibile goal, since - these fonts present no less than five different encodings, but they - are nontheless largely treated by \LaTeX\ as having identical - encodings. Due to the ambiguities this creates, and in view of that - the \texttt{T1} encoding supersedes \texttt{OT1} as text font - encoding, there is little point in using the text commands for - distiguishing mandatory features of \texttt{OT1} from the ordinary. - - \texttt{OT1} is however also used as a math font encoding (to go - with \texttt{OML}, \texttt{OMS}, and \texttt{OMX}), and that use is - today the by far most important since there is no obvious alternative - to the standard math font set-up. Therefore this specification - considers a feature of the encoding to be mandatory if it is - (i)~necessary for the standard math set-up or (ii)~is a text feature - which works for all encoding variants. -\end{abstract} - -\encoding -\needsfontinstversion{1.928} - - - -\begincomment -\section{Encoding variants} - -This document aims to record all the encoding variations that are -present within the set of fonts classified by \LaTeX\ as having the -\texttt{OT1} encoding. It turns out that they can all be described -using only two parameters. One of these might be called -`\textit{ligaturing}' as one factor it affects is how many ligatures -there will be in the font. The other parameter is best called -`\textit{italicizing}' as it is different between italic and -non-italic fonts. Most of the Computer Modern fonts have -\(\mathit{ligaturing} = 2\) and \(\mathit{italicizing} = 0\). - -\endcomment -\setint{ligaturing}{2} -\setint{italicizing}{0} - - -\begincomment - - -\section{Mandatory characters} - -\subsection{Latin letters} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{16} -\setslot{dotlessi} - \Unicode{0131}{LATIN SMALL LETTER DOTLESS I} - \comment{A dotless i `\i', used to produce accented letters such as - `\=\i'. It is not used for math.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{dotlessj} - \Unicode{F6BE}{LATIN SMALL LETTER DOTLESS J} - \comment{A dotless j `\j', used to produce accented letters such as - `\=\j'. It is not used for math. The Unicode standard does not - define this character, but Adobe has assigned code point - \texttt{U+F6BE} (which is in the private use subarea assigned by - Adobe) to it.} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{25} -\setslot{germandbls} - \Unicode{00DF}{LATIN SMALL LETTER SHARP S} - \comment{This slot is not used in math.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ae} - \Unicode{00E6}{LATIN SMALL LETTER AE} - \comment{This slot is not used in math.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{oe} - \Unicode{0153}{LATIN SMALL LIGATURE OE} - \comment{This is a single letter, and should not be faked with `oe'. - It is not used in math.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{oslash} - \Unicode{00F8}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH STROKE} - \comment{This slot is not used in math.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{AE} - \Unicode{00C6}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER AE} - \comment{This slot is not used in math.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{OE} - \Unicode{0152}{LATIN CAPITAL LIGATURE OE} - \comment{This is a single letter, and should not be faked with - `OE'. It is not used in math.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Oslash} - \Unicode{00D8}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH STROKE} - \comment{This slot is not used in math.} -\endsetslot - - -\nextslot{65} -\setslot{A} - \Unicode{0041}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A} - \label{A} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{B} - \Unicode{0042}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER B} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{C} - \Unicode{0043}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{D} - \Unicode{0044}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{E} - \Unicode{0045}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{F} - \Unicode{0046}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER F} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{G} - \Unicode{0047}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{H} - \Unicode{0048}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{I} - \Unicode{0049}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{J} - \Unicode{004A}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER J} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{K} - \Unicode{004B}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER K} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{L} - \Unicode{004C}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{M} - \Unicode{004D}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{N} - \Unicode{004E}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{O} - \Unicode{004F}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{P} - \Unicode{0050}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Q} - \Unicode{0051}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Q} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{R} - \Unicode{0052}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{S} - \Unicode{0053}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{T} - \Unicode{0054}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{U} - \Unicode{0055}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{V} - \Unicode{0056}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER V} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{W} - \Unicode{0057}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{X} - \Unicode{0058}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Y} - \Unicode{0059}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y} - \label{Y} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Z} - \Unicode{005A}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z} -\endsetslot - - -\nextslot{97} -\setslot{a} - \Unicode{0061}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{b} - \Unicode{0062}{LATIN SMALL LETTER B} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{c} - \Unicode{0063}{LATIN SMALL LETTER C} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{d} - \Unicode{0064}{LATIN SMALL LETTER D} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{e} - \Unicode{0065}{LATIN SMALL LETTER E} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{f} - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}={2}\then - \ligature{LIG}{f}{ff} - \ligature{LIG}{i}{fi} - \ligature{LIG}{l}{fl} - \Fi -\endsetslot - -\setslot{g} - \Unicode{0067}{LATIN SMALL LETTER G} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{h} - \Unicode{0068}{LATIN SMALL LETTER H} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{i} - \Unicode{0069}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{j} - \Unicode{006A}{LATIN SMALL LETTER J} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{k} - \Unicode{006B}{LATIN SMALL LETTER K} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{l} - \Unicode{006C}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{m} - \Unicode{006D}{LATIN SMALL LETTER M} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{n} - \Unicode{006E}{LATIN SMALL LETTER N} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{o} - \Unicode{006F}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{p} - \Unicode{0070}{LATIN SMALL LETTER P} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{q} - \Unicode{0071}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Q} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{r} - \Unicode{0072}{LATIN SMALL LETTER R} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{s} - \Unicode{0073}{LATIN SMALL LETTER S} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{t} - \Unicode{0074}{LATIN SMALL LETTER T} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{u} - \Unicode{0075}{LATIN SMALL LETTER U} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{v} - \Unicode{0076}{LATIN SMALL LETTER V} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{w} - \Unicode{0077}{LATIN SMALL LETTER W} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{x} - \Unicode{0078}{LATIN SMALL LETTER X} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{y} - \Unicode{0079}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Y} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{z} - \Unicode{007A}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Z} -\endsetslot - - -\begincomment -\subsection{Greek letters} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{0} -\setslot{Gamma} - \Unicode{0393}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER GAMMA} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Delta} - \Unicode{0394}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER DELTA} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Theta} - \Unicode{0398}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER THETA} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Lambda} - \Unicode{039B}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER LAMBDA} - % Unicode's preferred name for this character seems to be - % GREEK CAPITAL LETTER LAMDA, i.e., without the `B'. Why? - % GREEK CAPITAL LETTER LAMBDA is listed as an alternative name. -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Xi} - \Unicode{039E}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER XI} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Pi} - \Unicode{03A0}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER PI} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Sigma} - \Unicode{03A3}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER SIGMA} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Upsilon1} - \Unicode{03D2}{GREEK UPSILON WITH HOOK SYMBOL} - \comment{This is primarily a math character and it is should - be visually distinct from the character in slot~\ref{Y}. This is - not generally the case for the normal Upsilon - \textunicode{03A5}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER UPSILON}, which is by - the way what usually has the glyph name \texttt{Upsilon}. - An argument for the latter is however that all the purely - mathematical Upsilons that exist in the Unicode standard are - described as variants of the non-hook character.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Phi} - \Unicode{03A6}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER PHI} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Psi} - \Unicode{03A8}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER PSI} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Omega} - \Unicode{03A9}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER OMEGA} -\endsetslot - - -\begincomment -\subsection{Digits} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{48} -\setslot{zero} - \Unicode{0030}{DIGIT ZERO} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{one} - \Unicode{0031}{DIGIT ONE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{two} - \Unicode{0032}{DIGIT TWO} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{three} - \Unicode{0033}{DIGIT THREE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{four} - \Unicode{0034}{DIGIT FOUR} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{five} - \Unicode{0035}{DIGIT FIVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{six} - \Unicode{0036}{DIGIT SIX} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{seven} - \Unicode{0037}{DIGIT SEVEN} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{eight} - \Unicode{0038}{DIGIT EIGHT} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{nine} - \Unicode{0039}{DIGIT NINE} -\endsetslot - - -\begincomment -\subsection{Accents} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{18} -\setslot{grave} - \Unicode{0300}{COMBINING GRAVE ACCENT} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{acute} - \Unicode{0301}{COMBINING ACUTE ACCENT} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{caron} - \Unicode{030C}{COMBINING CARON} - \comment{The caron or h\'a\v cek accent `\v{}'.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{breve} - \Unicode{0306}{COMBINING BREVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{macron} - \Unicode{0304}{COMBINING MACRON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ring} - \Unicode{030A}{COMBINING RING ABOVE} - \comment{The text definition of `\verb|\r{A}|' assumes that this - glyph has the same width as that in slot~\ref{A}.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{cedilla} - \Unicode{0327}{COMBINING CEDILLA} - \comment{This slot is not required for math, but is used by - the \cs{c} \LaTeX\ command.} -\endsetslot - - -\nextslot{94} -\setslot{circumflex} - \Unicode{0302}{COMBINING CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT} - \Unicode{005E}{CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT} -\endsetslot - -\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then - -\setslot{dotaccent} - \Unicode{0307}{COMBINING DOT ABOVE} - \label{dotaccent} -\endsetslot - -\begincomment -\par\medskip -Note that the \(\mathit{ligaturing} = 0\) assignment to -slot~\ref{underscore} is ordinary, not mandatory. -\endcomment - -\Fi - - -\nextslot{126} -\setslot{tilde} - \Unicode{0303}{COMBINING TILDE} - \Unicode{007E}{TILDE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{dieresis} - \Unicode{0308}{COMBINING DIAERESIS} -\endsetslot - - -\begincomment -\subsection{Symbols} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{33} -\setslot{exclam} - \Unicode{0021}{EXCLAMATION MARK} - \Ligature{LIG}{quoteleft}{exclamdown} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} - -\setslot{numbersign} - \Unicode{0023}{NUMBER SIGN} - \comment{This slot is not used for math.} -\endsetslot - -\ifnumber{\int{italicizing}}={0}\then - -\setslot{dollar} - \Unicode{0024}{DOLLAR SIGN} -\endsetslot - -\Else - -\setslot{sterling} - \Unicode{00A3}{POUND SIGN} -\endsetslot - -\Fi - -\setslot{percent} - \Unicode{0025}{PERCENT SIGN} - \comment{This slot is not used for math.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ampersand} - \Unicode{0026}{AMPERSAND} - \comment{This slot is not used for math.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{quoteright} - \Unicode{2019}{RIGHT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK} - \comment{This slot is not used for math.} - \ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then - \Ligature{LIG}{quoteright}{quotedblright} - \Fi -\endsetslot - -\setslot{parenleft} - \Unicode{0028}{LEFT PARENTHESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{parenright} - \Unicode{0029}{RIGHT PARENTHESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{asterisk} - \Unicode{002A}{ASTERISK} - \comment{This slot is not used for math.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{plus} - \Unicode{002B}{PLUS SIGN} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{comma} - \Unicode{002C}{COMMA} - \comment{This slot is not used for math.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{hyphen} - \Unicode{002D}{HYPHEN-MINUS} - \comment{This slot is not used for math.} - \ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then - \Ligature{LIG}{hyphen}{endash} - \Fi -\endsetslot - -\setslot{period} - \Unicode{002E}{FULL STOP} - \comment{This slot is not used for math.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{slash} - \Unicode{002F}{SOLIDUS} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{58} -\setslot{colon} - \Unicode{003A}{COLON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{semicolon} - \Unicode{003B}{SEMICOLON} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} - -\setslot{equal} - \Unicode{003D}{EQUALS SIGN} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} - -\setslot{question} - \Unicode{003F}{QUESTION MARK} - \Ligature{LIG}{quoteleft}{questiondown} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{at} - \Unicode{0040}{COMMERCIAL AT} - \comment{This slot is not used for math.} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{91} -\setslot{bracketleft} - \Unicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} - -\setslot{bracketright} - \Unicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{96} -\setslot{quoteleft} - \Unicode{2018}{LEFT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK} - \comment{This slot is not used for math.} - \ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then - \Ligature{LIG}{quoteleft}{quotedblleft} - \Fi -\endsetslot - - - -\begincomment -\section{Ordinary characters} - -\subsection{Letters} -\endcomment - -\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}={2}\then - -\nextslot{11} -\setslot{ff} - \charseq{ - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - } - \comment{This glyph should be two characters wide in a monowidth - font.} - \ligature{LIG}{i}{ffi} - \ligature{LIG}{l}{ffl} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{fi} - \charseq{ - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \Unicode{0069}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I} - } - \comment{This glyph should be two characters wide in a monowidth - font.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{fl} - \charseq{ - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \Unicode{006C}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L} - } - \comment{This glyph should be two characters wide in a monowidth - font.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ffi} - \charseq{ - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \Unicode{0069}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I} - } - \comment{This glyph should be three characters wide in a monowidth - font.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ffl} - \charseq{ - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \Unicode{006C}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L} - } - \comment{This glyph should be three characters wide in a monowidth - font.} -\endsetslot - -\Fi - -\nextslot{"8A} -\setslot{Lslash} - \Unicode{0141}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH STROKE} - \comment{The letter `\L'.} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{"AA} -\setslot{lslash} - \Unicode{0142}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH STROKE} - \comment{The letter `\l'.} -\endsetslot - - -\begincomment -\subsection{Accents} -\endcomment - -\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then - -\nextslot{125} -\setslot{hungarumlaut} - \Unicode{030B}{COMBINING DOUBLE ACUTE ACCENT} - \comment{The long Hungarian umlaut `\H{}'.} -\endsetslot - -\Fi - -\begincomment -\subsection{Symbols} -\endcomment - -\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}<{2}\then - -\nextslot{11} -\setslot{arrowup} - \Unicode{2191}{UPWARDS ARROW} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{arrowdown} - \Unicode{2193}{DOWNWARDS ARROW} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{quotesingle} - \Unicode{0027}{APOSTROPHE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{exclamdown} - \Unicode{00A1}{INVERTED EXCLAMATION MARK} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{questiondown} - \Unicode{00BF}{INVERTED QUESTION MARK} -\endsetslot - -\Fi - -\nextslot{32} -\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then - -\setslot{lslashslash} - \comment{When this character is followed by - \textunicode{004C}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L} then the combined - result is \textunicode{0141}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH STROKE}; - this is used by the \cs{L} command. When this character is - followed by \textunicode{006C}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L} then the - combined result is \textunicode{0142}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH - STROKE}; this is used by the \cs{l} command. There are no further - semantics for this character.} - \ligature{LIG}{L}{Lslash} - \ligature{LIG}{l}{lslash} - \comment{These ligatures, and the characters they point to, were - added by Alan Jeffrey early in \textsf{fontinst} development in - order to allow the character in this slot to exhibit the correct - behaviour even in fonts where there is no corresponding glyph.} -\endsetslot - -\Else - -\setslot{visiblespace} - \Unicode{2423}{OPEN BOX} - \comment{A visible space glyph `\textvisiblespace'.} -\endsetslot - -\Fi - - -\nextslot{34} -\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then - -\setslot{quotedblright} - \Unicode{201D}{RIGHT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK} -\endsetslot - -\Else - -\setslot{quotedbl} - \Unicode{0022}{QUOTATION MARK} -\endsetslot - -\Fi - -\nextslot{60} -\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}={2}\then - -\setslot{exclamdown} - \Unicode{00A1}{INVERTED EXCLAMATION MARK} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} - -\setslot{questiondown} - \Unicode{00BF}{INVERTED QUESTION MARK} -\endsetslot - -\Else - -\setslot{less} - \Unicode{003C}{LESS-THAN SIGN} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} - -\setslot{greater} - \Unicode{003E}{GREATER-THAN SIGN} -\endsetslot - -\Fi - -\nextslot{92} -\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then - -\setslot{quotedblleft} - \Unicode{201C}{LEFT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK} -\endsetslot - -\Else - -\setslot{backslash} - \Unicode{005C}{REVERSE SOLIDUS} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{95} -\setslot{underscore} - \Unicode{005F}{LOW LINE} - \label{underscore} -\endsetslot - -\begincomment -\par\medskip -Note that the \(\mathit{ligaturing} > 0\) assignment to -slot~\ref{dotaccent} is mandatory, not ordinary. -\endcomment - -\Fi - - -\nextslot{123} -\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then - -\setslot{endash} - \Unicode{2013}{EN DASH} - \Ligature{LIG}{hyphen}{emdash} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{emdash} - \Unicode{2014}{EM DASH} - \comment{In a monowidth font this character is preferably given the - width of two normal characters.} -\endsetslot - -\Else - -\setslot{braceleft} - \Unicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bar} - \Unicode{007C}{VERTICAL LINE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{braceright} - \Unicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET} -\endsetslot - -\Fi - - -\begincomment -\section{Fontdimens} -\endcomment - -\setfontdimen{1}{italicslant} % italic slant -\setfontdimen{2}{interword} % interword space -\setfontdimen{3}{stretchword} % interword stretch -\setfontdimen{4}{shrinkword} % interword shrink -\setfontdimen{5}{xheight} % x-height -\setfontdimen{6}{quad} % quad -\setfontdimen{7}{extraspace} % extra space after . - - -\begincomment -\section{Coding scheme} -\endcomment - -\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}={2}\then - -\setstr{codingscheme}{TEX TEXT} - -\Else\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}={1}\then - -\setstr{codingscheme}{TEX TEXT WITHOUT F-LIGATURES} - -\Else - -\setstr{codingscheme}{TEX TYPEWRITER TEXT} - -\Fi\Fi - - -\endencoding - - -\section{Discussion} - - -\subsection{\texttt{OT1} as math font encoding} - -As source for the math requirements on the \texttt{OT1} encoding -was used the standard \LaTeX\ math set-up~\cite{fontdef}. Those -definitions that make use of \texttt{OT1} fonts either use the -\texttt{operators} symbol font\slash font family~0 or have math -class~7 (\cs{mathalpha}). - -There are two slots used for math that have different assignments -in different encoding variants. Slot 36 (\texttt{dollar}\slash -\texttt{sterling}) depends on the $\mathit{italicizing}$, and is used -by the commands \cs{mathdollar} (called by \verb|\$|) and -\cs{mathsterling} (called by \cs{pounds}). This works because these -commands explicitly take the character from a font with the correct -$\mathit{italicizing}$. - -Slot~95 (\texttt{dotaccent}\slash \texttt{underline}) depends on the -$\mathit{ligaturing}$ and is used by the \cs{dot} command. This -command does \emph{not} work for fonts with \(\mathit{ligaturing}=0\), -and hence e.g.\ the formula \verb|$\mathtt{\dot{x}}$| does not produce -a typewriter dotted `x', but rather an `x' and underscore printed on -top of each other. This is thus an error, but due to that it is -unlikely that the error will be missed by the author who encounters -it, the error is probably harmless. - - -\subsection{\texttt{OT1} as text font encoding} - -The sources used to determine the text requirements on the -\texttt{OT1} encoding were~\cite{ltoutenc}. - -It turns out that there are LICR commands which rely on non-mandatory -features of the font. It is mostly for the \(\mathit{ligaturing} = 0\) -fonts that commands produce incorrect results. The following commands -work with all \texttt{OT1} fonts which have \(\mathit{ligaturing} > 0\) -but fail with the others: \cs{L}, \cs{l}, \cs{.}, \cs{H}, -\cs{textemdash}, \cs{textendash}, and \cs{textquotedblleft}. -In addition, the command \cs{textquotedblright} produces a -reasonable, but not exactly correct, result. - -Traditionally the \cs{textexclamdown} and \cs{textquestiondown} have -only worked for fonts which have \(\mathit{ligaturing} = 2\), but -that can be fixed; see~\cite{latex/3368}. - - -\section{Changes} - -The changes made to this specification since the original 2001/09/09 -version are as follows. - -2004/12/16: Changed the f-ligatures to character sequences, which -makes more sense for \texttt{CMap}s. Incremented needed versions -accordingly. /LH - - -\begin{thebibliography}{9} -\bibitem{ltoutenc} - Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, Alan Jeffrey, Frank Mittelbach, - Chris Rowley, and Rainer Sch\"opf: - \textit{ltoutenc.dtx}, v\,1.91 (2000); - the file \texttt{ltoutenc.dtx} in the \LaTeX\ base distribution. -\bibitem{latex/3368} - Lars Hellstr\"om: - \textit{\texttt{OT1} def.\ of \cs{textexclamdown} and - \cs{textquestiondown}}, \LaTeX\ bugs database entry - \textbf{latex/3368}, 2001. -% ; \textsc{http:}/\slash \texttt{www.latex-project.org}\slash -% \texttt{cgi-bin}\slash \texttt{ltxbugs2html\discretionary{?}{}{?}% -% pr=latex/3368}. -\bibitem{ComputerModern} - Donald E. Knuth: - \textit{Computer Modern Typefaces}, - volume E of \textit{Computers \& Typesetting}, - Ad\-di\-son--Wes\-ley, 1986, xvi+588\,pp.; - ISBN~0-201-13446-2. -\bibitem{fontdef} - Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf: - \textit{The \texttt{fontdef.dtx} file}, v\,2.2x (1999); - the file \texttt{fontdef.dtx} in the \LaTeX\ base distribution. -\end{thebibliography} - - -\end{document} - - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/t1draft.etx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/t1draft.etx deleted file mode 100644 index d82c9e53ed0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/t1draft.etx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1484 +0,0 @@ -\relax -\documentclass[twocolumn]{article} -\usepackage[specification]{fontdoc}[2004/11/28] -\usepackage{shortvrb} - -\MakeShortVerb{\|} - -\begin{document} -\title{\texttt{T1} encoding draft specification} -\author{Lars Hellstr\"om} -\date{2002/07/05} -\maketitle - -\begin{abstract} - The \texttt{T1} encoding covers most\footnote{But not quite all.} - letters in the latin script that are used in European languages. - Code points 32--126 coincide with ASCII\footnote{As defined in - Appendix C of \emph{The \TeX book}~\cite{TeXbook}, not as defined - by the ANSI.} and code points 192--255 are mainly the same as in - the latin-1 encoding~\cite{ISO8859-1,latin-page}, but there are - exceptions. -\end{abstract} - -\encoding - -\needsfontinstversion{1.928} - -\begincomment -\section{Mandatory characters} -\endcomment - -\begincomment -\subsection{Letters} -More than two thirds of the characters in the encoding are letters. -This is a deliberate choice: \TeX's hyphenation algorithm requires -that all characters in a word are taken from the same font, hence it -is advantageous\footnote{Probably less so than what was thought when -the encoding was designed, but still advantageous.} to keep as many -letters as possible in the same font. Taking symbols from other fonts -is less of a disadvantage. - -\subsubsection{``Unaccented'' letters in slots 0--127} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{25} -\setslot{dotlessi} - \Unicode{0131}{LATIN SMALL LETTER DOTLESS I} - \comment{A dotless i `\i', used to produce accented letters such as - `\=\i'.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{dotlessj} - \Unicode{F6BE}{LATIN SMALL LETTER DOTLESS J} - \comment{A dotless j `\j', used to produce accented letters such as - `\=\j'. The Unicode standard does not define this character, but - Adobe has assigned code point \texttt{U+F6BE} (which lies - in the private use subarea assigned by Adobe) to it.} -\endsetslot - - -\nextslot{65} -\setslot{A} - \Unicode{0041}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{B} - \Unicode{0042}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER B} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{C} - \Unicode{0043}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{D} - \Unicode{0044}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{E} - \Unicode{0045}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{F} - \Unicode{0046}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER F} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{G} - \Unicode{0047}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{H} - \Unicode{0048}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{I} - \Unicode{0049}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I} - \oddligature{This ligature only occurs in Dutch typography.} - {LIG}{J}{IJ} - \oddligature{This ligature only occurs in Dutch typography.} - {LIG}{j}{IJ} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{J} - \Unicode{004A}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER J} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{K} - \Unicode{004B}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER K} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{L} - \Unicode{004C}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{M} - \Unicode{004D}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{N} - \Unicode{004E}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{O} - \Unicode{004F}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{P} - \Unicode{0050}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Q} - \Unicode{0051}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Q} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{R} - \Unicode{0052}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{S} - \Unicode{0053}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{T} - \Unicode{0054}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{U} - \Unicode{0055}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{V} - \Unicode{0056}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER V} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{W} - \Unicode{0057}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{X} - \Unicode{0058}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Y} - \Unicode{0059}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Z} - \Unicode{005A}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z} -\endsetslot - - -\nextslot{97} -\setslot{a} - \Unicode{0061}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{b} - \Unicode{0062}{LATIN SMALL LETTER B} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{c} - \Unicode{0063}{LATIN SMALL LETTER C} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{d} - \Unicode{0064}{LATIN SMALL LETTER D} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{e} - \Unicode{0065}{LATIN SMALL LETTER E} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{f} - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \ligature{LIG}{f}{ff} - \ligature{LIG}{i}{fi} - \ligature{LIG}{l}{fl} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{g} - \Unicode{0067}{LATIN SMALL LETTER G} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{h} - \Unicode{0068}{LATIN SMALL LETTER H} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{i} - \Unicode{0069}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I} - \oddligature{This ligature only occurs in Dutch typography.} - {LIG}{j}{ij} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{j} - \Unicode{006A}{LATIN SMALL LETTER J} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{k} - \Unicode{006B}{LATIN SMALL LETTER K} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{l} - \Unicode{006C}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{m} - \Unicode{006D}{LATIN SMALL LETTER M} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{n} - \Unicode{006E}{LATIN SMALL LETTER N} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{o} - \Unicode{006F}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{p} - \Unicode{0070}{LATIN SMALL LETTER P} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{q} - \Unicode{0071}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Q} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{r} - \Unicode{0072}{LATIN SMALL LETTER R} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{s} - \Unicode{0073}{LATIN SMALL LETTER S} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{t} - \Unicode{0074}{LATIN SMALL LETTER T} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{u} - \Unicode{0075}{LATIN SMALL LETTER U} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{v} - \Unicode{0076}{LATIN SMALL LETTER V} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{w} - \Unicode{0077}{LATIN SMALL LETTER W} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{x} - \Unicode{0078}{LATIN SMALL LETTER X} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{y} - \Unicode{0079}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Y} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{z} - \Unicode{007A}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Z} -\endsetslot - - -\begincomment -\subsubsection{Mainly East-European accented letters - in slots 128--191} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{128} -\setslot{Abreve} - \Unicode{0102}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH BREVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Aogonek} - \Unicode{0104}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OGONEK} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Cacute} - \Unicode{0106}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Ccaron} - \Unicode{010C}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH CARON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Dcaron} - \Unicode{010E}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH CARON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Ecaron} - \Unicode{011A}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH CARON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Eogonek} - \Unicode{0118}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH OGONEK} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Gbreve} - \Unicode{011E}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G WITH BREVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Lacute} - \Unicode{0139}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Lcaron} - \Unicode{013D}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH CARON} - \comment{The normal glyph for this character consists of a capital - L and a right single quote, but the underlying accent is a caron. - The glyph name \texttt{Lquoteright} is not uncommon, but - \cite{AGL} uses \texttt{Lcaron}.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Lslash} - \Unicode{0141}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH STROKE} - \comment{The letter `\L'.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Nacute} - \Unicode{0143}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Ncaron} - \Unicode{0147}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH CARON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Eng} - \Unicode{014A}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ENG} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Ohungarumlaut} - \Unicode{0150}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH DOUBLE ACUTE} - \comment{The letter `\H{O}'.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Racute} - \Unicode{0154}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Rcaron} - \Unicode{0158}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R WITH CARON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Sacute} - \Unicode{015A}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Scaron} - \Unicode{0160}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH CARON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Scedilla} - \Unicode{015E}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH CEDILLA} - \comment{In Romanian, character \textunicode{0218}{latin - capital letter s with comma below} is preferred, but that - wasn't known when this encoding was designed.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Tcaron} - \Unicode{0164}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T WITH CARON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Tcommaaccent} - \Unicode{021A}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T WITH COMMA BELOW} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Uhungarumlaut} - \Unicode{0170}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DOUBLE ACUTE} - \comment{The letter `\H{U}'.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Uring} - \Unicode{016E}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH RING ABOVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Ydieresis} - \Unicode{0178}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH DIAERESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Zacute} - \Unicode{0179}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Zcaron} - \Unicode{017D}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH CARON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Zdotaccent} - \Unicode{017B}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH DOT ABOVE} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{1} -\setslot{Idotaccent} - \Unicode{0130}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH DOT ABOVE} - \comment{This character's |\lccode| value points to slot 105 - (\texttt{i}), as does that of slot 73 (\texttt{I}).} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{dcroat} - \Unicode{0111}{LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH STROKE} -\endsetslot - - -\nextslot{160} -\setslot{abreve} - \Unicode{0103}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH BREVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{aogonek} - \Unicode{0105}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OGONEK} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{cacute} - \Unicode{0107}{LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ccaron} - \Unicode{010D}{LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH CARON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{dcaron} - \Unicode{010F}{LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH CARON} - \comment{The normal glyph for this character consists of a - lower case d and a right single quote, but the underlying - accent is a caron.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ecaron} - \Unicode{011B}{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CARON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{eogonek} - \Unicode{0119}{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH OGONEK} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{gbreve} - \Unicode{011F}{LATIN SMALL LETTER G WITH BREVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{lacute} - \Unicode{013A}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{lcaron} - \Unicode{013E}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH CARON} - \comment{The normal glyph for this character consists of a - lower case l and a right single quote, but the underlying - accent is a caron. The glyph name \texttt{lquoteright} is - not uncommon, but \cite{AGL} uses \texttt{lcaron}.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{lslash} - \Unicode{0142}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH STROKE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{nacute} - \Unicode{0144}{LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ncaron} - \Unicode{0148}{LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH CARON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{eng} - \Unicode{014B}{LATIN SMALL LETTER ENG} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ohungarumlaut} - \Unicode{0151}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH DOUBLE ACUTE} - \comment{The letter `\H{o}'.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{racute} - \Unicode{0155}{LATIN SMALL LETTER R WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{rcaron} - \Unicode{0159}{LATIN SMALL LETTER R WITH CARON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{sacute} - \Unicode{015B}{LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{scaron} - \Unicode{0161}{LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH CARON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{scedilla} - \Unicode{015F}{LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH CEDILLA} - \comment{In Romanian, character \textunicode{0219}{latin - small letter s with comma below} is preferred, but that - wasn't known when this encoding was designed.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{tcaron} - \Unicode{0165}{LATIN SMALL LETTER T WITH CARON} - \comment{The normal glyph for this character consists of a - lower case t and a right single quote, but the underlying - accent is a caron.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{tcommaaccent} - \Unicode{021B}{LATIN SMALL LETTER T WITH COMMA BELOW} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{uhungarumlaut} - \Unicode{0171}{LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DOUBLE ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{uring} - \Unicode{016F}{LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH RING ABOVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ydieresis} - \Unicode{00FF}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Y WITH DIAERESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{zacute} - \Unicode{017A}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{zcaron} - \Unicode{017E}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH CARON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{zdotaccent} - \Unicode{017C}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH DOT ABOVE} -\endsetslot - - -\begincomment -\subsubsection{Mainly West-European accented letters in slots 192--255} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{192} -\setslot{Agrave} - \Unicode{00C0}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH GRAVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Aacute} - \Unicode{00C1}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Acircumflex} - \Unicode{00C2}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH CIRCUMFLEX} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Atilde} - \Unicode{00C3}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH TILDE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Adieresis} - \Unicode{00C4}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH DIAERESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Aring} - \Unicode{00C5}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH RING ABOVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{AE} - \Unicode{00C6}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER AE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Ccedilla} - \Unicode{00C7}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH CEDILLA} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Egrave} - \Unicode{00C8}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH GRAVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Eacute} - \Unicode{00C9}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Ecircumflex} - \Unicode{00CA}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Edieresis} - \Unicode{00CB}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Igrave} - \Unicode{00CC}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH GRAVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Iacute} - \Unicode{00CD}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Icircumflex} - \Unicode{00CE}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH CIRCUMFLEX} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Idieresis} - \Unicode{00CF}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH DIAERESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Eth} - \Unicode{00D0}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH} - \Unicode{0110}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH STROKE} - \comment{This slot is being used to represent two different - letters whose capital forms are identical. The |\lccode| value - points to slot \ref{eth}.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Ntilde} - \Unicode{00D1}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH TILDE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Ograve} - \Unicode{00D2}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH GRAVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Oacute} - \Unicode{00D3}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Ocircumflex} - \Unicode{00D4}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH CIRCUMFLEX} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Otilde} - \Unicode{00D5}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH TILDE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Odieresis} - \Unicode{00D6}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH DIAERESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{OE} - \Unicode{0152}{LATIN CAPITAL LIGATURE OE} - \comment{This is a single letter, and should not be faked with `OE'.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Oslash} - \Unicode{00D8}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH STROKE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Ugrave} - \Unicode{00D9}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH GRAVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Uacute} - \Unicode{00DA}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Ucircumflex} - \Unicode{00DB}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH CIRCUMFLEX} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Udieresis} - \Unicode{00DC}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Yacute} - \Unicode{00DD}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{Thorn} - \Unicode{00DE}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{SS} - \comment{This is an ``uppercased'' sharp s (`\ss') which always - looks exactly like two S's next to each other. In a monowidth - font it should be two letters wide. There are other characters - which could have made better use of this slot; the only function - of this slot which could not have been handled using macros is - that |\SS| and |SS| can have different hyphenation.} - \label{SS} - \charseq{ - \Unicode{0053}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S} - \Unicode{0053}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S} - } -\endsetslot - -\setslot{agrave} - \Unicode{00E0}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH GRAVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{aacute} - \Unicode{00E1}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{acircumflex} - \Unicode{00E2}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH CIRCUMFLEX} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{atilde} - \Unicode{00E3}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH TILDE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{adieresis} - \Unicode{00E4}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DIAERESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{aring} - \Unicode{00E5}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH RING ABOVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ae} - \Unicode{00E6}{LATIN SMALL LETTER AE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ccedilla} - \Unicode{00E7}{LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH CEDILLA} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{egrave} - \Unicode{00E8}{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH GRAVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{eacute} - \Unicode{00E9}{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ecircumflex} - \Unicode{00EA}{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{edieresis} - \Unicode{00EB}{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{igrave} - \Unicode{00EC}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH GRAVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{iacute} - \Unicode{00ED}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{icircumflex} - \Unicode{00EE}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH CIRCUMFLEX} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{idieresis} - \Unicode{00EF}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH DIAERESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{eth} - \Unicode{00F0}{LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH} - \label{eth} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ntilde} - \Unicode{00F1}{LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH TILDE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ograve} - \Unicode{00F2}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH GRAVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{oacute} - \Unicode{00F3}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ocircumflex} - \Unicode{00F4}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH CIRCUMFLEX} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{otilde} - \Unicode{00F5}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH TILDE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{odieresis} - \Unicode{00F6}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH DIAERESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{oe} - \Unicode{0153}{LATIN SMALL LIGATURE OE} - \comment{This is a single letter, and should not be faked with `oe'.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{oslash} - \Unicode{00F8}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH STROKE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ugrave} - \Unicode{00F9}{LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH GRAVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{uacute} - \Unicode{00FA}{LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ucircumflex} - \Unicode{00FB}{LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH CIRCUMFLEX} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{udieresis} - \Unicode{00FC}{LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{yacute} - \Unicode{00FD}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Y WITH ACUTE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{thorn} - \Unicode{00FE}{LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{germandbls} - \Unicode{00DF}{LATIN SMALL LETTER SHARP S} -\endsetslot - - -\begincomment -\subsection{Accents} -The Unicode equivalents of the accents are taken to be the combining -forms of the accents found in code point \texttt{U+0300} and upwards. -The reasons for this are (i) that they are primarily used with the -|\accent| primitive, i.e., as combining characters, (ii) that some -of them (e.g. \texttt{tilde}) have non-combining counterparts -elsewhere in the encoding, and (iii) that they are not primarily -phonetic marks. -\endcomment - -\nextslot{0} -\setslot{grave} - \Unicode{0300}{COMBINING GRAVE ACCENT} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{acute} - \Unicode{0301}{COMBINING ACUTE ACCENT} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{circumflex} - \Unicode{0302}{COMBINING CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{tilde} - \Unicode{0303}{COMBINING TILDE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{dieresis} - \Unicode{0308}{COMBINING DIAERESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{hungarumlaut} - \Unicode{030B}{COMBINING DOUBLE ACUTE ACCENT} - \comment{The long Hungarian umlaut `\H{}'.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ring} - \Unicode{030A}{COMBINING RING ABOVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{caron} - \Unicode{030C}{COMBINING CARON} - \comment{The caron or h\'a\v cek accent `\v{}'.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{breve} - \Unicode{0306}{COMBINING BREVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{macron} - \Unicode{0304}{COMBINING MACRON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{dotaccent} - \Unicode{0307}{COMBINING DOT ABOVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{cedilla} - \Unicode{0327}{COMBINING CEDILLA} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ogonek} - \Unicode{0328}{COMBINING OGONEK} -\endsetslot - - -\begincomment -\subsection{Digits} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{48} -\setslot{zero} - \Unicode{0030}{DIGIT ZERO} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{one} - \Unicode{0031}{DIGIT ONE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{two} - \Unicode{0032}{DIGIT TWO} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{three} - \Unicode{0033}{DIGIT THREE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{four} - \Unicode{0034}{DIGIT FOUR} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{five} - \Unicode{0035}{DIGIT FIVE} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{six} - \Unicode{0036}{DIGIT SIX} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{seven} - \Unicode{0037}{DIGIT SEVEN} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{eight} - \Unicode{0038}{DIGIT EIGHT} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{nine} - \Unicode{0039}{DIGIT NINE} -\endsetslot - - -\begincomment -\subsection{Symbols and punctuation} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{13} -\setslot{quotesinglbase} - \Unicode{201A}{SINGLE LOW-9 QUOTATION MARK} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{guilsinglleft} - \Unicode{2039}{SINGLE LEFT-POINTING ANGLE QUOTATION MARK} - \comment{In French typography this is an opening quotation mark, - but in German typography it is a closing quotation mark. The - character should kern well in both cases.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{guilsinglright} - \Unicode{203A}{SINGLE RIGHT-POINTING ANGLE QUOTATION MARK} - \comment{In French typography this is a closing quotation mark, - but in German typography it is an opening quotation mark. The - character should kern well in both cases.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{quotedblleft} - \Unicode{201C}{LEFT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{quotedblright} - \Unicode{201D}{RIGHT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK} - \comment{In English typography this quotation mark is always - closing, but in Swedish typography it is also an opening - quotation mark. The character should kern well in both cases.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{quotedblbase} - \Unicode{201E}{DOUBLE LOW-9 QUOTATION MARK} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{guillemotleft} - \Unicode{00AB}{LEFT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK} - \comment{In French typography this is an opening quotation mark, - but in German typography it is a closing quotation mark. The - character should kern well in both cases. The glyph name is - misspelt (it should be \texttt{guillemetleft}), but this - incorrect name is \emph{de facto} the glyph name used.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{guillemotright} - \Unicode{00BB}{RIGHT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK} - \comment{In French typography this is a closing quotation mark, - but in German typography it is an opening quotation mark. The - character should kern well in both cases. The glyph name is - misspelt (it should be \texttt{guillemetright}), but this - incorrect name is \emph{de facto} the glyph name used.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{endash} - \Unicode{2013}{EN DASH} - \label{endash} - \Ligature{LIG}{hyphen}{emdash} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{emdash} - \Unicode{2014}{EM DASH} - \comment{In a monowidth font this character is preferably given the - width of two normal characters.} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{32} -\setslot{visiblespace} - \Unicode{2423}{OPEN BOX} - \comment{A visible space glyph `\textvisiblespace'.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{exclam} - \Unicode{0021}{EXCLAMATION MARK} - \Ligature{LIG}{quoteleft}{exclamdown} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{quotedbl} - \Unicode{0022}{QUOTATION MARK} - \comment{The `neutral' double quotation mark, included for use in - monowidth fonts, or for setting computer programs.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{numbersign} - \Unicode{0023}{NUMBER SIGN} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{dollar} - \Unicode{0024}{DOLLAR SIGN} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{percent} - \Unicode{0025}{PERCENT SIGN} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ampersand} - \Unicode{0026}{AMPERSAND} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{quoteright} - \Unicode{2019}{RIGHT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK} - \Ligature{LIG}{quoteright}{quotedblright} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{parenleft} - \Unicode{0028}{LEFT PARENTHESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{parenright} - \Unicode{0029}{RIGHT PARENTHESIS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{asterisk} - \Unicode{002A}{ASTERISK} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{plus} - \Unicode{002B}{PLUS SIGN} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{comma} - \Unicode{002C}{COMMA} - \Ligature{LIG}{comma}{quotedblbase} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{hyphen} - \Unicode{002D}{HYPHEN-MINUS} - \Ligature{LIG}{hyphen}{endash} - \Ligature{LIG}{hyphenchar}{hyphenchar} - \comment{See also slot \ref{hyphenchar}.} - \label{hyphen} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{period} - \Unicode{002E}{FULL STOP} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{slash} - \Unicode{002F}{SOLIDUS} -\endsetslot - -\skipslots{10} -\setslot{colon} - \Unicode{003A}{COLON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{semicolon} - \Unicode{003B}{SEMICOLON} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{less} - \Unicode{003C}{LESS-THAN SIGN} - \Ligature{LIG}{less}{guillemotleft} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{equal} - \Unicode{003D}{EQUALS SIGN} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{greater} - \Unicode{003E}{GREATER-THAN SIGN} - \Ligature{LIG}{greater}{guillemotright} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{question} - \Unicode{003F}{QUESTION MARK} - \Ligature{LIG}{quoteleft}{questiondown} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{at} - \Unicode{0040}{COMMERCIAL AT} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{91} -\setslot{bracketleft} - \Unicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{backslash} - \Unicode{005C}{REVERSE SOLIDUS} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bracketright} - \Unicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{asciicircum} - \Unicode{005E}{CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT} - \comment{The ASCII upward-pointing arrow head `\textasciicircum'. - This is included for compatibility with typewriter fonts used - for computer listings.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{underscore} - \Unicode{005F}{LOW LINE} - \comment{The ASCII underline character `\textunderscore', usually - set on the baseline. This is included for compatibility with - typewriter fonts used for computer listings.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{quoteleft} - \Unicode{2018}{LEFT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK} - \Ligature{LIG}{quoteleft}{quotedblleft} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{123} -\setslot{braceleft} - \Unicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{bar} - \Unicode{007C}{VERTICAL LINE} - \comment{The ASCII vertical bar `\textbar'. - This is included for compatibility with typewriter fonts used - for computer listings.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{braceright} - \Unicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{asciitilde} - \Unicode{007E}{TILDE} - \comment{The ASCII tilde `\textasciitilde'. - This is included for compatibility with typewriter fonts used - for computer listings.} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{159} -\setslot{section} - \Unicode{00A7}{SECTION SIGN} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{189} -\setslot{exclamdown} - \Unicode{00A1}{INVERTED EXCLAMATION MARK} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{questiondown} - \Unicode{00BF}{INVERTED QUESTION MARK} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{sterling} - \Unicode{00A3}{POUND SIGN} -\endsetslot - - - -\begincomment -\subsection{Miscellanea} -\endcomment - -\nextslot{23} -\setslot{compwordmark} - \Unicode{200C}{ZERO WIDTH NON-JOINER} - \comment{An invisible glyph, with zero width and depth, but the - height of lower case letters without ascenders. - It is used to stop ligaturing in words like `shelf{}ful'. - It is possible that this character should be considered a - letter (and that hyphenation patterns should be designed to - include it), but since its |\lccode| is 0, \TeX's hyphenation - mechanism considers it to be a nonletter which ends the - hyphenatable part of a word.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{perthousandzero} - \comment{A glyph which is placed after `\%' to produce a - `per-thousand', or twice to produce `per-ten-thousand'. - Your guess is as good as mine as to what this glyph should look - like in a monowidth font. Since most fonts don't include this - glyph anyway, its use is discouraged.} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{127} -\setslot{hyphenchar} - \label{hyphenchar} - \comment{This character is provided as a discretionary hyphen - symbol and may only appear at the end of a line, since it is often - hanging out of the character box, but apart from that it is almost - always the same as the \texttt{hyphen} character. Since \LaTeX\ - sets the |\hyphenchar| of \texttt{T1} fonts to slot \ref{hyphen} - rather than this slot, this feature is usually not used.} -\endsetslot - - - -\begincomment -\section{Usual characters} -The following characters are only accessed through ligatures and can -therefore be replaced by others or completely left out if the -ligature programs are modified accordingly. -\endcomment - - -\nextslot{27} -\setslot{ff} - \charseq{ - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - } - \comment{This glyph should be two characters wide in a monowidth - font.} - \ligature{LIG}{i}{ffi} - \ligature{LIG}{l}{ffl} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{fi} - \charseq{ - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \Unicode{0069}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I} - } - \comment{This glyph should be two characters wide in a monowidth - font.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{fl} - \charseq{ - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \Unicode{006C}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L} - } - \comment{This glyph should be two characters wide in a monowidth - font.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ffi} - \charseq{ - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \Unicode{0069}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I} - } - \comment{This glyph should be three characters wide in a monowidth - font.} -\endsetslot - -\setslot{ffl} - \charseq{ - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F} - \Unicode{006C}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L} - } - \comment{This glyph should be three characters wide in a monowidth - font.} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{156} -\setslot{IJ} - \Unicode{0132}{LATIN CAPITAL LIGATURE IJ} - \comment{This is a single letter, and in a monowidth font should - ideally be one letter wide.} -\endsetslot - -\nextslot{188} -\setslot{ij} - \Unicode{0133}{LATIN SMALL LIGATURE IJ} - \comment{This is a single letter, and in a monowidth font should - ideally be one letter wide.} -\endsetslot - - -\begincomment -\section{Fontdimens} -\endcomment - -\setfontdimen{1}{italicslant} % italic slant -\setfontdimen{2}{interword} % interword space -\setfontdimen{3}{stretchword} % interword stretch -\setfontdimen{4}{shrinkword} % interword shrink -\setfontdimen{5}{xheight} % x-height -\setfontdimen{6}{quad} % quad -\setfontdimen{7}{extraspace} % extra space after . -\setfontdimen{8}{capheight} % cap height -\setfontdimen{9}{ascender} % ascender -\setfontdimen{10}{acccapheight} % accented cap height -\setfontdimen{11}{descender} % descender's depth -\setfontdimen{12}{maxheight} % max height -\setfontdimen{13}{maxdepth} % max depth -\setfontdimen{14}{digitwidth} % digit width -\setfontdimen{15}{verticalstem} % dominant width of verical stems -\setfontdimen{16}{baselineskip} % baselineskip - - -\begincomment -\section{Coding scheme} -\endcomment - -\setstr{codingscheme}{EXTENDED TEX FONT ENCODING - LATIN} - - -\endencoding - - -\section{Discussion} - -As the \texttt{T1} encoding is an established standard, the discussion -of it has already been published elsewhere. [Unfortunately, I do not -know where as it all happened long before I started using \TeX. This -part of the document definitely needs to be improved. To begin with, I -would like to know if the TUGboat articles whose bibliography entries -appear in Figure~\ref{Bib-entries} are relevant for the matter. -\begin{figure*} -\small -\begin{verbatim} -@Article{Beebe:TB11-2-171, - author = "Nelson Beebe", - title = "{Character set encoding}", - journal = j-TUGboat, - volume = "11", - number = "2", - pages = "171--175", - month = jun, - year = "1990", - ISSN = "0896-3207", - bibdate = "Fri Jun 4 18:08:09 MDT 1999", - bibsource = "ftp://ftp.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/tugboat.bib; - http://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/index-table-t.html#tugboat", - acknowledgement = ack-bnb # " and " # ack-nhfb, -} -@Article{Bien:TB11-2-175, - author = "Janusz S. Bie{\'n}", - title = "{On standards for computer modern font extensions}", - journal = j-TUGboat, - volume = "11", - number = "2", - pages = "175--183", - month = jun, - year = "1990", - ISSN = "0896-3207", - bibdate = "Fri Jun 4 18:08:09 MDT 1999", - bibsource = "ftp://ftp.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/tugboat.bib; - http://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/index-table-t.html#tugboat", - acknowledgement = ack-bnb # " and " # ack-nhfb, -} -@Article{Ferguson:TB11-4-514, - author = "Michael Ferguson", - title = "{Report on multilingual activities}", - journal = j-TUGboat, - volume = "11", - number = "4", - pages = "514--516", - month = nov, - year = "1990", - ISSN = "0896-3207", - bibdate = "Fri Jun 4 18:08:09 MDT 1999", - bibsource = "ftp://ftp.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/tugboat.bib; - http://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/index-table-t.html#tugboat", - acknowledgement = ack-bnb # " and " # ack-nhfb, -} -\end{verbatim} -\normalsize - -\caption{Entries in \texttt{tugboat.bib} which may describe papers -that contain (at least part of) the discussion regarding the -\texttt{T1} encoding} -\label{Bib-entries} -\end{figure*} -Actually reading them would be nice too, as would of course getting -the references for whatever other papers there might be that -constituted the discussion of the \texttt{T1} encoding. The file -\texttt{cork.enc} in the \textit{Fontname} standard makes a cryptic -reference to ``TTN 1(4), December 1992'', whatever that might be.] - -I can however answer questions on the more immediate matter of how the -interpretation of the established standard that this file expresses was -constructed. It is mainly the result of a comparison between the -file \texttt{t1.etx}~\cite{t1.etx}, the Unicode -standard~\cite{Unicode}, and the Adobe glyph list~\cite{AGL}. - -(Some concerns have been expressed about the fact that the glyph name -listed for slot~0 is `\texttt{grave}', although that glyph name in -\cite{AGL} corresponds to \textunicode{0060}{GRAVE ACCENT}, whereas -\textunicode{0300}{COMBINING GRAVE ACCENT} is listed as corresponding -to `\texttt{gravecomb}'. This is however formally irrelevant, since -the glyph names are formally only internal labels in the encoding -specification. `\texttt{gravecomb}' would furthermore be a more -impractical label, since most font contains a `\texttt{grave}' glyph -that is used as a combining accent but no `\texttt{gravecomb}' -glyph.) - - -\section{Changes} - -The changes made to this specification since the original 2001/06/19 -version are as follows. - -2001/09/01: Corrected some typos (reported by Vladimir Volovich). /LH - -2001/09/16: Added \cite{latin-page} to the bibliography. /LH - -2001/09/21: Removed comment on \textunicode{2012}{FIGURE DASH} from -slot~\ref{endash}. \cite[Sec.~6.1]{Unicode} makes quite clear that -it's not to be used for ranges. /LH - -2002/07/05: Added the Ferguson:TB11-4-514 and ``TTN~1(4)'' references -to the discussion section. Also added remark on \texttt{grave} versus -\texttt{gravecomb}. /LH - -2004/11/28: Changed the f-ligatures to character sequences, which -makes more sense for \texttt{CMap}s. Added equivalent for -slot~\ref{SS}. /LH - - -\begin{thebibliography}{9} -\bibitem{AGL} - Adobe Systems Incorporated: \textit{Adobe Glyph List}, 1998; - \textsc{http}:/\slash \texttt{partners.adobe.com}\slash - \texttt{asn}\slash \texttt{developer}\slash \texttt{type}\slash - \texttt{glyphlist.txt} -\bibitem{latin-page} - Roman Czyborra: \textit{The ISO 8859 Alphabet Soup}, web page at - \textsc{http:}/\slash \texttt{czyborra.com}\slash - \texttt{charsets}\slash \texttt{iso8859.html}, 1998. -\bibitem{ISO8859-1} - International Organization for Standardization: - \textit{ISO/IEC standard 8859-1} (Information technology -- - 8-bit single-byte coded graphic character sets -- - Part 1: Latin alphabet No. 1). - See also~\cite{latin-page}. -\bibitem{t1.etx} - Alan Jeffrey, Sebastian Rahtz, and Ulrik Vieth: - \textit{The \TeX\ extended text encoding vector}, - version~1.801, 1998, - \textsc{ctan}:\discretionary{}{}{\thinspace}\texttt{fonts}\slash - \texttt{utilities}\slash \texttt{fontinst}\slash - \texttt{inputs}\slash \texttt{etx}\slash \texttt{t1.etx}. -\bibitem{TeXbook} - Donald E.\ Knuth, Duane Bibby (illustrations): - \textit{The \TeX book}, Ad\-di\-son--Wes\-ley, 1986; - ISBN~0-201-13447-0. -\bibitem{Unicode} - The Unicode Consortium (editor), \emph{et al.}: - \textit{The Unicode Standard, Version 3.0}, - Addison Wesley Longman Publisher, 2000; ISBN~0-201-61633-5. - Most of the information in this book is also available online at - the Unicode consortium website, at \textsc{http}:/\slash - \texttt{www.unicode.org}\slash \texttt{unicode}\slash - \texttt{uni2book}\slash \texttt{u2.html}. -\end{thebibliography} - - - -\end{document}
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/examples/basicex.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/examples/basicex.tex deleted file mode 100644 index fe7f6f69935..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/examples/basicex.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,431 +0,0 @@ -% basicex.tex -% -% This file contains some basic examples of commands for -% installing the AGaramond family of fonts with fontinst v1.9. -% It is pretty similar to what the \latinfamily command -% does for these fonts, but the details are not identical. -% -% In case you want to run this file yourself, the metrics for -% the AGaramond font family can be downloaded from -% -% ftp://ftp.adobe.com/pub/adobe/type/win/all/afmfiles/051-100/100/ -% and -% ftp://ftp.adobe.com/pub/adobe/type/win/all/afmfiles/101-150/101/ -% -% The AFM files found in these directories should then be renamed -% as indicated in the Fontname adobe.map file. Also note that -% the line endings are Windows-style (CRLF), so you probably need -% to download as binary and do some conversion before you can use -% these files comfortably. - -\input fontinst.sty - -% This tells fontinst to collect information about font -% transformations in the file basicex.recs. That file is -% then used by basicex2.tex. -\recordtransforms{basicex.recs} - -% These commands perform transformations on the metrics of -% some of the fonts, thereby creating new metrics files for -% the transformed fonts. -\transformfont{padr8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padr8a}}} -\transformfont{padrc8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padrc8a}}} -\transformfont{padri8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padri8a}}} -\transformfont{padro8r}{\slantfont{250}{\frommtx{padr8r}}} -\transformfont{padro8x}{\slantfont{250}{\fromafm{padr8x}}} - -% The first three lines of each group reencode fonts -% so that TeX can access all glyphs in them. -\transformfont{pads8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{pads8a}}} -\transformfont{padsc8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padsc8a}}} -\transformfont{padsi8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padsi8a}}} -% The last two lines artifically create slanted variants -% of fonts by skewing them. 250 is the natural slant of -% the italics in this family. -\transformfont{padso8r}{\slantfont{250}{\frommtx{pads8r}}} -\transformfont{padso8x}{\slantfont{250}{\fromafm{pads8x}}} - -\transformfont{padb8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padb8a}}} -% There is no padbc8a, hence nothing to make a padbc8r from. -\transformfont{padbi8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padbi8a}}} -\transformfont{padbo8r}{\slantfont{250}{\frommtx{padb8r}}} -\transformfont{padbo8x}{\slantfont{250}{\fromafm{padb8x}}} -% The DVI driver must be told to make the same transformations -% to the actual fonts when a document using them is to be viewed -% or printed. The information collected in basicex.recs can -% help with this. The job of basicex2.tex is to translate this -% information to a format understood by DVI drivers. - - -% The \transformfont commands above generate metric files in MTX -% format (for use by the \installfont commands below) and PL -% format (for transformation to TFMs that are needed by the DVI -% driver when interpreting VFs based on these fonts). These PL -% files are minimal and not suitable for direct use in typesetting -% since there is no kerning information, ligaturing instructions, -% or fontdimens, but they are perfectly adequate to serve as -% base fonts for VFs. -% -% The next bunch of commands generate a new set of PL files for -% these fonts (overwriting the previous), and these new files -% do contain kerning information, ligaturing instructions, and -% fontdimens. (As a side-effect, these files are also larger than -% the previous ones.) Since 8r-encoded fonts are not in practice -% used for typesetting (not much, anyway), it is perfectly -% possible to skip this step. -\installfonts - \installrawfont {padr8r}{padr8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{m}{n}{} - \installrawfont {padrc8r}{padrc8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{m}{sc}{} - \installrawfont {padri8r}{padri8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{m}{it}{} - \installrawfont {padro8r}{padro8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{m}{sl}{} - - \installrawfont {pads8r}{pads8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{sb}{n}{} - \installrawfont {padsc8r}{padsc8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{sb}{sc}{} - \installrawfont {padsi8r}{padsi8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{sb}{it}{} - \installrawfont {padso8r}{padso8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{sb}{sl}{} - - \installrawfont {padb8r}{padb8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{b}{n}{} - \installrawfont {padbi8r}{padbi8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{b}{it}{} - \installrawfont {padbo8r}{padbo8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{b}{sl}{} -\endinstallfonts - - -% In the above commands, the commands have been lined up to -% visually separate those arguments that have to do with how -% a font is declared to LaTeX (rightmost) from those arguments -% that specify how the font is made and what it should be called. - - -% The following commands make a very basic installation of "pad" -% families in the OT1, T1, and TS1 encodings; there is not attempt -% to make use of the -Exp (expert) or -SC (smallcaps) fonts in -% the AGaramond family. (One reason for making this distinction -% is that Adobe sell these other fonts separately, so some people -% may have the basic set used below and nothing more. Another -% reason is that for many typefaces, there are no expert or -SC -% fonts at all. Adapting an example using such fonts to a typeface -% which do not have them is much too confusing for a beginner.) -\installfonts - \installfamily{OT1}{pad}{} - \installfamily{T1}{pad}{} - \installfamily{TS1}{pad}{} - - \installfont {padr8t}{padr8r,newlatin}{t1} {T1}{pad}{m}{n}{} - \installfont {padr7t}{padr8r,newlatin}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{m}{n}{} - \installfont {padrc8t}{padr8r,newlatin}{t1c} {T1}{pad}{m}{sc}{} - \installfont {padrc7t}{padr8r,newlatin}{ot1c} {OT1}{pad}{m}{sc}{} - \installfont {padr8i}{padr8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{m}{n}{} - % There is no difference between the n and the sc shapes - % of TS1 encoded fonts, hence the same TeX font can be - % used for both. LaTeX does however need the declarations - % to be explicit, hence this \installfontas command. - \installfontas{padr8i} {TS1}{pad}{m}{sc}{} - % The "option nosc" below is a speed optimization. - % newlatin.mtx normally makes sure that a smallcaps - % alphabet is defined (faking it if necessary), - % regardless of whether that alphabet is at all - % going to be used. By passing it the "nosc" option, - % one can tell newlatin.mtx to completely skip those - % commands that have to do with smallcaps. - \installfont {padri8t}{padri8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{m}{it}{} - \installfont {padri7t}{padri8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{m}{it}{} - \installfont {padri8i}{padri8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{m}{it}{} - \installfont {padro8t}{padro8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{m}{sl}{} - \installfont {padro7t}{padro8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{m}{sl}{} - \installfont {padro8i}{padro8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{m}{sl}{} - - % The reason newlatin is not passed the nosc option when - % making the "n" shape fonts here is another (more tricky) - % speed optimization. If the metric argument of two - % subsequent \installfont commands are identical then the - % respective glyph bases will be identical too, and in these - % cases fontinst saves work by not rebuilding the glyph base - % at the second command, but instead using the cached - % definitions from the first. - \installfont {pads8t}{pads8r,newlatin}{t1} {T1}{pad}{sb}{n}{} - \installfont {pads7t}{pads8r,newlatin}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{sb}{n}{} - \installfont {padsc8t}{pads8r,newlatin}{t1c} {T1}{pad}{sb}{sc}{} - \installfont {padsc7t}{pads8r,newlatin}{ot1c} {OT1}{pad}{sb}{sc}{} - % Thus the last four commands cause four fonts to be - % generated, but the pads8r.mtx and newlatin.mtx files - % are only read once. - \installfont {pads8i}{pads8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{sb}{n}{} - \installfontas{pads8i} {TS1}{pad}{sb}{sc}{} - \installfont {padsi8t}{padsi8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{sb}{it}{} - \installfont {padsi7t}{padsi8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{sb}{it}{} - \installfont {padsi8i}{padsi8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{sb}{it}{} - \installfont {padso8t}{padso8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{sb}{sl}{} - \installfont {padso7t}{padso8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{sb}{sl}{} - \installfont {padso8i}{padso8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{sb}{sl}{} - - \installfont {padb8t}{padb8r,newlatin}{t1} {T1}{pad}{b}{n}{} - \installfont {padb7t}{padb8r,newlatin}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{b}{n}{} - \installfont {padbc8t}{padb8r,newlatin}{t1c} {T1}{pad}{b}{sc}{} - \installfont {padbc7t}{padb8r,newlatin}{ot1c} {OT1}{pad}{b}{sc}{} - \installfont {padb8i}{padb8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{b}{n}{} - \installfontas{padb8i} {TS1}{pad}{b}{sc}{} - \installfont {padbi8t}{padbi8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{b}{it}{} - \installfont {padbi7t}{padbi8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{b}{it}{} - \installfont {padbi8i}{padbi8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{b}{it}{} - \installfont {padbo8t}{padbo8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{b}{sl}{} - \installfont {padbo7t}{padbo8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{b}{sl}{} - \installfont {padbo8i}{padbo8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{b}{sl}{} -\endinstallfonts - - -% The set of commands above will "fake" an sc shape for the typeface -% by making dual use of the capitals in the n shape (Regular): both -% as normal (for the upper case in the sc shape) and shrunk to 80% of -% their normal size (for the lower case in the sc shape). This works -% (anyone who looks at it will understand what was intended), but it -% does not look good, and therefore it is always better to make use -% of proper smallcaps when it is available. -% -% The next set of commands is another take at creating the "pad" -% families, this time making use of the proper smallcaps in padrc8r -% and padsc8r. The files created by this set of commands will -% completely overwrite the files created by the previous set of -% commands; in practice one would only include one set of commands, -% but both are provided here for comparison. -\installfonts - \installfamily{OT1}{pad}{} - \installfamily{T1}{pad}{} - \installfamily{TS1}{pad}{} - - % Since the glyph bases used for the n and sc shapes in this - % case are different, there is no point in doing the smallcaps - % processing when making the n shape fonts. - \installfont {padr8t}{padr8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{m}{n}{} - \installfont {padr7t}{padr8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{m}{n}{} - % There is actually no point in doing that processing for - % the sc shape fonts either! This is because the glyph names - % used in padrc8r are the same as those used in padr8r (and - % padri8r), and thus the smallcaps glyphs will already have - % been delt with by the code for lower case glyphs. Another - % consequence is that the same ETX files as are used for - % the other shapes should be used for the sc shape. - \installfont {padrc8t}{padrc8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{m}{sc}{} - \installfont {padrc7t}{padrc8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{m}{sc}{} - \installfont {padr8i}{padr8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{m}{n}{} - \installfontas{padr8i} {TS1}{pad}{m}{sc}{} - \installfont {padri8t}{padri8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{m}{it}{} - \installfont {padri7t}{padri8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{m}{it}{} - \installfont {padri8i}{padri8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{m}{it}{} - \installfont {padro8t}{padro8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{m}{sl}{} - \installfont {padro7t}{padro8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{m}{sl}{} - \installfont {padro8i}{padro8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{m}{sl}{} - - \installfont {pads8t}{pads8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{sb}{n}{} - \installfont {pads7t}{pads8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{sb}{n}{} - \installfont {padsc8t}{padsc8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{sb}{sc}{} - \installfont {padsc7t}{padsc8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{sb}{sc}{} - \installfont {pads8i}{pads8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{sb}{n}{} - \installfontas{pads8i} {TS1}{pad}{sb}{sc}{} - \installfont {padsi8t}{padsi8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{sb}{it}{} - \installfont {padsi7t}{padsi8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{sb}{it}{} - \installfont {padsi8i}{padsi8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{sb}{it}{} - \installfont {padso8t}{padso8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{sb}{sl}{} - \installfont {padso7t}{padso8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{sb}{sl}{} - \installfont {padso8i}{padso8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{sb}{sl}{} - - % There is however no padbc8r font; hence the sc shape of - % the b series must still be faked, just as above. - \installfont {padb8t}{padb8r,newlatin}{t1} {T1}{pad}{b}{n}{} - \installfont {padb7t}{padb8r,newlatin}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{b}{n}{} - \installfont {padbc8t}{padb8r,newlatin}{t1c} {T1}{pad}{b}{sc}{} - \installfont {padbc7t}{padb8r,newlatin}{ot1c} {OT1}{pad}{b}{sc}{} - \installfont {padb8i}{padb8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{b}{n}{} - \installfontas{padb8i} {TS1}{pad}{b}{sc}{} - \installfont {padbi8t}{padbi8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{b}{it}{} - \installfont {padbi7t}{padbi8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{b}{it}{} - \installfont {padbi8i}{padbi8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{b}{it}{} - \installfont {padbo8t}{padbo8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{b}{sl}{} - \installfont {padbo7t}{padbo8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{b}{sl}{} - \installfont {padbo8i}{padbo8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{b}{sl}{} -\endinstallfonts - - -% The "pad" family installed above is however still far from perfect. -% The `ff', `ffi', and `ffl' ligatures are fakes, since those aren't -% available in the fonts used. There are however such glyphs in the -% expert (8x) companions of the fonts used above, and hence the -% results will be better if these resources can be combined. -% -% One of the great advantages with TeX, virtual fonts, and fontinst -% is the ease with which one can combine glyphs from (what the foundry -% has packaged as) several different fonts into a single font; -% if \installfont is given the metrics of two fonts, and some glyph -% is available in one font but not the other, then fontinst will -% automatically take it from the font where it was available. -% Hence one can fill in (at least some of) the blanks of one font -% by also listing a second font in the metrics argument of -% \installfont. It will do the right thing automatically. -\installfonts - \installfamily{OT1}{padx}{} - \installfamily{T1}{padx}{} - \installfamily{TS1}{padx}{} - % The "padx" family name used here is mainly motivated by - % tradition. It has been considered useful to simultaneously - % on a single system have both a family of virtual fonts which - % do not make use of the expert set of base fonts, and a family - % of virtual fonts which do make use of the expert set of base - % fonts. For this to work, the different fonts must have - % different names. In the Fontname scheme, this is accomplished - % by including an "x" variant letter in the names to signify that - % the font is "expertized". In LaTeX there is no proper standard - % for this, but the custom is to similarly append an "x" to the - % basic three letter family name, thus yielding "padx" instead - % of "pad". - - % The Fontname scheme is in this case further complicated by - % a desire to avoid names of more than eight characters - % (a limit which is important in many old file systems). - % Therefore many of the two-character variants starting with - % 9 is a combination of an encoding variant with one or two - % other variants (most commonly the "x" variant). The commands - % below utilize these abbreviations (but there is no software - % involved which would require them to). - \installfont {padr9e}{padr8r,padr8x,newlatin}{t1} {T1}{padx}{m}{n}{} - \installfont {padr9t}{padr8r,padr8x,newlatin}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{m}{n}{} - % Besides the extra ligatures, the upright 8x fonts also contain - % a proper smallcaps alphabet. This makes it possible to make do - % without the -c8r fonts. The commands below will make a font - % using the upper case from padr8r and (as lower case) the - % small caps from padr8x. - \installfont {padrc9e}{padr8r,padr8x,newlatin}{t1c} {T1}{padx}{m}{sc}{} - \installfont {padrc9t}{padr8r,padr8x,newlatin}{ot1c} {OT1}{padx}{m}{sc}{} - \installfont {padr9i}{padr8r,padr8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{m}{n}{} - \installfontas{padr9i} {TS1}{padx}{m}{sc}{} - \installfont {padri9e}{padri8r,padri8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{padx}{m}{it}{} - \installfont {padri9t}{padri8r,padri8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{m}{it}{} - \installfont {padri9i}{padri8r,padri8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{m}{it}{} - \installfont {padro9e}{padro8r,padro8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{padx}{m}{sl}{} - \installfont {padro9t}{padro8r,padro8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{m}{sl}{} - \installfont {padro9i}{padro8r,padro8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{m}{sl}{} - - \installfont {pads9e}{pads8r,pads8x,newlatin}{t1} {T1}{padx}{sb}{n}{} - \installfont {pads9t}{pads8r,pads8x,newlatin}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{sb}{n}{} - \installfont {padsc9e}{pads8r,pads8x,newlatin}{t1c} {T1}{padx}{sb}{sc}{} - \installfont {padsc9t}{pads8r,pads8x,newlatin}{ot1c} {OT1}{padx}{sb}{sc}{} - \installfont {pads9i}{pads8r,pads8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{sb}{n}{} - \installfontas{pads9i} {TS1}{padx}{sb}{sc}{} - \installfont {padsi9e}{padsi8r,padsi8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{padx}{sb}{it}{} - \installfont {padsi9t}{padsi8r,padsi8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{sb}{it}{} - \installfont {padsi9i}{padsi8r,padsi8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{sb}{it}{} - \installfont {padso9e}{padso8r,padso8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{padx}{sb}{sl}{} - \installfont {padso9t}{padso8r,padso8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{sb}{sl}{} - \installfont {padso9i}{padso8r,padso8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{sb}{sl}{} - - \installfont {padb9e}{padb8r,padb8x,newlatin}{t1} {T1}{padx}{b}{n}{} - \installfont {padb9t}{padb8r,padb8x,newlatin}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{b}{n}{} - % The padb8x font does not contain a smallcaps alphabet -- - % hence in this case the newlatin.mtx file reverts to faking - % such an alphabet by shrinking the upper case. The commands - % can however be the same as above! - \installfont {padbc9e}{padb8r,padb8x,newlatin}{t1c} {T1}{padx}{b}{sc}{} - \installfont {padbc9t}{padb8r,padb8x,newlatin}{ot1c} {OT1}{padx}{b}{sc}{} - \installfont {padb9i}{padb8r,padb8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{b}{n}{} - \installfontas{padb9i} {TS1}{padx}{b}{sc}{} - \installfont {padbi9e}{padbi8r,padbi8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{padx}{b}{it}{} - \installfont {padbi9t}{padbi8r,padbi8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{b}{it}{} - \installfont {padbi9i}{padbi8r,padbi8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{b}{it}{} - \installfont {padbo9e}{padbo8r,padbo8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{padx}{b}{sl}{} - \installfont {padbo9t}{padbo8r,padbo8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{b}{sl}{} - \installfont {padbo9i}{padbo8r,padbo8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{b}{sl}{} -\endinstallfonts - - -% Finally we get to my personal favourite -- the families with hanging -% (a.k.a. oldstyle) figures. From a historical point of view, this is -% really the most correct appearence of these fonts, because in the 16th -% century (when Claude Garamond designed the metal types after which the -% AGaramond fonts where modelled) there was no such thing as lining -% figures; all figures were hanging. -% -% The 8x fonts all contain a suitable set of hanging figures. This makes -% it very straightforward to make use of these instead of the lining -% digits of the base fonts. One simply has to make use of ETX files -% which selects these glyphs hanging figure glyphs instead of the -% lining figure glyphs. -\installfonts - \installfamily{OT1}{padj}{} - \installfamily{T1}{padj}{} - \installfamily{TS1}{padj}{} - % Another custom: a "j" (the Fontname hanging figure variant letter) - % is appended to the LaTeX family name to distinguish between - % lining and hanging figure families. - - \installfont {padr9d}{padr8r,padr8x,newlatin}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{m}{n}{} - \installfont {padr9o}{padr8r,padr8x,newlatin}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{m}{n}{} - \installfont {padrc9d}{padr8r,padr8x,newlatin}{t1cj} {T1}{padj}{m}{sc}{} - \installfont {padrc9o}{padr8r,padr8x,newlatin}{ot1cj} {OT1}{padj}{m}{sc}{} - \installfont {padr9i}{padr8r,padr8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{m}{n}{} - \installfontas{padr9i} {TS1}{padj}{m}{sc}{} - \installfont {padri9d}{padri8r,padri8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{m}{it}{} - \installfont {padri9o}{padri8r,padri8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{m}{it}{} - \installfont {padri9i}{padri8r,padri8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{m}{it}{} - \installfont {padro9d}{padro8r,padro8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{m}{sl}{} - \installfont {padro9o}{padro8r,padro8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{m}{sl}{} - \installfont {padro9i}{padro8r,padro8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{m}{sl}{} - - \installfont {pads9d}{pads8r,pads8x,newlatin}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{sb}{n}{} - \installfont {pads9o}{pads8r,pads8x,newlatin}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{sb}{n}{} - \installfont {padsc9d}{pads8r,pads8x,newlatin}{t1cj} {T1}{padj}{sb}{sc}{} - \installfont {padsc9o}{pads8r,pads8x,newlatin}{ot1cj} {OT1}{padj}{sb}{sc}{} - \installfont {pads9i}{pads8r,pads8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{sb}{n}{} - \installfontas{pads9i} {TS1}{padj}{sb}{sc}{} - \installfont {padsi9d}{padsi8r,padsi8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{sb}{it}{} - \installfont {padsi9o}{padsi8r,padsi8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{sb}{it}{} - \installfont {padsi9i}{padsi8r,padsi8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{sb}{it}{} - \installfont {padso9d}{padso8r,padso8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{sb}{sl}{} - \installfont {padso9o}{padso8r,padso8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{sb}{sl}{} - \installfont {padso9i}{padso8r,padso8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{sb}{sl}{} - - \installfont {padb9d}{padb8r,padb8x,newlatin}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{b}{n}{} - \installfont {padb9o}{padb8r,padb8x,newlatin}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{b}{n}{} - \installfont {padbc9d}{padb8r,padb8x,newlatin}{t1cj} {T1}{padj}{b}{sc}{} - \installfont {padbc9o}{padb8r,padb8x,newlatin}{ot1cj} {OT1}{padj}{b}{sc}{} - \installfont {padb9i}{padb8r,padb8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{b}{n}{} - \installfontas{padb9i} {TS1}{padj}{b}{sc}{} - \installfont {padbi9d}{padbi8r,padbi8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{b}{it}{} - \installfont {padbi9o}{padbi8r,padbi8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{b}{it}{} - \installfont {padbi9i}{padbi8r,padbi8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{b}{it}{} - \installfont {padbo9d}{padbo8r,padbo8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{b}{sl}{} - \installfont {padbo9o}{padbo8r,padbo8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{b}{sl}{} - \installfont {padbo9i}{padbo8r,padbo8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{b}{sl}{} -\endinstallfonts - -% This closes the file opened by \recordtransforms above. -\endrecordtransforms - -\bye - -% The installations made by the above commands are certainly not -% optimal. Some things which can be improved are: -% -% - Although the padrc9e, padrc9t, padsc9e, padsc9t, padrc9d, -% padrc9o, padsc9d, and padsc9o fonts contain proper smallcaps -% glyphs, there are no kerns between the smallcaps and -% the upper case in these fonts, because there were no such -% kerns in any of the fonts they are based on. There are -% however such kerning pairs in padrc8r and padsc8r, and it is -% quite easy to extract this information using the \reglyphfont -% command with the settings in the csckrn2x.tex file. -% -% - The padrc8t, padrc7t, padsc8t, and padsc7t fonts that are -% based on padrc8r and padsc8r respectively have hanging figures, -% whereas the other fonts in the same family have lining figures. -% This is only because that is how the foundry packaged the -% glyphs into fonts, and the careful font installer might want -% to straighten out this situation. One way to do that is -% to make use of the unsetnum.mtx file, another is to make -% use of the `suffix' mechanism (new in v1.923). -% -% - One glyph which is missing from all the fonts made above is -% the Euro glyph (and that is kind of awkward these days, although -% as of v1.926 textcomp.mtx fakes this using a C and two rules). -% One way to supply a Euro glyph is to provide yet another font -% (besides the -8r's and -8x's) as base font, if that extra -% font contains the missing Euro glyph. The same trick can be used -% to get greek capitals for the OT1-encoded fonts. - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/examples/basicex2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/examples/basicex2.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 74fe2a4df5a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/examples/basicex2.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ -% -% basicex2.tex -% -% fontinst command file for writing map file fragments for -% the raw fonts used by the fonts made in basicex.tex. -% - -\input finstmsc.sty - -% At this point, you might want to change some settings -% to make the map file fragments written better adjusted -% to your particular system. Some common examples are: -% -% \resetstr{PSfontsuffix}{.pfb} -% -% which is useful if the actual fonts are in PFB format. -% -% \AssumeLWFN -% -% This is useful if the font files are named according to -% the old Mac OS Classic convention for PostScript fonts -% (names like AGarBolIta). - -\adddriver{dvips}{dvips.map} -% This causes a .map file for dvips to be written. -% It is probably better to choose a name that has to -% do with the fonts than to use `dvips.map'. -% In some systems, there is a program updmap which combines -% several small .map files such as this one into a large -% psfonts.map file. -\adddriver{dvipdfm}{dvipdfm.map} -% Similar file for dvipdfm. -\adddriver{pltotf}{pltotf-script.sh} -% A shell script that runs pltotf on those .pl files -% which you need to turn into .tfm files. -\adddriver{debug}{mapdump.txt} -% This file contains the available data in a human-readable -% format. This is useful if your dvi driver uses some other -% kind of map file. - -\input basicex.recs -% This is where all the work is done. - -\donedrivers -% This closes the files and does some cleanup. - -\bye - - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.dvi b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.dvi Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ae8133acad4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.dvi +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 20c50851cdd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 19f5f012231..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4160 +0,0 @@ -%%% ==================================================================== -%%% @LaTeX-file{ -%%% author = "Alan Jeffrey and Rowland McDonnell and -%%% Ulrik Vieth and Lars Hellstr{\"o}m", -%%% version = "1.928", -%%% date = "2004-12-16", -%%% time = "12:18:32 +01:00", -%%% filename = "fontinst.tex", -%%% email = "fontinst@tug.org", -%%% checksum = "", -%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII", -%%% keywords = "fontinst, TeX, PostScript, documentation", -%%% supported = "yes", -%%% abstract = "This is the documentation for the fontinst -%%% font installation package.", -%%% package = "fontinst", -%%% dependencies = "ltxguide.cls, url.sty, xspace.sty" -%%% } -%%% ==================================================================== - -% Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996 Alan Jeffrey - -% Modified by Rowland McDonnell June 1998 -% Modified and revised by Ulrik Vieth June 1998 -% Modified by Lars Hellstr\"om July 2004 - - -\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxguide} -\usepackage[OT1]{fontenc} -\usepackage{url,xspace} -\usepackage{graphicx} - -\IfFileExists{palatino.flag}{ - \renewcommand\rmdefault{ppl} -} -%\renewcommand\rmdefault{padx} -%\renewcommand\rmdefault{pmnx} - -% \MakeShortVerb{\|} - - -% Title page and running heads. - -\makeatletter -\newcommand{\subtitle}[1]{\renewcommand{\@subtitle}{#1}} -\newcommand{\version}[1]{\renewcommand{\@version}{#1}} -\newcommand{\illustration}[1]{\renewcommand{\@illustration}{#1}} - -\newcommand{\@subtitle}{} -\newcommand{\@version}{???} -\newcommand{\@illustration}{cover.eps} - -% \pagestyle{myheadings} -% \AtBeginDocument{\markright{\small\itshape -% \@author\hfill\@title: \@subtitle\quad}} - - -\renewcommand{\maketitle}{{% - \thispagestyle{empty}% - \normalfont\centering - \null - {\fontsize{100}{100}\textit{\@title}}% - \par\bigskip - {\Large\textbf{\@subtitle}}% - \vfill - \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{\@illustration}% - \vfill - {\Large\textbf{% - \def\and{\egroup\qquad\hbox\bgroup} - \leavevmode \hbox{\@author}\\[\smallskipamount] - \@title~v\@version - \quad\textperiodcentered\quad \@date}}% - \clearpage -}} -\makeatother - - -% Set lists tighter (assuming non-zero \parskip). - -\makeatletter -\renewcommand{\@listI}{% - \leftmargin\leftmargini - \parsep\medskipamount - \itemsep\z@ % + parsep - \topsep\z@ % + parskip - \partopsep\z@ -} -\newenvironment{isyntax}{% - \let\\\@centercr - \list{}{% - \itemsep \z@ - \itemindent -1.5em% - \listparindent \itemindent - \advance \leftmargin 1.5em% - }% - \advance \rightskip \z@\@plus0.7\linewidth \relax - \linepenalty=100\relax - \item\relax -}{\endlist} -\makeatother - -\newenvironment{smalldes}{% - \list{}{% - \setlength\labelwidth{0pt}% - \setlength\itemindent{-\leftmargin}% - \setlength\listparindent{1em}% - \setlength\parsep{0pt}% - \setlength\itemsep{0pt plus 1pt}% - \setlength\topsep{\itemsep}% - \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel - }% -}{\endlist} - -\newenvironment{hackernote}{% - \list{}{ - \setlength{\leftmargin}{0pt}% - \setlength\labelwidth{0pt}% - \setlength{\listparindent}{1.4em}% - \setlength{\parsep}{0pt plus 1pt}% - \setlength{\itemsep}{\medskipamount}% - }\item[]% - \small - \textit{Note for hackers.}\hspace{0.5em}% -}{\endlist} - -% % I don't use the <...> feature for verbatim, -% % so I undo that ltxguide feature. -% \makeatletter -% \renewcommand{\verbatim@font}{% -% \normalfont \ttfamily -% % \catcode`\<=\active -% % \catcode`\>=\active -% } -% \makeatother - - -% ltxguide.cls decl environment, but with equal space above and -% below. -\DeleteShortVerb{\|} -\makeatletter -\newenvironment{decl*}[1][]{% - \par - \small\addvspace{2.3ex}% - \vskip -\parskip - \ifx\relax#1\relax - \def\@decl@date{}% - \else - \def\@decl@date{\NEWfeature{#1}}% - \fi - \noindent\hspace{-\leftmargini}% - \begin{tabular}{|l|}% - \hline\ignorespaces -}{% - \\\hline - \end{tabular}% - \nobreak\@decl@date\par\nobreak - \vspace{2.3ex}\vskip -\parskip -} -\makeatother -\MakeShortVerb{\|} - - -% Set spacing around captions. - -\setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{\medskipamount} -\setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{\medskipamount} - -% Markup for logos, file types, programs, etc. - -\newcommand*{\meta}{\m} -\newcommand*{\marg}{\arg} -\newcommand*{\parg}[1]{\texttt{(}\m{#1}\texttt{)}} - -\newcommand*{\cs}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\ #1}\xspace} - -\newcommand*{\OzTeX}{O\kern-.03em z\kern-.15em\TeX} -\newcommand*{\OzMF}{O\kern-.03em zMF} -\newcommand*{\OzTools}{O\kern-.03em z\kern-.15em Tools} - -\newcommand{\PS}{Post\-Script\xspace} -\newcommand{\TT}{True\-Type\xspace} - -\newcommand*{\setfilename}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand*{\setdotfilename}[1]{\setfilename{.#1}} -\newcommand*{\setpackagename}[1]{\textsf{#1}} - -\newcommand{\dvips} {\setpackagename{dvips}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Dvips} {\setpackagename{Dvips}\xspace} -\newcommand{\fontinst}{\setpackagename{font\-inst}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Fontinst}{\setpackagename{Font\-inst}\xspace} -\newcommand{\fontdoc}{\setpackagename{font\-doc}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Fontdoc}{\setpackagename{Font\-doc}\xspace} - -% \show\fontname -\newcommand{\fontnamekb}{fontname\xspace} -\newcommand{\Fontnamekb}{Fontname\xspace} - -\newcommand{\mf} {\setfilename{mf}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Mf} {\setfilename{Mf}\xspace} -\newcommand{\vf} {\setfilename{vf}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Vf} {\setfilename{Vf}\xspace} -\newcommand{\pl} {\setfilename{pl}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Pl} {\setfilename{Pl}\xspace} -\newcommand{\fd} {\setfilename{fd}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Fd} {\setfilename{Fd}\xspace} -\newcommand{\pk} {\setfilename{pk}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Pk} {\setfilename{Pk}\xspace} -\newcommand{\afm}{\setfilename{afm}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Afm}{\setfilename{Afm}\xspace} -\newcommand{\vpl}{\setfilename{vpl}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Vpl}{\setfilename{Vpl}\xspace} -\newcommand{\tfm}{\setfilename{tfm}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Tfm}{\setfilename{Tfm}\xspace} -\newcommand{\mtx}{\setfilename{mtx}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Mtx}{\setfilename{Mtx}\xspace} -\newcommand{\etx}{\setfilename{etx}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Etx}{\setfilename{Etx}\xspace} -\newcommand{\pfa}{\setfilename{pfa}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Pfa}{\setfilename{Pfa}\xspace} -\newcommand{\pfb}{\setfilename{pfb}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Pfb}{\setfilename{Pfb}\xspace} -\newcommand{\dvi}{\setfilename{dvi}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Dvi}{\setfilename{Dvi}\xspace} -\newcommand{\pdf}{\setfilename{pdf}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Pdf}{\setfilename{Pdf}\xspace} -\newcommand{\ttf}{\setfilename{ttf}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Ttf}{\setfilename{Ttf}\xspace} - -\newcommand{\vftovp}{\setpackagename{vftovp}\xspace} -\newcommand{\vptovf}{\setpackagename{vptovf}\xspace} -\newcommand{\pltotf}{\setpackagename{pltotf}\xspace} -\newcommand{\tftopl}{\setpackagename{tftopl}\xspace} - -\newcommand{\BibTeX}{Bib\TeX} - - -% % Stolen from Dr Knuth -% \makeatletter % borrow the private macros of PLAIN (with care) -% \def\oct#1{\hbox{\rm\'{}\kern-.2em\it#1\/\kern.05em}} % octal constant -% \def\hex#1{\hbox{\rm\H{}\tt#1}} % hexadecimal constant -% % macros for font tables -% \def\oddline#1{\cr -% \noalign{\nointerlineskip} -% \multispan{19}\hrulefill& -% \setbox0=\hbox{\lower 2.3pt\hbox{\hex{#1x}}}\smash{\box0}\cr -% \noalign{\nointerlineskip}} -% \def\evenline{\cr\noalign{\hrule}} -% \def\chartstrut{\lower4.5pt\vbox to14pt{}} -% \def\beginchart#1{$$\global\count@=0 #1 -% \halign to\hsize\bgroup -% \chartstrut##\tabskip0pt plus10pt& -% &\hfil##\hfil&\vrule##\cr -% \lower6.5pt\null -% &&&\oct0&&\oct1&&\oct2&&\oct3&&\oct4&&\oct5&&\oct6&&\oct7&\evenline} -% \def\endchart{\raise11.5pt\null&&&\hex 8&&\hex 9&&\hex A&&\hex B& -% &\hex C&&\hex D&&\hex E&&\hex F&\cr\egroup$$} -% \def\*{\global\advance\count@ by1 } -% \def\:{\setbox0=\hbox{\char\count@}% -% \ifdim\ht0>7.5pt\reposition -% \else\ifdim\dp0>2.5pt\reposition\fi\fi -% \box0\global\advance\count@ by1 } -% \def\reposition{\setbox0=\hbox{$\vcenter{\kern2pt\box0\kern2pt}$}} -% \def\smallchart{% -% %\global\advance\count@ by16 -% &\oct{00x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline0 -% &\oct{01x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{02x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline1 -% &\oct{03x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{04x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline2 -% &\oct{05x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{06x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline3 -% &\oct{07x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{10x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline4 -% &\oct{11x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{12x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline5 -% &\oct{13x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{14x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline6 -% &\oct{15x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{16x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline7 -% &\oct{17x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline} -% -% \def\bigchart{% -% %\global\advance\count@ by16 -% &\oct{00x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline0 -% &\oct{01x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{02x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline1 -% &\oct{03x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{04x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline2 -% &\oct{05x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{06x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline3 -% &\oct{07x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{10x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline4 -% &\oct{11x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{12x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline5 -% &\oct{13x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{14x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline6 -% &\oct{15x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{16x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline7 -% &\oct{17x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{20x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline8 -% &\oct{21x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{22x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline9 -% &\oct{23x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{24x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{A} -% &\oct{25x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{26x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{B} -% &\oct{27x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{30x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{C} -% &\oct{31x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{32x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{D} -% &\oct{33x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{34x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{E} -% &\oct{35x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline -% &\oct{36x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{F} -% &\oct{37x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline} -% -% % \font\xrm = cmr10 at 10pt % change this line to test font -% % \beginchart\xrm \normalchart \endchart -% -% \newcommand{\smallfontchart}[1]{% -% \font\xrm = #1 \beginchart\xrm \smallchart \endchart} -% \newcommand{\bigfontchart}[1]{% -% \font\xrm = #1 \beginchart\xrm \bigchart \endchart} -% -% % \smallfontchart{cmr10 at 10pt} -% % \bigfontchart{ecrm1000 at 10pt} -% \makeatother -% % End stolen from Dr Knuth - - - -\title{fontinst} -\subtitle{Font installation software for \TeX} -\author{Alan Jeffrey\and Rowland McDonnell\and Lars Hellstr\"om} -\illustration{roadmap.eps} -\version{1.9} -\date{December 2004} - -\begin{document} - -\maketitle - -\begin{itshape} - This manual is currently being rewritten, and may therefore be a - bit disorganised. For authoritative information on command syntaxes - and the like, see the Literate Programming sources for - \fontinst. The main file there is \textsl{\texttt{fisource.tex}}. -\end{itshape} - -\bigskip - -\begin{footnotesize} - This manual describes the \texttt{fontinst} software for converting - fonts from Adobe Font Metric format to forms readable by \TeX. This - manual should be distributed with the \texttt{fontinst} software, - which is available by anonymous FTP from - \url{ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/fonts/utilities/fontinst}, and - on the various CD-ROMs containing material from the CTAN archives. - Please do not contact the author directly for copies. - - If you would like to report a bug with \texttt{fontinst}, please - mail \url{fontinst@tug.org}. The mail will be sent to the - \texttt{fontinst} mailing list. If you would like to be on the - \texttt{fontinst} mailing list, see - \url{http://tug.org/mailman/listinfo/fontinst}. -\end{footnotesize} - -\tableofcontents - -% \vfill - -\clearpage - - -% \section{Introduction} -% -% Digital fonts, as they may be bought from a foundry or other supplier, -% are usually not directly usable with \LaTeX. An obvious problem can be -% that the font information is not available in a format that \LaTeX\ -% understands. A more subtle problem is that the fonts are often -% organised in a way that is unsuitable for automatic typesetting. -% % \Fontinst was written to overcome these problems. -% -% % The main thing \fontinst does is creating virtual fonts (\vf's). -% -% -% % The \fontinst package is a set of \TeX\ macros written to create -% % virtual fonts for use with \TeX. - - -\section{Defining terms} - -This is rather a large and perhaps tedious section. You might be -tempted to skip it so you can get to some more direct information on -how to use \fontinst. That's fine if you understand everything about -how \TeX\ handles fonts. If not, I suggest you at least skim though -this section. - -\subsection{What's a font?} - -Once upon a time, this question was easily answered: a font is a -set of type in one size, style, etc. There used to be no -ambiguity, because a font was a collection of chunks of type metal -kept in a drawer, one drawer for each font. - -These days, with digital typesetting, things are more complicated. -What a font `is' isn't easy to pin down. A typical use of a \PS -font with \LaTeX\ might use these elements: -\begin{itemize} -\item Type 1 printer font file -\item Bitmap screen font file -\item Adobe font metric file (\afm file) -\item \TeX\ font metric file (\tfm file) -\item Virtual font file (\vf file) -\item font definition file (\fd file) -\end{itemize} -Looked at from a particular point of view, each of these files -`is' the font. So what's going on? - - -\subsubsection{Type 1 printer font files} - -These files contain the information needed by your printer to draw -the shapes of all the characters in a font. They're typically -files with a \pfa or \pfb extension; on Macs they're usually in -files of type `LWFN' which usually have icons that look like a -laser printer. The information in all these files is basically -the same: the only difference is in its representation. \pfa -stands for `printer font ASCII', while \pfb stands for `printer -font binary'. That is, \pfa files contain plain text information, -while \pfb files contain the same information encoded as -machine-readable binary data. - -If you have Adobe Type Manager (ATM) installed on your computer, -ATM will use these files to draw an accurate representation of the -letters on the screen of your computer when you are previewing a -\TeX\ document. - -Printer font files are not used directly by \TeX\ at all -- \TeX\ -just prepares a \dvi file that refers to the fonts by name and the -characters by number: \TeX\ knows nothing about the shapes -involved. The DVI driver uses the printer font files when you ask -it to print the \dvi file. This means that you can produce a \dvi -file which uses, say, Palatino, even if you do not have the -Type~1 printer font file for this font on your computer. You will -need to find a computer that does have Palatino before you can -print it or preview it, though. - -Pdf\TeX\ is different from \TeX\ in this respect; since pdf\TeX\ -integrates most of the functionality of a DVI driver, it may be unable -to generate working \pdf output if the some Type~1 printer font file -is not available. - - -\subsubsection{Bitmap screen font files} - -These files contain a low-resolution bitmap for drawing a -representation of the font on the screen of your computer if ATM -is not installed. In the \TeX\ world, these files are only used -for screen previews by the DVI driver. They are kept in font -suitcase files on Macintoshes. -%\marginnote{And where on other computers?} - - -\subsubsection{Adobe font metric files (\afm files)} - -These files are text files which contain information about the -size of each character in a font, kerning and ligature -information, and so on. They can't be used by \TeX\ directly, but -the information they contain is essential if you want to use a -font with \TeX. \Fontinst can create from an \afm file the -necessary \tfm and \vf files so you can use a font with \TeX. -Once you have created all the files you need to use a font with -\TeX, you can remove the corresponding \afm files from your -computer unless you have other software that needs them. - -The job of turning an \afm file into a set of \tfm and \vf files -is one of the main uses for \fontinst. Most of this document is -concerned with this process, so don't worry if it seems a bit -vague at the moment. - - -\subsubsection{\TeX\ font metric files (\tfm files)} - -These are binary data files in a format designed for use by \TeX\ -which contain (more-or-less) the same information as \afm files: -the size of each character in a font (font metric data), kerning, -and ligature information. - -When you select a font in \TeX, you are telling \TeX\ to typeset -using a particular \tfm file; from \TeX's point of view, a \tfm -file (and nothing else) \emph{is} a font. \TeX\ itself doesn't -see printer font files, screen bitmaps, \pk files, \vf files, or -anything else to do with fonts: only \tfm files. - -\TeX\ uses these \tfm files to decide where to put characters when -typesetting. From \TeX's point of view, \tfm files are fonts, -even though they contain no information about the shape of -letters, and are not used by anything except \TeX\ -- once you -have produced a \dvi file, you don't need the \tfm files to print -it out. (This is a slight lie: \dvips can read \tfm files -corresponding to \PS and \TT fonts so it can modify the metrics -slightly to improve the letterspacing at your chosen output -resolution. This is an optional minor tweak and not an essential -part of the output process.) - - -\subsubsection{Property list files (\pl files)} - -\pl files are human-readable text files which contain all the font -metric, kerning, ligature, and other information needed to create -a \tfm file. You can convert between the two file formats using -\tftopl and \pltotf. - - -\subsubsection{Virtual font files (\vf files)} - -These are binary data files in a format designed for use by \TeX\ -\dvi drivers. They're main purpose in life is to let you use -fonts in different encodings to the standard \TeX\ encodings. -These files are used by \dvi driver software only. - -They are used only by \dvi drivers to work out what it should -\emph{really} print when you ask for a particular character. -Technically they are like subroutine libraries for \dvi drivers, -with one subroutine for each character in the virtual font: when -the \dvi driver sees a \dvi command to set a character from a virtual -font, it will execute a sequence of \dvi commands (the ``mapcommands -property'' of this character) that it reads in the \vf file. You need -not worry about the details of this, as \fontinst deals with them for -you. Creating and using virtual fonts is what this document is about, -so don't worry if this doesn't make sense yet. (After all, how much -do you need to know about the inner workings of \dvi files to typeset -and print \TeX\ documents?) - -Each \vf file has a \tfm file with the same name. To use a -virtual font, you select the \tfm file as the font to use in your -document. When the \dvi driver comes across this \tfm file in the -\dvi file, it looks up the \vf file and uses that to decide what -to do. - - -\subsubsection{Virtual property list files (\vpl files)} - -\vpl files are human-readable text files which contain all the -font metric, kerning, mapping, and other information needed to -create a \vf and \tfm pair. - -\vptovf will create a \vf/\tfm pair from a \vpl file. \vftovp -will create a \vpl from a \vf/\tfm pair. \vftovp also needs to be -able to read all the \tfm files that are referred to by a \vf to -recreate the \vpl\ -- it looks at the checksums to verify that -everything's okay. - - -\subsubsection{Font definition files (\fd files)} - -These are files containing commands to tell \LaTeX\ which \tfm -files to associate with a request for a font using \LaTeX's font -selection commands. - -For example, here is a small and edited part of the \fd file -supplied with \setpackagename{PSNFSS} to allow you to use the -Adobe Times font in T1 encoding: - -\begin{verbatim} - \ProvidesFile{t1ptm.fd} - [1997/02/11 Fontinst v1.6 font definitions for T1/ptm.] - - \DeclareFontFamily{T1}{ptm}{} - - \DeclareFontShape{T1}{ptm}{m}{n} {<<->> ptmr8t}{} - \DeclareFontShape{T1}{ptm}{m}{it}{<<->> ptmri8t}{} - ... - \DeclareFontShape{T1}{ptm}{b}{n} {<<->> ptmb8t}{} - \DeclareFontShape{T1}{ptm}{b}{it}{<<->> ptmbi8t}{} - ... -\end{verbatim} -What this means is: when you use \LaTeX\ to select the font family -|ptm| in T1 encoding in the medium series (|m|) and normal shape -(|n|), \TeX\ uses the font \texttt{ptmr8t.tfm}. Similarly, if you -select bold italic, \TeX\ uses \texttt{ptmbi8t.tfm}. - -\LaTeX\ works out which \fd file to load based on the current -encoding and font family selected. If you've selected T1 encoded -|ptm| like this: -\begin{verbatim} - \fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{ptm}\selectfont -\end{verbatim} -\LaTeX\ loads the file \url{t1ptm.fd} (if it doesn't exist, you're -in trouble). As you can see above, this file contains information -so that \LaTeX\ knows which \tfm file to use. So if you ask for, -say, |T1/ptm/b/it| (T1 encoded Times-Roman, bold series, italic -shape), you get the font \texttt{ptmbi8t}. - -You can find more about \fd files and \LaTeX's font selection commands -at CTAN: -\url{ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/fntguide.tex} -and \url{ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/info/simple-nfss.tex} are -both useful. - - -\subsection{What does \fontinst do?} - -\fontinst creates \vpl and \pl files from \afm or \pl files to map -any glyph or combination of glyphs in the original font files to -any slot in the output font file. There, isn't that better? Off -you go now\ldots - -If you're still confused, I'll explain a few things. -\begin{description} -\item[Glyph] - A glyph is an image, often associated with one or several characters. - Some examples of glyphs are: - `A', `\textsf{A}', `$\mathcal{A}$', `B', `F', - `{\usefont{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}f}', - `{\usefont{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}fi}', `\~{}'. - Fonts are collections of glyphs. \Fontinst refers to glyphs by name. -\item[Slot] - This is jargon for `a numbered position in a font'. (What is - important is the number, and that this number refers to a position - in a font, but which font is usually irrelevant.) -\item[Character] - The modern definition is that a character is the smallest component - of written language that has semantic value. Speaking of a - character, one refers to the abstract meaning and/or shape, rather - than a specific shape. - - Since fonts have often contained a unique glyph for each character - and each usable glyph has been assigned a particular slot, - it is not uncommon (in particular in older terminology) to see the - three mixed up, usually so that one says `character' where one of - the other two would have been more correct. The \TeX-related font - file formats is no exception, as you may see examples of elsewhere - in this document. -\item[Encoding] - There are really two different encoding concepts that one encounters - when using \fontinst. The differences are not great, and an - encoding of one kind often corresponds to an encoding of the other - kind, but it is not merely a matter of translation. - - A \emph{\LaTeX\ encoding} is a mapping from characters (or more - formally \LaTeX\ Internal Character Representations) to slots. - In the \texttt{OT1} encoding, `\o' (or more technically `|\o|') maps - to slot~28, whereas in the \texttt{T1} encoding it maps to slot~248. - This kind of encoding affects what \TeX\ is doing; \dvi drivers are - not involved. - - A \emph{font encoding} (or \emph{encoding vector}) is a mapping from - slots to glyph names. This is the kind of encoding that \fontinst - primarily deals with, and also the kind of encoding that \dvi - drivers make use of. \texttt{ot1.etx} associates slot~28 with - `\texttt{oslash}', whereas \texttt{t1.etx} and \texttt{EC.enc} (one - of several to \texttt{T1} corresponding encoding vectors that come - with \dvips) associates slot~28 with `\texttt{fi}'. - - \LaTeX\ encodings occur in \fontinst only as names and only in - relation to \fd files. It is unlikely that you will need to create - one of your own. The mappings defined by font encodings are on the - other hand of great importance and \etx files are used to direct - the generation of virtual fonts. Advanced \fontinst users may well - find that they need to create new font encodings to achieve their - goals. -\end{description} - -% You're probably familiar with ASCII -% encoding, which has the letter `A' in slot~65, `B' in slot~66, -% and so on. That's it, really. \TeX\ uses several different -% encodings. The most common ones are OT1 (the original \TeX\ -% 7~bit encoding) and T1 (the newer \TeX\ 8~bit encoding). -% % -- much more on this later. - -The thing is that the average \PS font comes in Adobe standard -encoding, which, for example, has the glyph dotless~i `\i' in -slot~245. But \TeX\ \texttt{T1} encoding expects the glyph o~dieresis -`{\"o}' in that slot, and wants dotless~i in slot~25. So if you -tried to use a raw \PS font with \TeX, any time you tried to get -a `{\"o}', you'd get a `\i'; and every time you tried to get a `\i', -you'd get a blank, because Adobe standard encoding says that -slot~25 is empty. The process of dealing with this problem is -called `re-encoding', and is what \fontinst helps with. - -This might not make much sense yet; the best thing to do is relax. -There's a lot of things that need to be dealt with when you're -setting up \LaTeX\ to use a new font, so you can expect to be a -bit confused until you've done it a few times. - - -\subsection{What do you do with \fontinst?} - -If you're using \fontinst, the usual steps you need to take to use -an ordinary \PS text font with \LaTeX\ are these: - -\begin{enumerate} -\item Give the \afm files an appropriate name. -\item Use \fontinst to produce an |8r| encoded \pl files from - these \afm files. -\item Use \fontinst to create T1 and OT1 encoded \pl and \vpl - files from the |8r| encoded \pl files (this procedure will also - create suitable \fd files). -\item Use \pltotf to turn each \pl file into a \tfm file. -\item Use \vptovf to turn each \vpl file into a pair of \vf and - \tfm files. -\item Move the \tfm, \vf, and \fd files into the appropriate - directories so \LaTeX\ can see them. -\item Tell your DVI driver about the new font (edit \dvips's - \texttt{psfonts.map} file, or \OzTeX's \texttt{Default} - configuration file. -\item Perhaps write a package file to make selecting the new font - a little easier. -\item Test it. -\end{enumerate} - - -\section{Fontmaking commands} - -There are three main types of files that you may write to control what -\fontinst does: \emph{command files} (usually with suffix -\setdotfilename{tex}), \emph{encoding definition files} (suffix -\setdotfilename{etx}), and \emph{metric files} (suffix -\setdotfilename{mtx}). Command files directly tell \fontinst to do -things, whereas the purpose of an encoding or metric file is more to -store data, but all three file types are technically sequences of -\TeX\ commands that \fontinst execute when reading the file. Normal -\TeX\ syntax rules apply in all three file types, although a few -commands may behave in unfamiliar ways. - -Within the command file category, it is possible to discern certain -subcategories. Most command files are written for one particular -task, but some are common pieces that have been factored out from -larger command files and are merely meant to be |\input| where -appropriate. (\setfilename{csc2x.tex} in the \fontinst distribution is -an example of this latter kind.) One may also distinguish between -command files that are made for use with \setfilename{fontinst.sty} -command definitions and command files that are made for use with -\setfilename{finstmsc.sty} command definitions. This section documents -the commands that are particular to the former category, whereas the -next section documents commands that are particular to the latter. - - -\subsection{Install commands} - -The core fontmaking takes place within a block of ``install -commands''. (This name is a bit unfortunate since nothing is actually -installed; rather some files that need to be installed are generated.) -Such blocks have the structure -\begin{quote} - |\installfonts|\\ - \m{install commands}\\ - |\endinstallfonts| -\end{quote} -The \m{install commands} describe the fonts, glyphs and encodings used -to build fonts, whereas the purpose of the delimiting |\installfonts| -and |\endinstallfonts| are rather to organise the writing of \fd files. -\begin{decl*} - |\installfonts|\\ - |\endinstallfonts| -\end{decl*} -At |\installfonts|, \fontinst's internal list of \fd files to generate -are cleared. At |\endinstallfonts|, \fd files are written for those -combinations of encoding and font family that appeared in the -\meta{install commands}. - -\begin{hackernote} - |\installfonts|, |\endinstallfonts|, and the individual - install commands between them also cooperate in a rather complicated - grouping scheme to cache glyphbases. This may interfere with - non-\fontinst commands in the \meta{install commands}. If for - example an assignment to some |\tracing|\dots\ parameter here does - not seem to have any effect, try making the assignment |\global|. -\end{hackernote} - -The most important \meta{install command} is -\begin{decl*} - |\installfont|\arg{font-name}\arg{metrics-list}\arg{etx-list}\\ - \hspace*{1.5em}\arg{encoding}\arg{family}\arg{series}% - \arg{shape}\arg{size} -\end{decl*} -This produces a \TeX\ virtual font called \m{font-name}. The -\meta{metrics-list} and the \meta{etx-list} determine this font, -whereas the other arguments specify how the \fd file will declare it -for \LaTeX. The \m{encoding}, \m{family}, \m{series}, and \m{shape} -are precisely the NFSS parameters. The \m{size} is either a shorthand -declared by \verb|\declaresize| (see below), or is an \fd size -specification. - -Like most \fontinst lists, the elements in the \meta{metrics-list} and -\meta{etx-list} are separated by commas (so-called comma-separated -lists). In their simplest form, the elements of these lists are file -names (minus suffixes): \mtx files in the \meta{metrics-list} and -\etx files in the \meta{etx-list}. First the \mtx files are processed -to build up a glyphbase, i.e., store definitions of glyphs and their -metric properties in memory, and then the \etx files are processed -(several times) to select a set of glyphs and write the corresponding -information to a \vpl file. - -For example, to install the \texttt{T1}-encoded Times Roman font -(using \texttt{t1.etx} and \texttt{latin.mtx}), you say: -\begin{verbatim} - \installfont{ptmr8t}{ptmr8r,latin}{t1} - {T1}{ptm}{m}{n}{} -\end{verbatim} -To install a \texttt{OT1}-encoded Times Roman font, with a scaled -version of Symbol for the Greek letters, you say: -\begin{verbatim} - \installfont{zptmrsy}{ptmr8r,psyr scaled 1100,latin}{ot1} - {OT1}{ptm}{m}{n}{} -\end{verbatim} - -As the second example indicates, there is more to the list items than -just file names. In the case of an metrics list item, the syntax -permits the two forms -\begin{decl*} - \meta{filename}\meta{optional modifiers}\\ - |\metrics| \meta{metric commands} -\end{decl*} -\NEWfeature{v1.923} -where an \meta{optional modifier} is one of -\begin{decl*} - \verb*| scaled |\meta{rawscale factor}\\ - \verb*| suffix |\meta{glyph name suffix}\\ - \verb*| encoding |\meta{etx}\\ - \verb*| option |\meta{string} -\end{decl*} -A list item may contain several such modifiers, but most commonly it -does not contain any. The -\meta{metric commands} are explicit metric commands, as described in -Section~\ref{Sec:Metric}; this latter feature is meant for minor -adjustments that you don't want to bother creating a separate \mtx -file for. - -The \meta{filename} above primarily refers to a file -\meta{filename}\texttt{.mtx}, but that need not always exist before -executing the above command. If there exists a \pl, \afm, or \vpl file -with the right name then that is first converted to a corresponding -\mtx file. However, a special case occurs if there is an |encoding| -modifier: this forces conversion of a \pl or \vpl file even if an -\mtx file exists, and also forces using the specified \etx file when -assigning glyph names to the slots of that file. Normally the choice -of \etx file for such conversions to \mtx is based on -|\declareencoding| declarations. - -The |scaled| modifier sets the \texttt{rawscale} variable for the -processing of that file. This has the effect of scaling all raw -glyphs from that file to \meta{rawscale factor} per milles of their -previous size. The |suffix| modified causes the \meta{glyph name -suffix} to be implicitly appended to all glyphs defined by this file. -The |option| modifier adds the \meta{string} to the list of ``options'' -for this file. The |\ifoption| command can be used in the file to test -whether a particular string has been supplied as an option. - -\begin{hackernote} - In general, \fontinst commands process comma-separated list arguments - by first splitting at commas and then fully expanding each item, but - this \meta{metrics-list} argument is an exception. This is first - fully expanded (|\edef|) and then split into items. The difference - is that a macro used in this \meta{metrics-list} argument can expand - to several list items, whereas a macro used in an ordinary - comma-separated list argument can only expand to (part of) a single - list item. - - The |\metrics| list items do however constitute an exception within - this exception. These list items are in their entirety protected - from the initial full expansion, so you don't have to worry about - peculiar fragility errors there. -\end{hackernote} - -The elements in the \meta{etx-list} have fewer variants, but there is -still a general syntax -\begin{decl*} - \meta{filename}\meta{optional modifiers} -\end{decl*} -The \meta{optional modifier}s permitted are: -\begin{decl*} - \verb*| mtxasetx|\\ - \verb*| option |\meta{string} -\end{decl*} -The \texttt{option} one is as for metric files. \texttt{mtxasetx} is -probably only relevant for use with |\installrawfont| (see below). - - -\begin{decl}[v1.912] - |\installfontas|\arg{font-name}\\% - \hspace*{1.5em}\arg{encoding}\arg{family}\arg{series}% - \arg{shape}\arg{size} -\end{decl} -This install command adds an \fd entry for the \meta{font-name}, but -it doesn't actually generate that font. Usually that font was -generated by a previous |\installfont|, and this is used to create -additional entries for the font. - - -\begin{decl} - |\installrawfont|\arg{font-name}\arg{metrics-list}\arg{etx-list}\\ - \hspace*{1.5em}\arg{encoding}\arg{family}\arg{series}% - \arg{shape}\arg{size} -\end{decl} -This is similar to |\installfont| except that it produces -a \TeX\ raw font as \pl file rather than a virtual font. Often a \pl -font with the specified name will already exist when this command is -called, and that will then be overwritten. These two \pl files will -typically be somewhat different. -The normal reason for using this command is that one wishes to -``refine'' the metrics of a font that was generated by transformation -commands. - -For example, to install an \texttt{8r}-encoded Times Roman raw font -(using \texttt{8r.etx} and \texttt{8r.mtx}), you say: -\begin{verbatim} - \installrawfont{ptmr8r}{ptmr8r,8r}{8r} - {8r}{ptm}{m}{n}{} -\end{verbatim} - -The effect of a -\begin{decl*}[v1.923] - \meta{filename}\verb*| mtxasetx| -\end{decl*} -in the \meta{etx-list} is not that \meta{filename}\texttt{.etx} is -read, but that \meta{filename}\texttt{.mtx} is read. The -interpretation of the commands in this file is however not the -customary, and almost the only thing paid attention to is the -correspondence between glyph names and slot numbers that is provided -by the |\setrawglyph| and |\setscaledrawglyph| commands; this -correspondence is treated as if it was given by |\setslot| \dots\ -|\endsetslot| commands in an \etx file. This is however only -guaranteed to work with transformable metric files. - -The purpose of this feature is to simplify installation of fonts with -very special encodings, such as ``Dingbat'' or ``Pi'' fonts. Instead -of creating an \etx file, which would probably only be useful with -that particular font, one can make use of the fact that the -interesting information is anyway available in the \mtx file. To -install Zapf Dingbats in their default encoding, one can thus say -\begin{verbatim} - \installrawfont{pzdr}{pzdr}{pzdr mtxasetx} - {U}{pzd}{m}{n}{} -\end{verbatim} - -Unlike the case with |\installfont|, which actually creates a real -(although virtual) font, |\installrawfont| can only create the -metrics for a font. The \dvi driver will require some other kind of -implementation of this font, usually an entry in some map file (e.g. -\texttt{psfonts.map}, in the case of \dvips) that links the \TeX\ font -name to e.g.\ a \PS\ font name and file. (Many \dvi drivers are -configured in such a way that they, without such a map file entry, -will call Metafont with the font name and thereby raise a sequence of -error messages about a \setdotfilename{mf} that doesn't exist. These -results are often rather confusing.) - - - -\begin{decl} - |\installfamily|\arg{encoding}\arg{family}\arg{fd-commands} -\end{decl} -This tells \fontinst to write an \fd file for the given combination -of encoding and family, and clears the internal list of entries to -put in that file. |\installfamily| commands usually come first in each -block of \meta{install commands}. - -For example, to produces a \LaTeX\ family with the \texttt{T1}-encoded -Times family, you say: -\begin{verbatim} - \installfamily{T1}{ptm}{} -\end{verbatim} -The \m{fd-commands} are executed every time a font in that family is -loaded, for example to stop the Courier font from being hyphenated you -say: -\begin{verbatim} - \installfamily{T1}{pcr}{\hyphenchar\font=-1} -\end{verbatim} -In more recent versions of \fontinst, the |\installfamily| command is -only necessary if you want the \m{fd-commands} argument to be -nonempty, but it doesn't hurt to make it explicit. - -\begin{hackernote} - The \m{fd-commands} argument is tokenized with the current catcodes - and written to file without expansion. In particular this means - that spaces will be inserted after all control sequences whose - names consists of letters, which can be unexpected if you intend to - make use of control sequences whose names contain |@| characters. -\end{hackernote} - - - - -\subsection{Transformation commands} - - -\begin{decl} - |\transformfont|\arg{font-name}\arg{transformed font} -\end{decl} -This makes a raw transformed font, for example expanded, slanted, -condensed or re-encoded. \emph{It is the responsibility of the device - driver to implement this transform.} Each \verb|\transformfont| -command writes out an \mtx file and a raw \pl file for \m{font-name}. - -The following commands are valid \m{transformed font}s: -\begin{decl*} - |\fromafm|\arg{afm}\\ - |\fromany|\arg{whatever}\\ - |\frompl|\arg{pl}\\ - |\fromplgivenetx|\marg{pl}\marg{etx}\\ - |\frommtx|\arg{mtx} -\end{decl*} -This reads the metrics of a font which is about to be transformed from -an external file. |\fromafm|, |\frompl|, and |\fromplgivenetx| write out -an \mtx file corresponding to the \afm or \pl file. In addition, -|\formafm| also writes out a raw \pl file, containing just the glyph -metrics but no kerning information. |\fromplgivenetx| permits -specifying which encoding file to use when associating glyph names to -slots, whereas |\frompl| tries to guess this from the -\texttt{CODINGSCHEME} property of the \pl file. |\fromany| looks for -a file in any of the formats (in the order \mtx, \pl, \afm) and -behaves as the first |\from|\dots\ for which it found a file. - -A \m{transformed font} may also be one of the following: -\begin{decl*} - |\scalefont|\arg{integer expression}\arg{transformed font}\\ - |\xscalefont|\arg{integer expression}\arg{transformed font}\\ - |\yscalefont|\arg{integer expression}\arg{transformed font}\\ - |\slantfont|\arg{integer expression}\arg{transformed font} -\end{decl*} -This applies a geometric transformation to the font metrics of -\m{transformed font}. The scale factor or slant factor are given in -1000 units to the design size. Typical examples are 167 for slanted -fonts or 850 for condensed fonts. - -The final case of a \m{transformed font} is: -\begin{decl*} - |\reencodefont|\arg{etx}\arg{transformed font} -\end{decl*} -This rearranges the encoding vector of \m{transformed font} to match -the encoding given by the \etx file. - - -For example, to create an oblique, |8r|-encoded version of Adobe Times -called \texttt{ptmro8r} you say: -\begin{verbatim} - \transformfont{ptmro8r}{ - \reencodefont{8r}{ - \slantfont{167}{\fromafm{ptmr8a}} - } - } -\end{verbatim} -This will create \texttt{ptmr8a.mtx}, \texttt{ptmr8a.pl}, -\texttt{ptmro8r.mtx} and \texttt{ptmro8r.pl}, which can then be used -as raw fonts in \verb|\installfont| commands. The equivalent -transformation can also be achieved in two steps: -\begin{verbatim} - \transformfont{ptmr8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{ptmr8a}}} - \transformfont{ptmro8r}{\slantfont{167}{\frommtx{ptmr8r}}} -\end{verbatim} -This will create \texttt{ptmr8a.mtx}, \texttt{ptmr8a.pl}, -\texttt{ptmr8r.mtx}, \texttt{ptmr8r.pl}, \texttt{ptmro8r.mtx} and -\texttt{ptmro8r.pl}. - -You will have to inform your device driver about the transformed font, -using the syntax appropriate for that driver. For example, in \dvips -you add a line to \texttt{psfonts.map}: -\begin{verbatim} - ptmro8r Times-Roman ".167 SlantFont TeXBase1Encoding ReEncodeFont" <<8r.enc -\end{verbatim} -See Section~\ref{Sec:Mapmaking} and -Subsection~\ref{Ssec:MapFragments} for details on how to generate -such lines automatically. - - -\subsection{Reglyphing commands} - -``Reglyphing'' is an \mtx file transformation that changes glyph -names but leaves the slot numbers and metrics as they were; -optionally it may drop some of the metric commands. See -Subsection~\ref{Ssec:Des:Reglyph} for an introduction to this. - -\begin{decl} - |\reglyphfonts|\\ - |\endreglyphfonts| -\end{decl} - -\begin{decl} - |\reglyphfont|\marg{destination font}\marg{source font} -\end{decl} - -\begin{decl} - |\renameglyph|\marg{to}\marg{from}\\ - |\renameglyphweighted|\marg{to}\marg{from}\marg{weight}\\ - |\killglyph|\marg{glyph}\\ - |\killglyphweighted|\marg{glyph}\marg{weight} -\end{decl} - -\begin{decl} - |\offmtxcommand|\marg{command}\\ - |\onmtxcommand|\marg{command} -\end{decl} - - - - -\subsection{Miscellaneous settings} - -\begin{decl} - |\substitutesilent|\arg{to}\arg{from}\\ - |\substitutenoisy|\arg{to}\arg{from} -\end{decl} -This declares a \LaTeX\ font substitution, that the series or shape -\m{to} should be substituted if necessary by the series or shape -\m{from}. \verb|\substitutesilent| means that when the font -substitution is made, no warning will given. - -\verb|\substitutenoisy| is the same as \verb|\substitutesilent|, but -gives a warning when the substitution is made by \LaTeX. - -For example, to say that the series |bx| can be replaced by the -series |b|, you say: -\begin{verbatim} - \substitutesilent{bx}{b} -\end{verbatim} -To say that the shape |ui| can be replaced by the shape |i|, you say: -\begin{verbatim} - \substitutenoisy{ui}{it} -\end{verbatim} - -The following weight substitutions are standard: -\begin{verbatim} - \substitutesilent{bx}{b} - \substitutesilent{b}{bx} - \substitutesilent{b}{sb} - \substitutesilent{b}{db} - \substitutesilent{m}{mb} - \substitutesilent{m}{l} -\end{verbatim} -The following shape substitutions are standard: -\begin{verbatim} - \substitutenoisy{ui}{it} - \substitutesilent{it}{sl} - \substitutesilent{sl}{it} -\end{verbatim} - -The |\installfontas| command should be considered as an -alternative to using font substitution, as it gives much finer -control over what \fd entries will be made. - - -\begin{decl} - |\declaresize|\arg{size}\arg{fd-size-range} -\end{decl} -This declares a new size, and gives the \fd size specifications for -it. For example, \url{fontinst.sty} declares the following sizes: -\begin{verbatim} - \declaresize{}{<<->>} - \declaresize{5}{<<5>>} - \declaresize{6}{<<6>>} - \declaresize{7}{<<7>>} - \declaresize{8}{<<8>>} - \declaresize{9}{<<9>>} - \declaresize{10}{<<10>>} - \declaresize{11}{<<10.95>>} - \declaresize{12}{<<12>>} - \declaresize{14}{<<14.4>>} - \declaresize{17}{<<17.28>>} - \declaresize{20}{<<20.74>>} - \declaresize{25}{<<24.88>>} -\end{verbatim} - -\begin{decl} - |\declareencoding|\arg{string}\arg{etx} -\end{decl} -This declares which \etx file corresponds to which \texttt{codingscheme} -string. For example, \url{fontinst.sty} declares the following -encoding strings: -\begin{verbatim} - \declareencoding{TEX TEXT}{ot1} - \declareencoding{TEX TEXT WITHOUT F-LIGATURES}{ot1} - \declareencoding{TEX TYPEWRITER TEXT}{ot1tt} - \declareencoding{TEX MATH ITALIC}{oml} - \declareencoding{TEX MATH SYMBOLS}{oms} - \declareencoding{TEX MATH EXTENSION}{omx} - \declareencoding{EXTENDED TEX FONT ENCODING - LATIN}{t1} - \declareencoding{TEX TEXT COMPANION SYMBOLS 1---TS1}{ts1} - \declareencoding{TEXBASE1ENCODING}{8r} - \declareencoding{TEX TYPEWRITER AND WINDOWS ANSI}{8y} -\end{verbatim} - - - - - -\subsection{Other} - -The following commands also belong to this section, but there is -currently no description of them here. - - -|\afmtomtx|\marg{afmfile}\marg{mtxfile} - -|\endrecordtransforms| - -|\etxtopl|\marg{encoding list}\marg{plfile} - -|\etxtovpl|\marg{encoding list}\marg{vplfile} - -|\fakenarrow|\marg{width factor} - -|\generalpltomtx|\marg{plfile}\marg{mtxfile}\marg{plsuffix}\marg{opt-enc} - -|\latinfamily|\marg{family}\marg{commands} - -|\mtxtomtx|\marg{source MTX}\marg{destination MTX} - -|\mtxtopl|\marg{mtxfile}\marg{plfile} - -|\NOFILES| - -|\recordtransforms|\marg{filename} - - - - -\section{Mapmaking commands} -\label{Sec:Mapmaking} - -The commands described in this section are for use with command files -that input \texttt{finstmsc.sty}. - - -\subsection{Mapfile command reference} - -For an introduction to making map file entries, see -Subsection~\ref{Ssec:MapFragments}. - -\begin{decl} - |\adddriver|\marg{driver name}\marg{fragment file name} -\end{decl} -This opens the file \meta{fragment file name} for writing mapfile -entries to. The \meta{driver name} selects the format of these -entries. - -\begin{decl} - |\makemapentry|\marg{\TeX\ font name} -\end{decl} -This causes a mapfile entry for the specified font to be written to -all files currently open for receiving mapfile entries. These -commands are usually automatically generated by \fontinst. - -\begin{decl} - |\donedrivers| -\end{decl} -This closes all files open for receiving mapfile entries. - - -\subsection{Drivers} - -The \meta{driver name}s that may be used with |\adddriver| are: - -\begin{decl} - |dvips| -\end{decl} -The \dvips driver. The mapfiles generated are useful also with pdf\TeX. - -\begin{decl} - |dvipdfm| -\end{decl} -The \setpackagename{dvipdfm} \dvi-to-\pdf driver. Not much tested, -but appears to work. - -\begin{decl}[v1.915] - |pltotf| -\end{decl} -Not really a \dvi driver. The file that is generated is a shell -script of \texttt{pltotf} commands for converting precisely those \pl -files which are needed to \tfm files (\fontinst generally generates -also a bunch of \pl files that in the end turn out to be -unnecessary). The \texttt{TFMfileprefix} variable can be used to -specify a path to the directory where these files should be placed. - -\begin{decl} - |debug| -\end{decl} -Not a \dvi driver either, but for each base font a report on the -information that was available. Useful if you need to write the -driver file yourself. - - -\subsection{Configuration commands} - -The following commands configure the generation of mapfile entries, -mostly with respect to how various pieces of information are deduced -from other pieces. - -\begin{decl} - |\AssumeAMSBSYY|\\ - |\AssumeBaKoMa|\\ - |\AssumeLWFN|\\ - |\AssumeMetafont| -\end{decl} - -\begin{decl} - |\declarepsencoding|\marg{etx}\marg{postscript name}\marg{action} -\end{decl} - -\begin{decl} - |\specifypsfont|\marg{PS font name}\marg{actions} -\end{decl} - - -An \meta{action} is one of -\begin{decl*}[v1.928] - |\download|\marg{file}\\ - |\fulldownload|\marg{file} -\end{decl*} -where \meta{file} is a file to download (`download' typically means -``include in the generated \PS output or equivalent''). The difference -between |\download| and |\fulldownload| have to do with how partial -downloading (subsetting) of fonts should be handled. |\download| means -use the driver's defaults (often settable via command line options) -for this. |\fulldownload| means don't subset: always include the full -font, if \fontinst knows how to express this in a map file entry for -this particular driver. - -Additional actions could be added in the future, if there is a need -for them. - - -\begin{decl} - |\storemapdata|\marg{\TeX\ font name}\marg{source}\marg{transforms} -\end{decl} -This records information about how the font named \meta{\TeX\ font -name} was generated. Such commands are usually found in the file of -recorded transforms. If a font is encountered for which no -information has been stored, then the corresponding \mtx file will be -sourced, looking for a |\storemapdata| command there. - -A \meta{source} is one of -\begin{decl*} - |\fromafm|\marg{AFM name}\marg{PS name}\\ - |\frompl|\marg{PL name}\\ - |\frommtx|\marg{MTX name}\\ - |\fromvpl| -\end{decl*} -Note that several of them have a different syntax and meaning than -they do in fontmaking command files. - -A \meta{transform} is one of -\begin{decl*} - |\reencodefont|\marg{etx}\\ - |\reglyphfont|\\ - |\transformfont|\marg{x-scale}\marg{slant-scale} -\end{decl*} -Note that all of these have a different meaning than they do in -fontmaking command files. - -\begin{decl} - |\debugvalue|\arg{name} -\end{decl} -This adds a value to the list of those that are reported by the -\texttt{debug} driver. Example: -\begin{verbatim} - \debugvalue{PS_font_file} -\end{verbatim} - - - -\subsection{Basic conversion commands} - -Some of the basic ``convert an $X$ file to a $Y$ file'' commands in -\fontinst are not useful as part of a fontmaking run, and are -available only in \texttt{finstmsc.sty} to conserve some memory. - -\begin{decl} - |\enctoetx|\marg{encfile}\marg{etxfile} -\end{decl} -This reads the file \meta{encfile}\texttt{.enc} which should be -simple \PS code defining a \PS encoding vector and generates a -corresponding rudimentary \fontinst encoding file -\meta{etxfile}\texttt{.etx}. It's a basic ``import encoding to -\fontinst'' command. - -\begin{decl}[v1.911] - |\etxtoenc|\marg{etxfiles}\marg{encfile} -\end{decl} -This does the opposite of |\enctoetx|; the information in the \etx -files that is converted is the correspondence between slots and glyph -names. -\NEWfeature{v1.927} -The \meta{etxfiles} argument is a comma-separated list of encoding -files which are superimposed to generate the \PS encoding. The first -|\setslot| for a particular slot is the one which decides which glyph -will be placed there. - -\begin{decl}[v1.928] - |\etxtocmap|\marg{etxfile}\marg{cmapfile} -\end{decl} -This reads an \etx file and generates a corresponding ToUnicode CMap -file; the information that is converted is the map from slot numbers -to |\Unicode| code points. - - - - -\section{General commands} - - - -This section describes commands and mechanisms that are the same in -all file types. Commands that are particular for one type of file are -described in subsequent sections. - - -\subsection{Variables} - -Many (but not all) of the activities \fontinst perform can be -understood as either ``setting variables'' or ``formatting and writing -to file data stored in some variable''. The accessing of variables is -an important aspect of how \fontinst works. - -Variables come in different types and variables of different types -live in different namespaces; |\int{foo}|, |\str{foo}|, and -|\dim{foo}| refer to three different variables which are all named -|foo|. Variables are either set or not set. Unless the contrary is -stated explicitly, variables default to not being set. It is an error -to access the value of a variable that has not been set. \Fontinst -variable assignments are as a rule local, i.e., will be undone when -the enclosing \TeX\ group is ended. Most command file commands that -cause files to be read will begin a group before reading the file(s) -and end the group at some point after having read them. - -Taking string variables as an example, there are three commands for -changing a string variable: -\begin{decl*} - |\setstr|\arg{name}\arg{string expression}\\ - |\resetstr|\arg{name}\arg{string expression}\\ - |\unsetstr|\arg{name} -\end{decl*} -The |\resetstr| command unconditionally sets the string variable -\meta{name} to the full expansion of the \meta{string expression}. -The |\unsetstr| command unconditionally renders the string variable -\meta{name} unset. If the the string variable \meta{name} is -currently unset then the |\setstr| command will set it to the full -expansion of the \meta{string expression}, but if it already is set -then |\setstr| does nothing. - -This pattern with three commands, one |\set|\dots\ which only sets -unset variables, one |\reset|\dots\ which sets variables regardless of -whether they have been set or not, and one |\unset|\dots\ which unsets -variables is recurring in \fontinst. Variables are most commonly set -using some |\set|\dots\ command; this has the effect that the first -command to try to set a variable is the one which actually sets it. - -If |\set|\dots\ is the command for setting the value of a variable, -the command for getting that value has the same name without the -|set| part, e.g., |\setint|--|\int|, |\setkern|--|\kern|, etc. There -are typically also conditionals for testing whether variables are -set, and these take the form |\ifis|\dots\arg{name}|\then|. - - -The following commands for changing the value of a variable can be -used anywhere: - -\begin{decl} - |\setdim|\arg{dim}\arg{dimension}\\ - |\setint|\arg{int}\arg{integer expression}\\ - |\setstr|\arg{str}\arg{string expression} -\end{decl} -If the dimension variable \m{dim} is currently undefined, it is -defined to be the current value of \m{dimension}. - -If the integer variable \m{int} is currently undefined, it is -defined to be the current value of \m{integer expression}. - -If the string variable \m{str} is currently undefined, it is -defined to be the current value of \m{string expression}. - -\begin{decl} - |\setcommand|\arg{command}\meta{parameter text}\arg{replacement text} -\end{decl} -If the command \m{command} is currently undefined, it is defined to -grab parameters as specified by the \meta{parameter text} and then -expand to the \m{replacement text}. This uses the same syntax for -parameters as the \TeX\ \verb|\def| command. -\begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{r l} - No. parameters& \meta{parameter text}\\ - 0& (empty)\\ - 1& |#1|\\ - 2& |#1#2|\\ - 3& |#1#2#3|\\ - \multicolumn{2}{c}{and so on.} - \end{tabular} -\end{center} -Some examples: -\begin{verbatim} - \setcommand\lc#1#2{#2} - \setcommand\lc#1#2{#1small} -\end{verbatim} -With the first definition, |\lc{A}{a}| expands to |a|, but with the -second it expands to |Asmall|. - -\begin{decl} - |\resetdim|\arg{dim}\arg{dimension}\\ - |\resetint|\arg{int}\arg{integer expression}\\ - |\resetstr|\arg{str}\arg{string expression} -\end{decl} -The dimension variable \m{dim} is defined to be the current value -of \m{dimension}. - -The integer variable \m{int} is defined to be the current value of -\m{integer expression}. - -The string variable \m{str} is defined to be the current value of -the \m{string expression}. (|\resetstr| mostly boils down to a \TeX\ -|\edef| command.) - -\begin{decl} - |\resetcommand|\arg{command}\meta{parameter text}\arg{replacement text} -\end{decl} -The command \m{command} is defined to grab parameters as specified by -the \meta{parameter text} and then expand to the \m{replacement text}. -This is a synonym for the \TeX\ \verb|\def| command. - -\begin{decl} - |\unsetdim|\arg{dim}\\ - |\unsetint|\arg{int}\\ - |\unsetstr|\arg{str}\\ - |\unsetcommand|\arg{command} -\end{decl} -Makes \m{dim}, \m{int}, \m{str}, or \m{command} an undefined -dimension, integer, string or command. - -\begin{decl}[v1.900] - |\offcommand|\marg{command}\\ - |\oncommand|\marg{command} -\end{decl} -|\offcommand| turns off a command, i.e., it redefines it to do -nothing (while still taking the same number of arguments). -|\oncommand| turns a command back on, i.e., it restores the -definition the command had before a previous |\offcommand|. Using -|\offcommand| on a command that is already off or |\oncommand| on a -command that is not off has no effect. - - -\subsection{Argument types} - -There are roughly six types of arguments that \fontinst -commands can take. These are -\begin{itemize} - \item integer expressions, - \item string expressions, - \item comma-separated lists of string expressions, - \item dimensions, - \item commands (i.e., \TeX\ control sequences), and - \item other (pretty much ``none of the above''). -\end{itemize} -Integer expressions are explained in Subsection~\ref{Sec:integer} -below. - -The most common form of a string expression is simply a sequence of -character tokens, but any balanced text which expands to such a -sequence of tokens is legal. Several of the standard \etx files use -macros in string expressions to make glyph names to some extent -configurable. Besides such custom macros, the following \fontinst -commands may be used to access variable values inside a string -expression -\begin{decl*} - |\strint|\arg{int}\\ - |\str|\arg{str}\\ - |\dim|\arg{dim} -\end{decl*} -Incidentally, these \m{int}, \m{str}, and \m{dim} are themselves -string expressions (for the names of integer, string, and dimen -respectively variables). - -Dimensions are simply \TeX\ \meta{dimen}s; their use is rather -limited. \Fontinst does not provide for any sort of ``dimen -expressions''. Most actual lengths are expressed as integer -expressions, in \afm units ($1/1000$ of the font size). - -Common to integer expressions, string expressions, and -dimensions is that these argument types get expanded during -evaluation (in the case of string expressions, this expansion -\emph{is} the evaluation), which means one can use macros in -arguments of these types. Command arguments do not get -expanded---they are mainly used with commands that modify the -definitions of other commands. - -Comma-separated lists of string expressions are first split at commas -(without prior expansion) and each element is then treated as a -string expression (i.e., \emph{gets expanded}). (As remarked elsewhere, -the \meta{metrics-list} argument of |\installfont| is not properly a -comma-separated list of string expressions, even though it may look -like one.) -As for the ``other'' arguments one cannot give any rules: they -might get expanded, but it could also happen that they won't. - - - -\subsection{Integer expressions} -\label{Sec:integer} - -The \emph{integer expressions} provide a user-friendly syntax for -\TeX\ arithmetic. They are used to manipulate any integers, -including glyph dimensions, which are given in \afm units, that is -1000 to the design size. \TeX\ \pl fonts have their dimensions -converted to \afm units automatically. - -The \emph{integer expressions} are: - -\begin{decl} - \m{number} -\end{decl} -Returns the value of a \TeX\ \m{number} (as explained in -\emph{The \TeX book}). Typical examples of this kind of integer -expression are |0|, |1000|, |538|, |-20|, etc. - -\begin{decl} - |\int|\arg{int} -\end{decl} -Returns the value of the integer variable \m{int}. - -\begin{decl} - |\width|\arg{glyph}\\ - |\height|\arg{glyph}\\ - |\depth|\arg{glyph}\\ - |\italic|\arg{glyph} -\end{decl} -Returns the width, height, depth, or italic correction of the glyph -variable \m{glyph}. - -\begin{decl} - |\kerning|\arg{left}\arg{right} -\end{decl} -Returns the kerning between the \m{left} and \m{right} glyphs. Unlike -other types of variable accesses, where it is an error to access -something that has not been explicitly set, this command returns |0| -if no kern has been set between the two glyphs. - -\begin{decl} - |\neg|\arg{integer expression}\\ - |\add|\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression}\\ - |\sub|\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression}\\ - |\max|\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression}\\ - |\min|\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression}\\ - |\mul|\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression}\\ - |\div|\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression}\\ - |\scale|\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression}\\ - |\half|\arg{integer expression}\\ - |\otherhalf|\arg{integer expression} -\end{decl} -|\neg| returns the negation of the \m{integer expression}. - -|\ad| returns the sum of the two \m{integer expression}s. - -|\sub| returns the first \m{integer expression} minus the second. - -|\max| returns the maximum of the two \m{integer expression}s. - -|\min| returns the minimum of the two \m{integer expression}s. - -|\mul| returns the product of the two \m{integer expression}s. - -|\div| returns the first \m{integer expression} divided by the second. - -|\scale| returns the first \m{integer expression} times the second, -divided by 1000. |\scale| does better rounding than the corresponding -combination of |\mul| and |\div|. - -|\half| returns half the \m{integer expression}. It does better -rounding than |\scale|\arg{integer expression}|{500}| or -|\div|\arg{integer expression}|{2}|. - -|\otherhalf| returns the ``other half'' of the \m{integer -expression}, i.e., the sum of |\half| something and |\otherhalf| the -same thing is that thing back. - - -\subsection{Conditionals and loops} - -\Fontinst has a rather extensive family of conditionals (|\if|s), and -as of late also some convenient loop commands. The most common forms -of a \fontinst conditional are -\begin{decl*} - |\if|\dots \meta{argument(s)}|\then| \meta{then branch} |\Fi|\\ - |\if|\dots \meta{argument(s)}|\then| \meta{then branch} |\Else| - \meta{else branch} |\Fi| -\end{decl*} -i.e., \fontinst uses Plain\TeX\ style conditionals rather than \LaTeX\ -style conditionals. Every |\if|\dots\ command can be thought of as -testing some condition. If the condition is true then the \meta{then -branch} will be executed, but not the \meta{else branch} (if there is -one). If the condition is false then the \meta{then branch} will nor be -executed, but if there is an \meta{else branch} then that will be -executed. Conditionals may be nested (i.e., occur in the then or else -branch). - -\begin{hackernote} - The |\then| is not just syntactic sugar, but a functional part of - those conditionals which take arguments. Its purpose is to look - like an |\if| to \TeX\ when the conditional occurs in a skipped - branch of another conditional. -\end{hackernote} - -The most common conditionals are those which test if a variable is set. -\begin{decl*} - |\ifisint|\arg{int}|\then|\\ - |\ifisdim|\arg{dim}|\then|\\ - |\ifisstr|\arg{str}|\then|\\ - |\ifiscommand|\arg{command}|\then| -\end{decl*} -These cause the following \meta{then branch} to be executed if the -specified variable is set, and the \meta{else branch} to be executed -if the variable is not set. The \meta{int}, \meta{dim}, and -\meta{str} are string expressions for the names of an integer, -dimension, and string respectively variable. The \meta{command} is -the actual control sequence (command variable) that should be tested. - -\begin{decl} - |\ifisglyph|\arg{glyph}|\then| -\end{decl} -This similarly tests if a glyph (also a variable of a kind) is set in -the current glyph base. The glyph name \meta{glyph} is a string -expression. - -\begin{decl}[v1.917] - |\ifareglyphs|\marg{glyph list}|\then| -\end{decl} -This command tests whether all the glyphs in the \meta{glyph list} -(a comma-separated list of string expressions) are set in the current -glyph base. If one of the glyphs is not set then condition is false. - -\begin{decl}[v1.900] - |\ifnumber|\marg{integer expression}\meta{rel}% - \marg{integer expression}|\then| -\end{decl} -The \meta{rel} is one of \texttt{<}, \texttt{=}, and \texttt{>}. -This command evaluates the two \meta{integer expression}s and -then tests whether the specified relation holds between their values. - -\begin{decl}[v1.900] - |\ifiskern|\marg{glyph1}\marg{glyph2}|\then| -\end{decl} -This tests whether a kern has been set with \meta{glyph1} on the left -and \meta{glyph2} on the right (both arguments are string -expressions). This is almost the negation of -\begin{verbatim} - \ifnumber{\kerning{<glyph1>}{<glyph2>}}={0}\then -\end{verbatim} -but |\ifiskern| can distinguish the case that an zero kern has been -set (true) from the case that no such kern has been set (false), -which |\kerning| can not. It is however unlikely that this -distinction would ever be of use in a practical situation. - -\begin{decl}[v1.924] - |\ifoption|\marg{string}|\then| -\end{decl} -Test whether \meta{string} (a string expression) is among the current -list of options. This list is by default empty, elements are added -using |option| modifiers (cf.~the description of |\installfont|), and -the list is cleared for each new file for which one can specify -options. - -\begin{decl}[v1.909] - |\Else| - |\Fi| -\end{decl} -For \fontinst, these two control sequences are precisely the same as -the \TeX\ primitives |\else| and |\fi|, but things are a bit more -complicated in \fontdoc. The mechanism in \fontdoc\ that allows it to -present both branches of the conditional in the typeset output -requires that |\Else| and |\Fi| generate typeset output. See also the -|\showbranches| \fontdoc command. - -\begin{hackernote} - Before |\Else| and |\Fi| were introduced, the \TeX\ primitives - |\else| and |\fi| were used instead for \fontinst conditionals. - Back then, \fontdoc defined all conditionals to expand to |\iftrue|. - - It used to be the case that all conditionals would be fully - expandable (which in particular would have made it possible to use - them in string expressions), but that is no longer the case. -\end{hackernote} - - - -\begin{decl}[v1.901] - |\for|\parg{name}\marg{start}\marg{stop}\marg{step} - \meta{body} |\endfor|\parg{name} -\end{decl} -will cause the \meta{body} code to be repeated some number of times. -How many depends on the values of \meta{start}, \meta{stop}, and -\meta{step}, which are integer expressions. - -As a precaution, the \meta{body} is not allowed to contain any -empty lines (|\par| tokens). If you want to have the visual -separation (for sakes of legibility or otherwise), put a |%| -somewhere on the line---that makes it nonempty. - -\meta{name} is used as the name of an integer variable. This -variable gets reset to the value of \meta{start} before the first -repetition of \meta{body code}. After each repetition but the last, -it is incremented by \meta{step}. \meta{body} gets repeated if -the value of \meta{name} has not gotten past that of \meta{stop}. To -get past means to be bigger if \meta{step} is positive and to be -smaller if \meta{step} is negative. In the case that \meta{step} is -zero, the entire construction above will be equivalent to -\begin{quote} - |\resetint|\marg{name}\marg{start}\\ - \meta{body} -\end{quote} - -|\for| \textellipsis\ |\endfor| constructions can be nested. -\meta{name} is used by |\for| to identify its matching |\endfor|, so -they need to be identical in |\for| and |\endfor|. \textbf{Note} that -the delimiters around the \meta{name} are parentheses, not braces. - - -\begin{decl}[v1.901] - |\foreach|\parg{name}\marg{csep-list} - \meta{body} |\endfor|\parg{name} -\end{decl} -will cause the \meta{body} code to be repeated one time for each item -in the \meta{csep-list}. \meta{csep-list} is a comma-separated list -of string expressions. - -As a precaution, the \meta{body} is not allowed to contain any -empty lines (|\par| tokens). If you want to have the visual -separation (for sakes of legibility or otherwise), put a |%| -somewhere on the line---that makes it nonempty. - -\meta{name} is used as the name of a string variable. Before each -repetition of the \meta{body code}, this variable will get reset to -the next item in the \meta{csep-list}. - -|\foreach|\textellipsis\ |\endfor| constructions can be nested. -\meta{name} is used by |\foreach| to identify its matching |\endfor|, -so they need to be identical in |\foreach| and |\endfor|. -\textbf{Note} that the delimiters around the \meta{name} are -parentheses, not braces. - - - -\subsection{Other general commands} - -\begin{decl} - |\needsfontinstversion|\arg{version} -\end{decl} -This issues a warning if the current version of the \fontinst -package is less than \m{version}. - -\begin{decl} - |\needsTeXextension|\marg{extension tests}\marg{who}\\ - |\eTeX|\marg{version number}\\ - |\pdfTeX|\marg{version number}\marg{revision} -\end{decl} - -\begin{decl}[v1.915] - |\fontinstcc|\\ - |\normalcc| -\end{decl} -|\fontinstcc| switches to the catcodes used in e.g.\@ -\texttt{fontinst.sty}: |_| and |@| are letters, space and newline are -ignored, and |~| is a space. |\normalcc| switches back to normal -catcodes. - -\begin{decl}[v1.900] - |\begincomment| \meta{text} |\endcomment| -\end{decl} -This hides the \meta{text} from \fontinst processing, but allows it -to show up when the file is typeset with \fontdoc. - -\begin{decl}[v1.906] - |\fontinsterror|\marg{subsystem}\marg{error}\marg{help}\\ - |\fontinstwarning|\marg{subsystem}\marg{warning}\\ - |\fontinstwarningnoline|\marg{subsystem}\marg{warning}\\ - |\fontinstinfo|\marg{subsystem}\marg{info} -\end{decl} - -\begin{decl}[v1.906] - |\messagebreak| -\end{decl} - - -Finally, there are two Plain\TeX\ commands which should be mentioned: -\begin{decl*} - |\input| \meta{file name}\\ - |\bye| -\end{decl*} - - - - - -\section{Encoding files} - -An \emph{encoding file} (or \texttt{.etx} file) is a \TeX\ document -with the structure: -\begin{quote} - |\relax|\\ - \meta{ignored material}\\ - |\encoding|\\ - \meta{encoding commands}\\ - |\endencoding|\\ - \meta{ignored material} -\end{quote} -This describes the encoding of a font, using the \m{encoding commands}. - -Since the encoding file ignores any material between \verb|\relax| and -\verb|\encoding|, an \emph{encoding file} can also be a \LaTeX\ -document. The structure is then -\begin{quote} - |\relax|\\ - |\documentclass{article} %| Or some other class\\ - |\usepackage{fontdoc}|\\ - \meta{\LaTeX\ preamble}\\ - |\begin{document}|\\ - \meta{\LaTeX\ text}\\ - |\encoding|\\ - \m{encoding commands}\\ - |\endencoding|\\ - \meta{\LaTeX\ text}\\ - |\end{document}| -\end{quote} - - -See also the descriptions in \emph{Writing ETX format font encoding -specifications} (\texttt{encspecs.tex}). - - -\subsection{Encoding commands} - -The \m{encoding commands} are: - -\begin{decl} - |\nextslot|\arg{integer expression} -\end{decl} -Sets the number of the next slot. If there is no \verb|\nextslot| -command, the number is the successor of the previous slot. - -\begin{decl}[v1.8] - |\skipslots|\arg{integer expressions} -\end{decl} -Advances the number of the next slot. - -\begin{decl} - |\setslot|\arg{glyph} \m{slot commands} |\endsetslot| -\end{decl} -Assigns \m{glyph} to the current slot. The \m{slot commands} can be -used to specify additional behaviour for the slot, and typically also -contains comments about the glyph. - -\begin{decl}[v1.9] - |\setleftboundary|\marg{glyph} \m{slot commands} - |\endsetleftboundary| -\end{decl} -Makes the beginning of a word (left boundary) behave like the right -side of \m{glyph} with respect to kerning. |\ligature| commands in -the \meta{slot commands} create beginning of word ligatures. - -\begin{decl}[v1.9] - |\setrightboundary|\marg{glyph} -\end{decl} -Makes the end of a word (right boundary) behave like the left -side of \m{glyph} with respect to kerning and ligatures. The current -slot position is left empty. - -\begin{decl} - |\inputetx|\arg{file} -\end{decl} -Inputs the \m{encoding commands} of \m{file}\texttt{.etx}. - -\begin{decl}[v1.917] - |\setfontdimen|\marg{fontdimen no.}\marg{integer variable} -\end{decl} -Sets up a correspondence between a font dimension and an integer -variable. When generating a font, the font dimension value is taken -from the integer variable. When converting a font from \pl or \vpl -format, the fontdimen value will be recorded as a |\setint| command -for the variable. - -\begin{decl}[v1.924] - |\ifdirect| -\end{decl} -Encoding files set up a correspondence between slot numbers and glyph -names, which can be used in two different ways. In the \emph{direct} -mode, encoding files map slot numbers to glyph names. In the -\emph{inverse} mode, glyph names are mapped to slot numbers. The -inverse mapping can in general be one-to-many, and when precisely one -target slot is needed \fontinst chooses that arbitrarily. The |\ifdirect| -conditional can be used to disambiguate the inverse mapping, by -conditionalising all undesired |\setslot|s on that the file is being -interpreted in the direct mode. - -Currently the only case in which encoding files are being read in -the inverse mode is when reencoding fonts. - -\begin{decl}[v1.8] - |\setslotcomment|\marg{text}\\ - |\resetslotcomment|\marg{text}\\ - |\unsetslotcomment| -\end{decl} -These commands can be used to specify an automatic |\comment| text -for all slots. They are ignored by \fontinst, but interpreted by -\fontdoc. - -\begin{decl}[v1.8] - |\useexamplefont|\marg{font} -\end{decl} -This command is ignored by \fontinst. In \fontdoc it sets the font -that is used by the |\slotexample| command. The \meta{font} argument -has the same syntax for a font as the \TeX\ primitive |\font|. - - - - -\subsection{Slot commands} - -The \m{slot commands} are: - -\begin{decl} - |\comment|\arg{text} -\end{decl} -A comment, which is ignored by \fontinst, but typeset as a separate -paragraph by \fontdoc. - -\begin{decl}[v1.917] - |\label|\arg{text} -\end{decl} -A reference label, which records the slot number and glyph name. -Ignored by \fontinst. - -\begin{decl} - |\ligature|\arg{ligtype}\arg{glyph}\arg{glyph} -\end{decl} -|\ligature| declares a ligature of type \m{ligtype} from the current -glyph followed by the first glyph to the second glyph. The \m{ligtype}s -are as in \vpl files (see the \texttt{vptovf} Web source for more -details). For example: -\begin{verbatim} - \setslot{ff} - \ligature{LIG}{i}{ffi} - \ligature{LIG}{l}{ffl} - \comment{The `ff' ligature.} - \endsetslot -\end{verbatim} -\begin{decl*}[v1.918] - |\Ligature|\arg{ligtype}\arg{glyph}\arg{glyph}\\ - |\oddligature|\marg{note}\arg{ligtype}\arg{glyph}\arg{glyph} -\end{decl*} -The |\Ligature| command is by default a synonym of |\ligature| (but -\fontdoc may typeset them differently). The |\oddligature| command is -by default ignored by \fontinst. See \setfilename{encspecs.tex} for -an explanation of the semantic differences. - -\begin{decl} - |\makerightboundary|\arg{glyph} -\end{decl} -This makes the current slot the end of word (right boundary) marker -with respect to ligatures and kerning, i.e., \TeX\ will kern and -ligature as if there was an invisible occurrence of this character -after the last character of every word. All kerns and ligatures with -\meta{glyph} as the right part will apply for this slot. - -It is preferable to use |\setrightboundary| to control end of word -behaviour if you have an empty slot to spare. - -\begin{decl} - |\Unicode|\marg{code point}\marg{name}\\ - |\charseq|\marg{\cs{Unicode} commands} -\end{decl} -These commands declare a Unicode character or character sequence as -possible interpretations of what is in this slot. They are ignored -when making fonts, but \fontdoc give them a prominent role in -encoding specifications and to |\etxtocmap| they are the primary -properties of the slot. - -\begin{decl}[Obsolete?!] - |\usedas|\arg{type}\arg{control sequence} -\end{decl} -This command declares a \TeX\ control sequence for this slot, with -the \emph{type} taken from: -\begin{verbatim} - char accent mathord - mathbin mathrel mathopen - mathclose mathpunct mathvariable - mathaccent mathdelim -\end{verbatim} -There is currently no code in \fontinst which makes any use of this -command. - -\begin{decl} - |\nextlarger|\arg{glyph} -\end{decl} -Sets a \textsc{nextlarger} entry from the current slot to the -\m{glyph}. - -\begin{decl} - |\varchar| - \m{varchar commands} - |\endvarchar| -\end{decl} -Sets a \textsc{varchar} entry for the current slot, using the -\m{varchar commands}. The \m{varchar commands} are: -\begin{decl} - |\vartop|\arg{glyph}\\ - |\varmid|\arg{glyph}\\ - |\varbot|\arg{glyph}\\ - |\varrep|\arg{glyph} -\end{decl} -Sets the top, middle, bottom, or repeated \m{glyph} of the -\textsc{varchar}. - - -\subsection{Other} - -The following commands belong to this section, but there is currently -no description of them here. - -|\ifisinslot|\marg{glyph}\marg{slot}|\then| - - - - -\section{Metric files} -\label{Sec:Metric} - - -A \emph{metric file} (or \mtx file) is a \TeX\ document with the -structure: -\begin{quote} - |\relax|\\ - \emph{ignored material}\\ - |\metrics|\\ - \m{metric commands}\\ - |\endmetrics|\\ - \emph{ignored material} -\end{quote} -This describes the glyphs in a font, using the \m{metric commands}. -Like encoding files, metric files can simultaneously be \LaTeX\ -documents. - -Metric files are usually either \emph{hand-crafted} or -\emph{transformable}. The transformable metric files typically encode -the metrics of one particular font and are automatically generated. -Hand-crafted metric files (such as \setfilename{latin.mtx}) typically -do not contain much explicit metric data, instead the code there makes -use of metrics previously specified by other files to construct new -glyphs or adjust metrics to meet special conditions. Whereas -transformable metric files tend to be mere lists of metric data, the -hand-crafted metric files are more like programs. - - -\subsection{Metric commands} - -The \m{metric commands} are as follows. All glyph name arguments are -string expressions. - -\begin{decl} - |\setglyph|\arg{name} \m{glyph commands} |\endsetglyph| -\end{decl} -If the glyph called \m{name} is undefined, it is built using the -\m{glyph commands} given below, for example: -\begin{verbatim} - \setglyph{IJ} - \glyph{I}{1000} - \glyph{J}{1000} - \endsetglyph - \setglyph{Asmall} - \glyph{A}{850} - \endsetglyph -\end{verbatim} -The \meta{glyph commands} are not executed if the glyph has already -been set. - -\begin{decl} - |\resetglyph|\arg{name} - \m{glyph commands} - |\endresetglyph| -\end{decl} -Gives the definition of the glyph called \m{name} using the -\m{glyph commands}. - -\begin{decl} - |\unsetglyph|\arg{name} -\end{decl} -Makes the glyph called \m{name} undefined. - -\begin{decl} - |\setrawglyph|\arg{name}\arg{font}\arg{dimen}\arg{slot}\\ - \hspace*{1.5em}\arg{width}\arg{height}\arg{depth}\arg{italic - correction}\\ - |\setscaledrawglyph|% - \arg{name}\arg{font}\arg{dimen}\arg{scale}\arg{slot}\\ - \hspace*{1.5em}\arg{width}\arg{height}\arg{depth}\arg{italic - correction} -\end{decl} -This sets a glyph called \m{name} from the \m{font}, which has the -given design size, slot, width, height, depth and italic correction. -The \meta{scale} is a scaling factor which has been applied to the -font to give it the specified metrics. These commands will usually be -generated automatically from an \afm or \pl file. - -If the integer variable \texttt{rawscale} is set, another scaling by -that amount will be applied to the glyph. - -\begin{decl} - |\setnotglyph|\arg{name}\arg{font}\arg{dimen}\arg{slot}\\ - \hspace*{1.5em}\arg{width}\arg{height}\arg{depth}\arg{italic - correction}\\ - |\setscalednotglyph|% - \arg{name}\arg{font}\arg{dimen}\arg{scale}\arg{slot}\\ - \hspace*{1.5em}\arg{width}\arg{height}\arg{depth}\arg{italic - correction} -\end{decl} -These sets a glyph called \m{name}\texttt{-not}, which is present in -the \m{font}, but is not in the default encoding. They take the same -arguments as |\setrawglyph| and |\setscaledrawglyph| respectively, -although the slot will normally be $-1$. This command will usually -be generated automatically from an \afm file. - -Reencoding a font can turn |\setrawglyph| commands into -|\setnotglyph| commands and vice versa. - -\begin{decl} - |\inputmtx|\arg{file} -\end{decl} -Inputs the \m{metric commands} of \m{file}\texttt{.mtx}. - -\begin{decl}[v1.9] - |\usemtxpackage|\marg{package~list}\\ - |\ProvidesMtxPackage|\marg{package~name} -\end{decl} - - -\subsection{Glyph commands} - -The \m{glyph commands} add material to the glyph currently being -constructed in a |\setglyph| \dots\ |\endsetglyph| or -|\resetglyph| \dots\ |\endresetglyph|. They are: - -\begin{decl} - |\glyph|\arg{glyph}\arg{integer expression} -\end{decl} -Sets the named glyph \m{glyph} at the given scale, with 1000 as the -natural size. This: -\begin{itemize} - \item - Advances the current glyph width. - \item - Sets the current glyph height to be at least the height of the - named glyph, adjusted for the current vertical offset. - \item - Sets the current glyph depth to be at least the depth of the - named glyph, adjusted for the current vertical offset. - \item - Sets the current glyph italic correction to be the same as the - set glyph. -\end{itemize} -The named glyph must have already been defined, otherwise an error -will occur. For example: -\begin{verbatim} - \setglyph{fi} - \glyph{f}{1000} - \glyph{i}{1000} - \endsetglyph -\end{verbatim} - -\begin{decl} - |\glyphrule|\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression} -\end{decl} -Sets a rule of the given width and height, for example: -\begin{verbatim} - \setglyph{underline} - \glyphrule{333}{40} - \endsetglyph -\end{verbatim} - -\begin{decl} - |\glyphspecial|\arg{string expression} -\end{decl} -Sets a driver-dependent \verb|\special|, for example: -\begin{verbatim} - \setglyph{crest} - \glyphspecial{Filename: crest.eps} - \endsetglyph -\end{verbatim} - -\begin{decl} - |\glyphwarning|\arg{string expression} -\end{decl} -Sets a warning \verb|\special|, and produces a warning message each -time the glyph is used, for example: -\begin{verbatim} - \setglyph{missingglyph} - \glyphrule{500}{500} - \glyphwarning{Missing glyph `missingglyph'} - \endsetglyph -\end{verbatim} - -\begin{decl} - |\movert|\arg{integer expression} -\end{decl} -Moves right by the given amount, and advances the current glyph width, -for example: -\begin{verbatim} - \setglyph{Asmall} - \movert{50} - \glyph{A}{700} - \movert{50} - \endsetglyph -\end{verbatim} - -\begin{decl} - |\moveup|\arg{integer expression} -\end{decl} -Moves up by the given amount, and advances the current vertical -offset. Each glyph should always end at vertical offset zero, for -example: -\begin{verbatim} - \setglyph{onehalf} - \moveup{500} - \glyph{one}{700} - \moveup{-500} - \glyph{slash}{1000} - \moveup{-200} - \glyph{two}{700} - \moveup{200} - \endsetglyph -\end{verbatim} - -\begin{decl} - |\push| \m{glyph commands} |\pop| -\end{decl} -Performs the \m{glyph commands}, but at the |\pop| the current -position and glyph width are restored to what they were at the |\push|, -for example: -\begin{verbatim} - \setglyph{aacute} - \push - \movert{\half{\sub{\width{a}}{\width{acute}}}} - \glyph{acute}{1000} - \pop - \glyph{a}{1000} - \endsetglyph -\end{verbatim} - -\begin{decl} - |\glyphpcc|\arg{glyph}\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression} -\end{decl} -This is generated from \texttt{PCC} instructions in an \afm file, and -is syntactic sugar for: -\begin{quote} - \small - |\push|\\ - |\movert|\arg{first integer expression}\\ - |\moveup|\arg{second integer expression}\\ - |\glyph|\arg{glyph}|{1000}|\\ - |\pop| -\end{quote} - -\begin{decl} - |\resetwidth|\arg{integer expression}\\ - |\resetheight|\arg{integer expression}\\ - |\resetdepth|\arg{integer expression}\\ - |\resetitalic|\arg{integer expression} -\end{decl} -Sets the width, height, depth, or italic correction of the current -glyph. - -\begin{decl} - |\samesize|\arg{glyph} -\end{decl} -Sets the dimensions of the current glyph to be the same as \m{glyph}. - -Inside the definition of \m{glyph}, you can use expressions such as -|\width|\arg{glyph}, which will refer to the glyph defined so far. -For example, a display summation sign can be defined to be a text -summation $\sum$ scaled 120\% with 0.5\,pt extra height and depth -using: -\begin{verbatim} - \setglyph{summationdisplay} - \glyph{summationtext}{1200} - \resetheight{\add{\height{summationdisplay}}{50}} - \resetdepth{\add{\depth{summationdisplay}}{50}} - \endsetglyph -\end{verbatim} -Within a |\resetglyph|, these expressions will refer to the previous -definition of the glyph. For example, you can add sidebearings to the -letter `A' with: -\begin{verbatim} - \resetglyph{A} - \movert{25} - \glyph{A}{1000} - \movert{25} - \endresetglyph -\end{verbatim} - - -\subsection{Kerning commands} - -The kerning commands may be used anywhere in a metrics file. - -\begin{decl} - |\setkern|\arg{glyph}\arg{glyph}\arg{integer expression} -\end{decl} -This sets a kern between the two glyphs, scaled by the current -value of \texttt{rawscale}, unless such a kern already has been set. - -\begin{decl}[v1.9] - |\resetkern|\arg{glyph}\arg{glyph}\arg{integer expression} -\end{decl} -|\resetkern| unconditionally sets a kern between the two glyphs, -scaled by the current value of \texttt{rawscale}. - -\begin{decl} - |\setleftkerning|\arg{glyph}\arg{glyph}\arg{integer expression}\\ - |\setrightkerning|\arg{glyph}\arg{glyph}\arg{integer expression} -\end{decl} -Sets the amount by which the first glyph should mimic how the second -glyph kerns on the left or right, for example: -\begin{verbatim} - \setleftkerning{Asmall}{A}{850} - \setrightkerning{Asmall}{A}{850} - \setleftkerning{IJ}{I}{1000} - \setrightkerning{IJ}{J}{1000} -\end{verbatim} -The commands work by copying kerning pairs containing the first glyph. -As the names indicates, these commands do not override kerning pairs -previously set. - -\begin{decl}[v1.8] - |\setleftrightkerning|\arg{glyph}\arg{glyph}\arg{integer expression} -\end{decl} -Sets the amount by which the first glyph should mimic how the second -glyph kerns on both sides, for example: -\begin{verbatim} - \setleftrightkerning{Asmall}{A}{850} -\end{verbatim} -This command is equivalent to doing first a |\setleftkerning| and -then a |\setrightkerning|. - -\begin{decl}[v1.906] - |\noleftkerning|\arg{glyph}\\ - |\norightkerning|\arg{glyph}\\ - |\noleftrightkerning|\arg{glyph} -\end{decl} -Removes all kerning on the specified side(s) of the \meta{glyph}. - -\begin{decl}[v1.9] - |\unsetkerns|\marg{left~glyph~list}\marg{right~glyph~list} -\end{decl} -Removes all kerns with one glyph in the \meta{left glyph list} on the -left and one glyph in the \meta{right glyph list} on the right. - - - -\subsection{Other} - -\begin{decl}[v1.915] - |\aliased|\marg{font's name}\marg{alias name} -\end{decl} -This command is meant to be used in glyph name arguments of commands -one may find in metric files. It was added to support combining -mapfile entry generation with a custom form of reglyphing that has -been developed for the \texttt{T2} bundle (Cyrillic font support). -This does however not necessarily mean that the \texttt{T2} bundle -has been updated to take advantage of this feature. - -The basic problem is that cyrillic fonts display a much greater -variation in how the glyphs are named than latin fonts do.% -\footnote{The Adobe guidelines have not been as prevailing here as -in the latin range, but this isn't entirely surprising when they -give suggestions such as using the name \texttt{afii10018} for -\texttt{U+0411} (\textsc{cyrillic capital letter be}), even though -there is a good reason: AFII is a glyph registry.} -This complicates writing files similar to \setfilename{latin.mtx}, so -the author of the \texttt{T2} bundle took the route to regularize the -glyph names at the \afm to \mtx conversion step. Since \TeX\ does not -know anything about glyph names, this makes no difference for the -virtual fonts that are built. -The glyph names do however make a difference for base fonts that are -reencoded, since \PS encoding vectors list explicit glyph names that -have to be the same as in the font. \Fontinst's choice of encoding -vector for a mapfile entry is based on which \etx file was used in the -reencoding, and hence the glyph names used when reencoding must match -those actually used in the font, or problems will follow. - -The |\aliased| command can be used to preserve the information -necessary for such reencodings. If a glyph name is specified as for -example -\begin{verbatim} - \aliased{afii10018}{CYRB} -\end{verbatim} -then \fontinst will behave as if the glyph name is \texttt{CYRB} -(i.e., the \meta{alias name}) for all purposes \emph{except} -reencoding, where instead \fontinst behaves as if the glyph name is -the \meta{font's name} \texttt{afii10018}. This makes it possible to -use \etx files when reencoding which can be correctly translated to -the right encoding vectors. - - - -\section{\textsf{fontdoc} commands} - -The following commands are defined by \fontdoc but are unknown to -\fontinst. - - -\subsection{Comment commands} - -\begin{decl} - |\plaindiv|\\ - |\plainint|\\ - |\plainmax|\\ - |\plainmin|\\ - |\plainneg| -\end{decl} -These are the \LaTeX\ definitions of |\div|, |\int|, |\max|, |\min|, -and |\neg| respectively. They are provided under these names because -\fontinst uses the normal names for integer expression constructions. - -\begin{decl}[v1.8] - |\slotexample| -\end{decl} -This typesets the character in the current slot from the example font -(cf.~|\useexamplefont|). - -\begin{decl}[v1.916] - |\macroparameter|\marg{digit} -\end{decl} -This can be used in integer and string expressions. It typesets as -\textit{\#n}, where `\textit{n}' is the \meta{digit}. - -\begin{decl}[v1.918] - |\textunicode|\marg{code point}\marg{name} -\end{decl} -This generates a reference to a particular Unicode character, for use -within a |\comment| or similar. - - -\subsection{Style control commands} - -\begin{decl}[v1.909] - |\showbranches| -\end{decl} -The is the main switch that turns on displaying both branches of -\fontinst conditionals. If you use this command in an encoding or -metrics file, you \textbf{must} use |\Else| and |\Fi| to delimit the -conditionals in that file. If you do not use this command in an -encoding or metrics file, then the conditionals will not generate any -typeset material and neither will their \meta{else branch}es. - - - - -\section{\fontinst variables} - -The following is a list of the \fontinst variables that are -accessible for the user through the |\set|\textellipsis, -|\reset|\textellipsis, |\unset|\textellipsis, etc.\ commands. You may -of course set or use other variables in the MTX and ETX files you -write yourself, as does for example the standard MTX file -\texttt{latin.mtx}, but all variables that \fontinst commands -implicitly use or set are listed below. - -\begin{list}{}{% - \setlength\labelwidth{0pt}% - \setlength\itemindent{-\leftmargin}% - \setlength\parsep{0pt} - \def\makelabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \normalfont\ttfamily #1}% -} - \item[acccapheight] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The height of accented full capitals. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[address] (string) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Snailmail address put in \BibTeX-style file - header of automatically generated ENC files. No - \texttt{address} field is written unless the \texttt{address} - string is set. Quotes are not automatically inserted around - the \texttt{address} string. - \item[Set by] ETX files. - \item[Used by] The ETX-to-ENC converter. - \end{smalldes} - \item[afm-name] (string) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Name of source font. Internal variable. - \item[Set by] |\from|\dots\ commands. - \item[Used by] The |\transform|\-|font|, |\install|\-|font|, - |\install|\-|raw|\-|font|, and |\reglyph|\-|font| commands. - \end{smalldes} - \item[ascender] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The ascender height of the font. - \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX converter usually writes - |\setint| commands for this integer. - \item[Used by] Some MTX and ETX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[author] (string) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Author name(s) put in \BibTeX-style file - header of automatically generated ENC files. See the macro - |\ref_to_sourcefile| for more details. - \item[Set by] ETX files. - \item[Used by] The ETX-to-ENC converter. When not set, the - value \texttt{"See file }\meta{etx name}\texttt{"} is used - instead. - \end{smalldes} - \item[\cs{autoinstallfamily}] (command) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Command called by the font installation - commands, as - \begin{quote} - |\autoinstallfamily|\marg{encoding}\marg{family} - \end{quote} - when they are asked to install a font with a combination of - \meta{encoding} and \meta{family} that has not been seen - before (there was no explicit |\installfamily|). - \item[Set by] Explicit commands. Defaults to calling - |\installfamily|. - \item[Used by] Font installation commands. - \end{smalldes} - \item[axisheight] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{22}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[baselineskip] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] - The font designer's recommendation for natural length of the - \TeX\ parameter |\baselineskip|. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[bigopspacing1] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\xi\sb{9}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[bigopspacing2] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\xi\sb{10}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[bigopspacing3] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\xi\sb{11}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[bigopspacing4] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\xi\sb{12}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[bigopspacing5] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\xi\sb{13}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[capheight] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The height of the font's full capitals. - \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX converter usually writes - |\setint| commands for this variable. - \item[Used by] Some MTX and ETX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[cmapname] (string) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The name given to the CMap generated from - an ETX file. - \item[Set by] ETX files. - \item[Used by] The ETX-to-CMap converter. When not set, the - value |fontinst-|\nolinebreak[1]\meta{cmap file name} is - used instead. - \end{smalldes} - \item[codingscheme] (string) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The codingscheme name. - \item[Set by] ETX files. - \item[Used by] The (V)PL writer. When not set, the - value \texttt{UNKNOWN} is used instead. - \end{smalldes} - \item[defaultrulethickness] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\xi\sb{8}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[delim1] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{20}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[delim2] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{21}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[denom1] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{11}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[denom2] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{12}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[descender] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The depth of lower case letters with descenders. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[descender\_neg] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The vertical position of the descender line - of the font, i.e., the negative of the font's descender depth. - \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX converter usually writes - |\setint| commands for this variable. - \item[Used by] Some MTX and ETX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[designsize] (dimension) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The design size of the font. - \item[Set by] MTX files. The (V)PL-to-MTX converter usually writes - |\setdim| commands for this variable. - \item[Used by] The (V)PL writer. The design size defaults to - $10\,\mathrm{pt}$ if this variable is not set. - \item[Note] The value of this variable has no effect on how - the font is declared to \LaTeX. - \end{smalldes} - \item[designunits] (dimension denoting a real number) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The design size of a font expressed in the - design unit used in a (V)PL file. - \item[Set by] MTX files. The (V)PL-to-MTX converter usually writes - |\setdim| commands for this variable. - \item[Used by] Nothing. If this variable is set, but to any - value other than $1\,\mathrm{pt}$, then some metrics are most - likely wrong. - \end{smalldes} - \item[digitwidth] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The median width of the digits in the font. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[email] (string) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Email address put in \BibTeX-style file - header of automatically generated ENC files. See the macro - |\ref_to_sourcefile| for more details. - \item[Set by] ETX files. - \item[Used by] The ETX-to-ENC converter. When not set, the - value \texttt{"See file }\meta{etx name}\texttt{"} is used - instead. - \end{smalldes} - \item[encodingname] (string) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The name by which the encoding in question is - made known to a Postscript interpreter. - \item[Set by] ETX files. - \item[Used by] The ETX-to-ENC converter. When not set, the - value |fontinst-|\nolinebreak[1]|autoenc-|\nolinebreak[1]% - \meta{etx name} is used instead. - \end{smalldes} - \item[etx-name] (string) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Name of ETX file. Internal variable in - |\transform|\-|font|. - \item[Set by] The |\reencodefont| command. - \item[Used by] The |\mtxtomtx| command. - \end{smalldes} - \item[extraspace] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] - The natural width of extra interword glue at the end of a - sentence. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[fontdimen($n$)] (integer) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Family of semi-internal variables that store - the values to use for font dimension $n$. It is preferred - that the newer |\set|\-|font|\-|dimen| interface is used for - setting these values. - \item[Set by] ETX files. - \item[Used by] The (V)PL writer. - \end{smalldes} - \item[\cs{iftokeep}] (macro) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] |\iftokeep|\,\#1\,|\then|, where \#1 will - be a \meta{number}, behaves like a switch and decides whether - a glyph is kept or not while reglyphing. - \item[Set by] Explicit commands. Defaults to - $$ - \mbox{\cs{iftokeep}\,\#1\,\cs{then}} \mapsto - \mbox{\cs{ifnum}\,\texttt{-1<}\#1} - $$ - \item[Used by] The |\reglyphfont| command. - \end{smalldes} - \item[interword] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The natural width of interword glue (spaces). - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[italicslant] (integer denoting factor) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The italic slant of a font. - \item[Set by] MTX files generated from AFM or (V)PL files. MTX - files generated by |\transformfont|. Locally in the AFM-to-MTX - converter for possible use in |\uprightitalcorr| or - |\slanteditalcorr|. - \item[Used by] MTX files (\texttt{latin.mtx} and the like). ETX - files (for determining \texttt{fontdimen(1)}). - \end{smalldes} - \item[killweight] (integer) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Weight for glyphs that are killed. - \item[Set by] Explicit commands. Defaults to $-10$ if not set. - \item[Used by] The |\kill|\-|glyph| command; indirectly - the |\reglyphfont| command. - \end{smalldes} - \item[letterspacing] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Extra width added to all glyphs of a font. - \item[Set by] ETX or MTX files. - \item[Used by] The (V)PL writer. Defaults to $0$ if not set. - \end{smalldes} - \item[maxdepth] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The maximal depth over all slots in the font. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[maxdepth\_neg] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The negative of the maximal depth of a glyph in - the font. - \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX converter usually writes - |\setint| commands for this variable. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[maxheight] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The maximal height of a glyph in the font. - \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX converter usually writes - |\setint| commands for this variable. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[minimumkern] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Kerns whose size in absolute value is less - than or equal to this variable are ignored. - \item[Set by] Command files or MTX files. - \item[Used by] The AFM-to-MTX converter and the (V)PL file - generator. When not set, the value $0$ is used instead. - \end{smalldes} - \item[monowidth] (flag integer) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Set if this font is monowidth, unset otherwise. - \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX converter writes a - |\setint| command for this variable if the AFM specifies - \texttt{IsFixedPitch true}. - \item[Used by] Some MTX files (\texttt{latin.mtx} and the like), - ETX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[num1] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{8}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[num2] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{9}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[num3] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{10}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[quad] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] - The quad width of the font, normally approximately equal to - the font size and\slash or the width of an `M'. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[PSfontsuffix] (string) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Suffix added to font names to form name of - file to download to include font. - \item[Set by] Explicit commands in mapmaking command - files. Defaults to `\texttt{.pfa}'. - \item[Used by] The map file fragments writer. - \end{smalldes} - \item[rawscale] (integer denoting factor) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Scaling factor applied to raw glyphs. - \item[Set by] The |\installfont| command (\texttt{scaled} - clauses in argument \#2). Unset for metric files listed - without a \texttt{scaled} clause. - \item[Used by] The |\set|\-|raw|\-|glyph|, - |\set|\-|not|\-|glyph|, |\set|\-|scaled|\-|raw|\-|glyph|, - |\set|\-|scaled|\-|not|\-|glyph|, |\set|\-|kern|, and - |\reset|\-|kern| commands. - \end{smalldes} - \item[renameweight] (integer) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Weight for glyphs that are renamed. - \item[Set by] Explicit commands. Defaults to $1$ if not set. - \item[Used by] The |\rename|\-|glyph| command; indirectly - the |\reglyphfont| command. - \end{smalldes} - \item[requireglyphs] (flag integer) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Set if warnings are to be generated for - glyphs listed in ETX files but not present in the glyph - base. - \item[Set by] Explicit commands. By default not set. - \item[Used by] The (V)PL file generator. - \end{smalldes} - \item[rightboundary] (string) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The name of a glyph with the property that - kerns on the left may be intended as right word boundary kerns. - \item[Set by] MTX files. The (V)PL-to-MTX converter can write - |\setstr| commands for this variable. - \item[Used by] Some MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[shrinkword] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] - The (finite) shrink component of interword glue. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[slant-scale] (integer denoting factor) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Factor to slant by. - Internal variable in |\transform|\-|font|. - \item[Set by] The |\slant|\-|font|, |\xscale|\-|font|, and - |\scale|\-|font| commands. - \item[Used by] The |\mtxtomtx| command. - \end{smalldes} - \item[\cs{SlantAmount}] (macro expanding to an integer expression) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Slant factor used for faking oblique shape. - \item[Set by] Explicit commands. Defaults to \texttt{167}. - \item[Used by] The |\latinfamily| command. - \end{smalldes} - \item[\cs{slanteditalcorr}] - (macro expanding to an integer expression) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The integer expression used to calculate a - guess for the italic correction of glyphs in a font with - positive slant. It has the syntax - \begin{quote} - \cs{slanteditalcorr}\marg{width}\marg{left}\marg{right}% - \marg{bottom}\marg{top} - \end{quote} - where \meta{width} is the glyph's advance width, and the - remaining arguments are coordinates of sides of the glyph's - bounding box. The \texttt{italicslant} integer provides the - italic slant of the font. - \item[Set by] Explicit commands in \textsf{fontinst} command - files. Defaults to - $$ - \max\{0, \mathit{right}-\mathit{width}\}. - $$ - \item[Used by] The AFM-to-MTX converter. - \end{smalldes} - \item[stretchword] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] - The (finite) stretch component of interword glue. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[sub1] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{16}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[sub2] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{17}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[subdrop] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{19}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[sup1] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{13}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[sup2] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{14}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[sup3] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{15}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[supdrop] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{18}$. - \item[Set by] MTX files. - \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files. - \end{smalldes} - \item[TFMfileprefix] (string) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Prefix (typically a path) added to names of - TFM files. - \item[Set by] Explicit commands in mapmaking command - files. By default not set, which is equivalent to being empty. - \item[Used by] The \textsf{PLtoTF} ``map file fragments writer''. - \end{smalldes} - \item[underlinethickness] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The recommended thickness of an underlining - rule. - \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX converter usually writes - |\setint| commands for this variable. - \item[Used by] Some MTX files (\texttt{latin.mtx} and the like). - \end{smalldes} - \item[\cs{uprightitalcorr}] - (macro expanding to an integer expression) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The integer expression used to calculate a - guess for the italic correction of glyphs in a font with - non-positive slant. It has the syntax - \begin{quote} - \cs{uprightitalcorr}\marg{width}\marg{left}\marg{right}% - \marg{bottom}\marg{top} - \end{quote} - where \meta{width} is the glyph's advance width, and the - remaining arguments are coordinates of sides of the glyph's - bounding box. The \texttt{italicslant} integer provides the - italic slant of the font. - \item[Set by] Explicit commands in \textsf{fontinst} command - files. Defaults to $0$. - \item[Used by] The AFM-to-MTX converter. - \end{smalldes} - \item[version] (string) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Version number put in \BibTeX-style file - header of automatically generated ENC files. See the macro - |\ref_to_sourcefile| for more details. - \item[Set by] ETX files. - \item[Used by] The ETX-to-ENC converter. When not set, the - value \texttt{"See file }\meta{etx name}\texttt{"} is used - instead. - \end{smalldes} - \item[verticalstem] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The dominant width of vertical stems - (usually the width of stems of lower case letters). - \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX converter writes - |\setint| commands for this variable if the AFM file specifies - \texttt{StdVW}. - \item[Used by] Currently nothing. - \end{smalldes} - \item[\texttt{warningspecials}] (switch) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Controls whether |\glyphwarning| commands - will generate VPL \texttt{SPECIAL}s. Defaults to `true'. - \item[Set by] Explicit commands (|\warningspecialstrue| and - |\warningspecialsfalse|). - \item[Used by] The (V)PL file generator. - \end{smalldes} - \item[x-scale] (integer denoting factor) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Horizontal scaling factor. - Internal variable in |\transform|\-|font|. - \item[Set by] The |\xscale|\-|font| and |\scale|\-|font| commands. - \item[Used by] The |\mtxtomtx| command. - \end{smalldes} - \item[xheight] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] The x-height of the font. - \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX and (V)PL-to-MTX - converters usually write |\setint| commands for this variable. - \item[Used by] MTX files, and ETX files (for determining - \texttt{fontdimen(5)}). - \end{smalldes} - \item[y-scale] (integer denoting factor) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Vertical scaling factor. - Internal variable in |\transform|\-|font|. - \item[Set by] The |\yscale|\-|font| and |\scale|\-|font| commands. - \item[Used by] The |\mtxtomtx| command. - \end{smalldes} - \item[\meta{\rmfamily glyph}-spacing] (integer denoting length) - \begin{smalldes} - \item[Description] Glyph-specific override for - \texttt{letterspacing}; extra width added to the glyph - \meta{glyph} as part of the process of writing a VPL - file. - \item[Set by] ETX or MTX files. - \item[Used by] The (V)PL writer. Defaults to $0$ if not set. - \end{smalldes} -\end{list} -Besides these, the |\latinfamily| command provides a whole range of -parameters (|\latin_weights|, |\latin_widths|, |\latin_shapes|, etc.) -that are often used somewhat like variables. That subject -does however deserve to be treated separately. - - - -\section{Customisation} - -The \fontinst package reads a file \texttt{fontinst.rc} if it -exists. This can contain your own customisations. The catcodes that -are in force when this file is read are the same as those selected by -|\fontinstcc|. - -Similarly \texttt{finstmsc.sty} reads \texttt{finstmsc.rc} and the -\fontdoc package reads \texttt{fontdoc.cfg}. - -You can create a \texttt{fontinst} format by running ini\TeX{} on -\texttt{fontinst.sty} then saying \verb|\dump|. - - -\section{Notes on features new with v\,1.9} - -The following notes are copied from \texttt{fisource.tex}; they were -written to explain new \fontinst features to old \fontinst users. - - -\subsection{Metric packages} - -\Fontinst has traditionally come with a collection of MTX -files that complement the MTX files generated from base font metrics, -in that they build glyphs that may be missing from the base fonts or -in some other way needs to be improved. The most well-known of these -is the \texttt{latin.mtx} file; other examples include -\texttt{textcomp.mtx}, \texttt{mathit.mtx}, and \texttt{latinsc.mtx}. -A problem with these is however that they cannot produce optimal -results for all fonts simply because there are irregular differences -in how fonts are set up by the foundries. Most glyphs come out all right, -but there are usually a few for which the parameters used are more or -less wrong. Therefore most high quality font installations are made -with modified versions of these files, where the parameters have been -tuned to the specific font design. - -Modifying in particular \texttt{latin.mtx} is however not an entirely -easy task, because this is a rather large file (with plenty of -archaic pieces of code in curious places). Doing it once is no big -problem, but if one has to do it several times (maybe because some -errors are discovered in the original \texttt{latin.mtx}) then it is -probably no fun anymore. Furthermore, if one has two or three -modified copies of this file because one has made high quality -installations of that many different fonts then even a trivial bugfix -might start to feel like entirely too much work. - -If one has to make modifications then it is usually easier to deal -with several small files (many of which can be used unchanged) than -one big file. Thus it would be better if these big files were split up -into several smaller ones. -The main problem with splitting up something like \texttt{latin.mtx} -is that there are some commands which are defined at the top and -which are then used in almost all sections of the file. One must make -certain that these commands are always loaded, which makes the metric -files somewhat harder to use (especially if the one who tries to use -them is not the one who wrote them). - -One strategy is to include all definitions needed for a metric file in -it. This has the slight disadvantage that the commands will have to be -defined several times. What is worse however, is that the command -definitions will appear in several files, so if one finds a bug in one -of them, one cannot simply correct this bug in one place. As the number -of files can soon become quite large, correcting such bugs can become -a boring procedure indeed. - -Another strategy is to put all the command definitions in one file -and then explicitly include it in the \meta{file-list} argument of -|\installfont|. This eliminates the repeated bug fixing problem, but -requires the user to do something that the computer can actually do -just as well. - -A third strategy is to put the command definitions in one or several -files and then in each metric file the user explicitly mentions load -the command definitions needed for that particular file. Metric -packages uses an improved version of this strategy, since they also -make it possible for \fontinst to remember which packages (i.e., sets -of command definitions) that have already been loaded, so that they -are not unnecessarily loaded again. The \texttt{newlatin.mtx} file is -an alternative to \texttt{latin.mtx} that implements this strategy. -Most of the actual code is located in the following metric packages: -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{l p{0.7\linewidth}} - \texttt{ltcmds.mtx}& Defines some common commands used by the other - files.\\ - \texttt{llbuild.mtx}& Builds the latin lower case alphabet - (unaccented letters are `unfakable', the rest are constructed if - not present in the base fonts).\\ - \texttt{lubuild.mtx}& Builds the latin upper case alphabet.\\ - \texttt{lsbuild.mtx}& Builds accented letters in the latin - smallcaps alphabet, but only if there are unaccented letters to - build them from in the base fonts.\\ - \texttt{lsfake.mtx}& Fakes a latin smallcaps alphabet by shrinking - the upper case alphabet, but only if the glyph had not already - been manufactured.\\ - \texttt{lsmisc.mtx}& Make some miscellaneous smallcaps glyphs - (mostly ``smallcaps f-ligatures'').\\ - \texttt{ltpunct.mtx}& Makes digits, punctuation marks, and other - symbols (mostly by marking as ``unfakable''). -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\noindent All of these are easy to use as components of equivalents -of a modified \texttt{latin.mtx} files, and all dependencies of one -package upon another are handled via explicit |\usemtxpackage| -commands. - -% For information on the syntax etcetera of commands related to metric -% packages, see Section~\ref{Sec:Metric files}. - - -\subsection{Word boundary ligatures and kerns} - -One of the new features added in \TeX~3 was that of ligatures and -kerns with word boundaries. \Fontinst has had an interface -for making such ligatures and kerns, but it has been completely -redesigned in v\,1.9 and the old interface (setting the integer -|boundarychar|) is no longer recognized by \fontinst. Files -which use the old interface can still be processed with -\texttt{cfntinst.sty}, though. - -Before considering the new commands, it is suitable to make a -distinction between proper glyphs and pseudoglyphs. A proper glyph has -been set using one of the commands |\setrawglyph|, |\setglyph|, and -|\resetglyph|. A pseudoglyph is any name used in the context of a -glyph name which does not denote a proper glyph. If a pseudoglyph -|g-not| was set using the |\setnotglyph| command, then -|\ifisglyph{g-not}\then| will evaluate to true, but something can be -a pseudoglyph even if an |\ifisglyph| test evaluates to false. The -interesting point about pseudoglyphs when considering word boundaries -however, is that a pseudoglyph can have ligatures and kerns. - -Kerns and ligatures at the left word boundary (beginning of word) are -specified using the commands |\setleftboundary| and -|\endsetleftboundary|, which are syntactically identical to -|\setslot| and |\endsetslot| respectively. One important difference is -however that the argument to |\setslot| must be a proper glyph, while -the argument to |\setleftboundary| may be any glyph, hence any -pseudoglyph will do just fine. - -|\ligature| commands between |\setleftboundary| and -|\endsetleftboundary| will generate beginning of word ligatures. Kerns -on the right of the glyph specified in |\setleftboundary| will become -beginning of word kerns. - -Kerns and ligatures at the right word boundary (end of word) are -trickier, due to the asymmetrical nature of the ligkern table in a PL -file. What a font can do is to specify that the right word boundary, -for purposes of kerning and ligatures, should be interpreted as -character $n$. By including a kern or ligature with character $n$ on -the right, that kern or ligature will be used at the end of a word, -but it will also be used each time the next character is character -$n$. Because of this, one usually wants the slot $n$, which the right -word boundary is interpreted as being, to be empty whenever the -encoding allows this. - -The command -\begin{quote} - |\setrightboundary|\marg{glyph} -\end{quote} -will mark the current slot as used to denote the right word boundary, -and leave the slot empty, increasing the current slot number by one -just like a |\setslot| \textellipsis\ |\endsetslot| block does. Kerns on -the left of \meta{glyph} will be end of word kerns and |\ligature| -commands with \meta{glyph} as the second argument will be for the end -of a word. - -The command -\begin{quote} - |\makerightboundary|\marg{glyph} -\end{quote} -is similar to |\setrightboundary|, but it is a slot command which may -only be used between a |\setslot| and the matching |\endsetslot|. Like -|\setrightboundary|, it marks the current slot as used to denote the -right word boundary, but the glyph specified in the enclosing |\setslot| -will be written to that slot. Ligatures for the glyph specified by the -|\setslot| and ligatures for the glyph specified by the -|\makerightboundary| will both be for this single slot. Kerns on the -right of the |\setslot| glyph and the |\makerightboundary| glyph will -similarly both be for this single slot. The idea is that the |\setslot| -glyph should be used when making a kern or ligature for that glyph, -while the |\makerightboundary| glyph should be used when making a kern -or ligature for the end of a word. \Fontinst will warn you if -these two uses of the slot directly contradict each other. - - -\subsection{Changing the names of glyphs} -\label{Ssec:Des:Reglyph} - -Sometimes, primarily when making a virtual font from more than one raw -font and two of the raw fonts contain different glyphs with the same -name, it becomes necessary to change the names of some glyphs to make -some sense out of it. The main source of this kind of trouble is the -``caps and small caps'' (SC) and ``oldstyle figures'' (OsF) fonts -within many commercial font families. The typical problem is that what -is typographically different glyphs---such as the lowercase `a' -(\texttt{a}, for \fontinst) and the smallcaps `\textsc{a}' -(\texttt{Asmall}, for \fontinst)---are given the same name by -the foundry. - -One way to get round this is to say for example -\begin{quote} - |\setglyph{Asmall} \glyph{a}{1000} \endsetglyph|\\ - |\setleftrightkerning{Asmall}{a}{1000}|\\ - |\unsetglyph{a}|\\ - |\noleftrightkerning{a}| -\end{quote} -and continuing like that for all the duplicate glyph names. This is -however a rather prolix method and if the number of glyphs is large -then it is usually simpler to use the |\reglyphfont| command. - -To reglyph one or several fonts, one writes -\begin{quote} - |\reglyphfonts|\\ - \vadjust{}\quad \meta{reglyphing commands}\\ - |\endreglyphfonts| -\end{quote} -There are two types of reglyphing commands: the |\reglyphfont| -command, and the commands that modify what |\reglyphfont| will do to -the fonts it operates on. The syntax of |\reglyphfont| is -\begin{quote} - |\reglyphfont|\marg{destination font}\marg{source font} -\end{quote} -The \meta{source font} font here is the name (suffix not included, of -course) of the font metric file one wants to change the glyph names in. -This font metric file can be in any of the formats MTX, PL, AFM, and -VPL, and it will be converted to MTX format if it isn't already in -that format (this happens just as for files listed in the second -argument of |\installfont|). \meta{destination font} (which must be -different from \meta{source font}) will be taken as the name for a -new \texttt{.mtx} file that will be generated. The destination font -can differ from the source font only in two ways: the names of some -glyphs in the source font might be changed, and some of the commands -from the source font might not have been copied to the destination -font. To what extent the fonts are different is determined by what -modifying commands have been executed; when no modifying commands -have been executed, the source and destination font are equal. - -The modifying reglyphing commands are -\begin{quote} - |\renameglyph|\marg{to}\marg{from}\\ - |\renameglyphweighted|\marg{to}\marg{from}\marg{weight}\\ - |\killglyph|\marg{glyph}\\ - |\killglyphweighted|\marg{glyph}\marg{weight}\\ - |\offmtxcommand|\marg{command}\\ - |\onmtxcommand|\marg{command} -\end{quote} -|\renameglyph| simply declares that occurrences of the glyph name -\meta{from} should be replaced by the glyph name \meta{to}. To each -glyph name is also assigned a \emph{weight}, which is used by a -mechanism which conditions copying of commands from the source font to -the destination font by the set of glyphs that command mentions. The -details of this mechanism are however somewhat tricky, so those -interested in the full generality should read the comments in the -source of \fontinst. Here it needs only be noted that if one applies -|\killglyph| to a glyph name, then (under most circumstances) commands -that refer to that glyph name will not be copied to the destination -font. - -|\offmtxcommand| and |\onmtxcommand| also control whether commands are -copied to the destination font, but they look at the actual command -rather than the glyphs it refers to. For example, after the command -\begin{quote} - |\offmtxcommand{\setkern}| -\end{quote} -no |\setkern| commands will be copied. By using |\offmtxcommand|, it -is possible to achieve effects similar to those of the files -\texttt{kernoff.mtx} and \texttt{glyphoff.mtx}---the difference is -that with |\offmtxcommand|, it happens at an earlier stage of the font -generation. As expected, |\onmtxcommand| undoes the effect of -|\offmtxcommand|. - -A special rule pertains to the |\set|\-|raw|\-|glyph|, -|\set|\-|not|\-|glyph|, |\set|\-|scaled|\-|raw|\-|glyph|, and -|\set|\-|scaled|\-|not|\-|glyph| commands, since |\transformfont| -doesn't care what something was in the source font when it generates -the transformed font. To turn these commands off while reglyphing, -you use |\offmtx|\-|command| on |\set|\-|scaled|\-|raw|\-|glyph|. - -The effects of modifying reglyphing commands are delimited by -|\reglyphfonts| and |\endreglyphfonts|, which starts and ends a group -respectively. - -As we expect the most common reglyphing operation will be to go from SC -glyph names to expert glyph names, there is a file \texttt{csc2x.tex} -in the \fontinst distribution which contains the modifying -reglyphing commands needed for setting up that conversion. Thus you -can write for example -\begin{quote} - |\reglyphfonts|\\ - | \input csc2x|\\ - | \reglyphfont{padrcx8r}{padrc8r}|\\ - | \reglyphfont{padscx8r}{padsc8r}|\\ - |\endreglyphfonts| -\end{quote} -to alter the glyph names in the SC fonts in the Adobe Garamond -(\texttt{pad}) family. -Note that the names of the destination fonts here really are rather -arbitrary, since they will only exist as \texttt{.mtx} files, and -thus only need to work within your local file system. In particular, -all the |\setrawglyph| commands in the destination font files still -refer to the source font, so it is that font which the drivers need -to know about. - - -\subsection{Making map file fragments} -\label{Ssec:MapFragments} - -A \emph{map file fragment} is the lines\footnote{Not in general an -entire map file, hence the word \emph{fragment}.} of a map file that -the corresponding driver would need for handling some set of fonts. -When told to, \fontinst can (in a fairly automatic way) create -the map file fragment which is needed for the set of raw fonts -\fontinst has (i) installed directly (using |\installrawfont|) -or (ii) used as a base font for some installed virtual font (generated -by |\installfont|). \Fontinst does not support the map file -syntaxes of every existing driver, but the system is designed to be -extendable and contributions that extend its capabilities are welcome. -Nor can \fontinst examine your \TeX\ system and -determine every piece of information needed to make the correct map -file fragments, but you can tell it roughly how your installation -looks, it can make guesses which work most of the time, and you can -specify most things explicitly if the guesses turn out to be wrong. -Should the available options for configuring the process turn out to -be inadequate for your needs, then please write to the -\fontinst mailing list about this---there is probably a way -to improve the system so that your needs can be met. - -Now what does one have to do to use this map file fragment writer, -then? First you need to tell \fontinst to record the -information the map file fragment writer needs. You do this by giving -the command -\begin{quote} - |\recordtransforms{whatever.tex}| -\end{quote} -at the beginning of the run. Here \texttt{whatever.tex} is the name of -a file that will be created, so you can use some other name if you -like. After that you do all the calls to |\transform|\-|font|, -|\install|\-|font|, |\install|\-|raw|\-|font|, |\latin|\-|family|, -etc.\ you need to make the fonts you want. When you're done, you give -the command -\begin{quote} - |\endrecordtransforms| -\end{quote} -and end the run (say |\bye|). The file \texttt{whatever.tex} will now -contain the information about which fonts were used and what needs to -be done with them. - -The second step is to actually run the map file fragment writer. -Observe that it is located in the file \texttt{finstmsc.sty}, not -\texttt{fontinst.sty}! The commands you need to give it can be so few -that you can type them in at \TeX's \texttt{*} prompt, but if you are -writing a command file then it should typically have the following -structure (comments not necessary, of course): -\begin{quote} - \begin{tabular}{ll} - |\input finstmsc.sty|& |%| Input command definitions\\ - \meta{general settings} & |%| See below\\ - |\adddriver|\marg{driver name}\marg{output file}& - |%| Open output file\\ - |\input whatever.tex|& |%| Writes to output file(s)\\ - |\donedrivers|& |%| Close output file(s), tidy up\\ - |\bye|& |%| Quit - \end{tabular} -\end{quote} -The |\adddriver| command gives the order ``write map file entries for -the \meta{driver name} DVI driver to the file \meta{output file}.'' The -plan is that it should be possible to use the name of just about any -major driver (\texttt{dvips}, \texttt{xdvi},\footnote{Or -does that use the same map file as \texttt{dvips}? I heard somewhere -that it did. /LH} \texttt{pdftex},\footnote{pdf\TeX\ can read -the map files generated for \texttt{dvips}, but a separate driver is -desirable because the formats are not completely identical.} -\texttt{OzTeX}, etc.) here and get suitable map file entries for that -driver as output, but for the moment only the \texttt{dvips} and -\texttt{dvipdfm}\footnote{Whose support I made very much to illustrate -that you \emph{don't} have to be a big and ancient driver like -\texttt{dvips} to have supporting code put into \fontinst. -(The fact that I just happened to have printed out the documentation and -that is was easy to read also helped, of course.) Note, however, that -there won't be any support for a driver unless someone sits down and -writes the code for it! Don't assume I will. /LH} drivers are supported. - -You may also use \texttt{debug} or \texttt{pltotf} for \meta{driver name}. -The \texttt{debug} ``DVI driver'' file simply contains all the available -information about each font (hence it should come handy for debugging -code writing entries for real drivers) in a format that should be easy -to interpret for a human. It could be the right choice if you're going -to write the map file manually, as the combined effects of several -font transformations are not always easy to compute manually. The -file generated for the \texttt{pltotf} ``driver'' is actually a shell -script consisting of a sequence of \pltotf commands. These commands -perform the \pl to \tfm conversion for precisely those fonts that are -actually needed (\fontinst usually generates \pl files also for a -number of fonts at intermediate stages of transformation, and many of -these need not be converted to \tfm files). The \texttt{TFMfileprefix} -string can be used to add a directory path to the \tfm file names, -perhaps saving the step of moving them to their proper location later. - -The file \texttt{whatever.tex} in the above example contains the -commands (|\makemapentry| commands) that actually cause entries to be -written to the output file. It also contains a number of |\storemapdata| -commands---these describe how some given font was made. If some -metric file you have used contains |\setrawglyph| commands that were -not automatically generated by \fontinst, then there might -not be a |\storemapdata| for the font they refer to in -\texttt{whatever.tex}, so you will have to include such a command -yourself somewhere. This can for example be done in the \meta{general -settings} part of the above example file. - -Another class of things that will typically appear in the -\meta{general settings} part above is commands that will inform the -routines actually writing output about your \TeX\ system, about the set -of fonts you are using on this run, or about something else that might -be useful. Some such commands are of a general nature and affect what -assumptions \fontinst will make in certain conditions when no -specific information is available. For the moment there commands are: -\begin{description} - \item[\cs{AssumeMetafont}] Assume all fonts with PL metrics are - bitmaps generated by Metafont, and therefore make no entries for - them. - \item[\cs{AssumeAMSBSYY}] Assume all fonts with PL metrics have their - \TeX\ names in all upper case as postscript names---just like the - Computer Modern fonts in the AMS\slash Blue~Sky\slash Y\&Y - distribution. - \item[\cs{AssumeBaKoMa}] Assume all fonts with PL metrics have their - \TeX\ names in all lower case as postscript names---just like the - Computer Modern fonts in the BaKoMa distribution. -\end{description} -Otherwise the default action of the routine for finding out the -postscript name of a font simply is to observe that it hasn't got a clue -about what the right value is when the metrics were taken from a PL -file, and therefore it writes `\texttt{??????}' for the postscript name. -\begin{description} - \item[\cs{AssumeLWFN}] Assume postscript fonts for which nothing - else has been specified are stored in files which are named - according to the \mbox{MacOS} scheme for - \texttt{LWFN}s.%\footnote{LaserWriter FoNt} -\end{description} -Otherwise the default action is to use the name of the AFM or PL from -which the metrics were originally taken, and add the file suffix stored -in the string \texttt{PSfontsuffix}. The default value of this string -is \texttt{.pfa}, but it can be changed using |\resetstr|. - -If neither the default nor the LWFN scheme produce correct results -then you may use the more specific |\specifypsfont| command, which -describes exactly which file (or files, if any) a given font is stored -in. The syntax of this command is -\begin{quote} - |\specifypsfont|\marg{PS font name}\marg{actions} -\end{quote} -where the \meta{actions} is a sequence of ``action commands''. -Currently the only such command is -\begin{quote} - |\download|\marg{file} -\end{quote} -which instructs the map file writer to include in any entry using -that PS font and ``instruction'' that the specified file should be -downloaded. Some examples are -\begin{verbatim} - \specifypsfont{Times-Roman}{} - \specifypsfont{Shareware-Cyrillic-Regular}{\download{fcyr.gsf}} - \specifypsfont{zmnl8ac6}{% - \download{MinionMM.pfb}\download{zmnl8ac6.pro}% - } -\end{verbatim} -Many \dvi drivers (for example \dvips) have more than one style of -font downloading (e.g., partial and full downloading). This interface -could be extended to control also such finer details (for example by -adding a |\fulldownload| command to force full download of a font), -but requests for this has so far been scarce. - -Finally, there is the |\declarepsencoding| command which is used to -link ETX files to postscript encodings. If no postscript encoding has -been linked to a given ETX file then \fontinst will -automatically create a postscript encoding (\texttt{.enc}) file for -that encoding, and use this file for all reencoding commands. -The \texttt{8r} encoding is predeclared, and it doesn't -matter if an encoding is undeclared if you never use it to reencode -fonts, but there is potentially a problem with not having declared -encodings you have installed and use for reencoding, as you may then -find yourself having two files with identical names that define -encodings that do not have the same name (as far as postscript is -concerned). - - - -\subsection{Tuning accent positions---an application of loops} - -The accent placements made by \texttt{latin.mtx} certainly aren't -perfect for all fonts, and the only way to find out where they should -be put is through trying in text the accented letters you get for a -couple of values for the position parameter and deciding which one -works best. Since to try one parameter value you need to (i) edit it -into an MTX file, (ii) run \fontinst, (iii) run -\vptovf, (iv) run \TeX\ on some test text, and (v) print that -text, trying one parameter value can take annoyingly much time. -Repeating the same procedure ten times to test ten values is not -something one does without being bored (unless one scripts it, of -course), but it is possible to try ten parameter values in a single -virtual font, and without doing very much typing. - -Say you're not too happy with how \texttt{latin.mtx} positions the -accent in the \texttt{ohungarumlaut} glyph: -\begin{quote} - |\setglyph{ohungarumlaut}|\\ - | \topaccent{o}{hungarumlaut}{500}|\\ - |\endsetglyph| -\end{quote} -The |500| is the horizontal position (in thousandths of the width of -the \texttt{o}) that the centre of \texttt{hungarumlaut} in the glyph -constructed will have, so that is the position parameter value that -you want to change. Create an MTX file containing the code -\begin{quote} - |\for(pos){250}{750}{50}|\\ - | \setglyph{ohungarumlaut\strint{pos}}|\\ - | \topaccent{o}{hungarumlaut}{\int{pos}}|\\ - | \endsetglyph|\\ - | \setleftrightkerning{ohungarumlaut\strint{pos}}|\\ - | {ohungarumlaut}{1000}|\\ - |\endfor(pos)| -\end{quote} -This will set eleven glyphs \texttt{ohungarumlaut250}, -\texttt{ohungarumlaut300}, \texttt{ohungarumlaut350}, \textellipsis\,, -\texttt{ohungarumlaut750}, each being an Hungarianly umlauted `o' -(i.e., an `\H{o}') but all having that umlaut in slightly different -positions. In order to put them in a font, you also need to make an -encoding that contains them. Therefore create an ETX file which -contains the code -\begin{quote} - |\relax\encoding|\\ - |\nextslot{"C0}|\\ - |\for(pos){250}{750}{50}|\\ - | \setslot{ohungarumlaut\strint{pos}}|\\ - | \endsetslot|\\ - |\endfor(pos)|\\ - |\endencoding| -\end{quote} -The command for installing this experiment font would be something like -\begin{quote} - |\installfont|\marg{some name}|{|\meta{the normal list of metrics}% - |,|\penalty0\meta{the new MTX}|}|\penalty0 - |{ot1,|\meta{the new ETX}|}|\penalty0|{OT1}|\textellipsis -\end{quote} -The reason for including \texttt{ot1} in the third argument above is -that you'll need letters other than `\H{o}' against which you can -compare the experimental glyphs. It would not have been possible to -use \texttt{t1} instead of \texttt{ot1} (even though that has more -Hungarian letters) since that would set all slots in the font and -leave none for these experimental \texttt{ohungarumlaut}s. - -It is even possible to use a loop for making the test text. The -\LaTeX\ macros -\begin{verbatim} -\newcount\slotcount -\newcommand\testtext[3]{% - \slotcount=#1\relax - \begin{description}% - \loop\item[\the\slotcount]#3% - \ifnum #2>>\slotcount \advance \slotcount 1 \repeat - \end{description}% -} -\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\H}{OT1}{o}{\char\slotcount} -\end{verbatim} -will let you write -\begin{quote} - |\testtext|\marg{first}\marg{last}\marg{text} -\end{quote} -to get the text \meta{text} typeset once for each slot from -\meta{first} to \meta{last} inclusive, with |\H{o}| ranging through the -glyphs in this interval. Thus in this case -|\testtext|\penalty\hyphenpenalty|{"C0}|\penalty\hyphenpenalty|{"CA}|% -\penalty\hyphenpenalty|{Erd\H{o}s}| would be a trivial test. - - -\subsection{Font installation commands} -\label{Ssec:FontInstCmds} - -The |\installfont|, |\installrawfont|, and |\installfontas| commands -have the respective syntaxes -\begin{isyntax} - |\installfont|\marg{font-name}\marg{metrics}\marg{etx-list}\penalty0 - \marg{encoding}\marg{family}\marg{series}\marg{shape}\marg{size}\\ - |\installrawfont|\marg{font-name}\marg{metrics}\marg{etx-list}% - \penalty0 - \marg{encoding}\marg{family}\marg{series}\marg{shape}\marg{size}\\ - |\installfontas|\marg{font-name}\penalty0\marg{encoding}% - \marg{family}\marg{series}\marg{shape}\marg{size} -\end{isyntax} -The \meta{font-name} argument and the last five arguments are common -to all these commands. The first argument is the name of a \TeX\ font -to install. The last five arguments are the NFSS attributes under which -that font will be declared to \LaTeX---encoding, family, series, shape, -and size. It is worth observing that encoding names are usually in -upper case, whereas the family, series, and shape are usually in lower -case. The size argument is either a shorthand (declared using -|\declaresize|) for a particular font -size (or range of font sizes), or an explicit list of font sizes or -ranges of sizes, which is copied directly to the font declaration. -The most common case is to let the size argument be empty, as that is -declared as a shorthand for ``any size''. - -The |\installfontas| command does not itself create the font, it just -makes a note that the specified font declaration should be written to -the proper FD file at |\end|\-|install|\-|fonts|. The -|\install|\-|font| and |\install|\-|raw|\-|font| commands do however -produce the font, in the sense that they write a VPL and PL -respectively file for the font. It depends solely on the \meta{metrics} -and \meta{etx-list} arguments what this font will contain. Many -features of these arguments are new with \fontinst v\,1.9; -therefore the complete syntaxes are described below. - -Both arguments are comma-separated lists of basically file names (not -including an extension). The files listed in the \meta{metrics} are -font metric files which together build up a \emph{glyph base} -(definitions of glyphs and metrics related to one or several glyphs), -whereas the files listed in the \meta{etx-list} are encoding definition -files that select a subset of the glyph base for turning into a -\TeX\ font. The font metrics can be in either of the four formats -MTX, PL, AFM, and VPL, which are considered in that order. If the -metrics are not originally in MTX format then they will be converted -to this format (a new file will be created) before they are used. -The encoding definitions must be in ETX format. The files actually -read will have a suffix \texttt{.mtx}, \texttt{.pl}, \texttt{.afm}, -\texttt{.vpl}, or \texttt{.etx} appended to the name given, depending -on which format is expected. - -Within each element of the comma-separated list, the actual file name -is followed by zero or more \emph{modifier clause}s. A \meta{modifier -clause} consists of a \emph{keyword} followed by some number (usually -one) of \emph{arguments}, separated by spaces. The whole thing looks -a lot like the \meta{rule specifications} of e.g.\ the |\vrule| -command, but here the spaces are mandatory. The currently defined -\meta{modifier clause}s are -\begin{description} - \item[\mdseries\textvisiblespace\texttt{option}\textvisiblespace - \meta{string}] - Available for metric and encoding files. This adds \meta{string} - to the list of options for this file, which may affect what code - the file executes. The file can then test, using the |\ifoption| - command, whether a specific string is one of the options it was - given. - \item[\mdseries\textvisiblespace\texttt{scaled}\textvisiblespace - \meta{factor}] - Available for metric files. Causes the \texttt{rawscale} integer - variable to be set to the \meta{factor} (an integer expression) - while the file is being read. This scales glyphs and kerns that - are added to the glyph base by the \meta{factor}. - \item[\mdseries\textvisiblespace\texttt{suffix}\textvisiblespace - \meta{suffix}] - Available for metric files. Causes \meta{suffix} to be appended - to every glyph name appearing in a glyph or kern that file adds - to the glyph base. Thus ``\texttt{suffix /2}'' effectively - changes a - \begin{quote} - |\setrawglyph{a}|\dots - \end{quote} - to a - \begin{quote} - |\setrawglyph{a/2}|\dots - \end{quote} - \item[\mdseries\textvisiblespace\texttt{encoding}\textvisiblespace - \meta{etx-name}] - Available for metric files, and forces \fontinst to - only consider the PL and VPL formats for this font. - As these file formats do not contain glyph names, an ETX file - is used to assign glyph names to the slots in the font. - This ETX file is usually selected according to the - \texttt{CODINGSCHEME} property of the PL or VPL (using the - correspondences set up via the |\declare|\-|encoding| command), - but that information is not always as one would want it (there - are even fonts for which it is quite wrong). An \texttt{encoding} - clause bypasses this automatic mechanism, so that the file - \meta{etx-name}\texttt{.etx} is used instead. - -% % The following is no longer true as of v1.926: -% \textbf{Note:} The first time that a file in PL or VPL format is -% used in a \meta{metrics} argument, a corresponding MTX file is -% generated. This means that if the same file reference is used -% another time then the reference will be to the MTX file, not to -% the original PL or VPL, and thus \texttt{encoding} clauses on -% subsequent uses will have no effect. Each font only has one -% encoding, so it usually makes no sense to switch the ETX file -% used to interpret a font, but since MTX files are not -% automatically deleted between runs there is a risk that this -% takes away the intended effect of an \texttt{encoding} clause. - - \item[\mdseries\textvisiblespace\texttt{mtxasetx}] - This is available for files in the \meta{etx-list}. The actual - function of a - \begin{quote} - \meta{file-name} \texttt{mtxasetx} - \end{quote} - item in the \meta{etx-list} is that the file - \meta{file-name}\texttt{.mtx} is inputted (\emph{not} - \meta{file-name}\texttt{.etx}) and that the correspondence - between glyph names and slot numbers set up in - |\set|\-|raw|\-|glyph| or |\set|\-|scaled|\-|raw|\-|glyph| - commands in this file is treated as if it had been set up by - |\setslot| commands in an ETX file. Provided the MTX file is - transformable, the glyph base will be unaffected. - - The purpose of this feature is to simplify quick and dirty - installations of odd fonts for which no suitable ETX file is - available. This can be useful in early stages of the design of - a new font, but is inferior to installation using proper ETX - files since one for example cannot specify any ligatures in - MTX files. -\end{description} -Furthermore there is a special exception for the \meta{metrics}: if -the first token in one of the list items is the control sequence -|\metrics|, then the rest of that item is interpreted as explicit -metric commands to execute. - -If the \meta{metrics} of two subsequent |\install|\-|font| -or |\install|\-|raw|\-|font| commands are identical then the glyph -bases will be identical as well. This creates an opportunity for -optimization, which \fontinst makes use of by caching glyph -bases from one installation command to the next so that the glyph -base does not have to be rebuilt in these cases. A side-effect of -this caching is that local assignments made between two font -installation commands are cleared out with the glyph base, but -|\setint| and similar \fontinst commands make global -assignments when used in such positions. - -Some examples might be in order. The first is an adaptation of an -installation command from \texttt{mfnt-0.59} %~\cite{mfnt} -by Matthias Clasen and Ulrik Vieth: the installation command for the -8-bit math font \texttt{xma1000} (which can be thought of as being -to \texttt{cmmi10} sort of as \texttt{ecrm1000} is to \texttt{cmr10}). -The first three \texttt{encoding} clauses are more fine-tuning---without -them, a few glyphs would get incorrect names---but the last two are -quite essential, as the \texttt{msam10} and \texttt{msbm10} fonts -incorrectly claim to have the coding scheme \texttt{TEX MATH -SYMBOLS}. -\begin{verbatim} - \installfont{xma1000}{% - yma1000 encoding mcin,% - cmr10 encoding ot1upright,% - cmmi10,% - cmsy10 encoding omscal,% - msam10 encoding msam,% - msbm10 encoding msbm,% - mccmhax,mccmkern,mcmissing,% - cmsy10-base,cmsy10-extra% - }{mc}{MC}{cm}{m}{n}{<<10->>} -\end{verbatim} -Also note the explicit \LaTeX\ size specification for the range -``10\,pt and up''. - -The second example makes use of a \texttt{suffix} clause to combine -the letters from one font with the digits from another. -\begin{verbatim} - \installfont{msbrj8t}{msbr8r,msbrc8r suffix /2,latin}{digit2,t1} - {T1}{msbj}{m}{n}{} -\end{verbatim} -In this case, the glyph base contains the glyphs of Monotype Sabon -(SabonMT)---under names such as \texttt{A} for `A', \texttt{a} for -`a', and \texttt{one} for a lining digit one---as well as the -glyphs of Monotype Sabon Small Caps and Oldstyle Figures -(SabonMT-SCOSF)---under names such as \texttt{A/2} for `A', -\texttt{a/2} for `\textsc{a}', and \texttt{one/2} for a hanging -digit one. The \texttt{digit2.etx} file simply makes the definition -\begin{verbatim} - \setcommand\digit#1{#1/2} -\end{verbatim} -which causes \texttt{t1.etx} to put \texttt{zero/2} in slot 48 (digit -zero), \texttt{one/2} in slot 49 etc., instead of as it normally -would \texttt{zero} in slot 48, \texttt{one} in slot 49 and so on. -The net effect is that the digits in the generated \texttt{msbrj8t} -is from \texttt{msbrc8r} (SabonMT-SCOSF) but everything else is from -\texttt{msbr8r} (SabonMT). - -The third example makes use of an \texttt{mtxasetx} clause to install -(with its default encoding) a font for which creating an appropriate -ETX file seems not worth the trouble. -\begin{verbatim} - \installrawfont{psyr}{psyr,\metrics - \setint{xheight}{\height{alpha}} - }{txtfdmns,psyr mtxasetx}{U}{psy}{m}{n}{} -\end{verbatim} -The effect of the second \texttt{psyr} is that \texttt{psyr.mtx} is -read (in case there was no \texttt{psyr.mtx} then it is created from -(hopefully) \texttt{psyr.afm}) and the information in it will form -the glyph base. Because of the |\metrics| control sequence, the rest -of that item will be interpreted as explicit metric commands -modifying the glyph base, and thus the |\setint| command can provide -a value for the \texttt{xheight} variable (there doesn't seem to be -such a value in the AFM). Once the glyph base is completed, the -|\install|\-|raw|\-|font| starts writing the file \texttt{psyr.pl} -(that's for the first \texttt{psyr}). The encoding of that font will, -because of the \texttt{psyr mtxasetx}, be the same as that used in -\texttt{psyr.mtx}. Finally, the \texttt{txtfdmns} is for -\texttt{txtfdmns.etx}, an ETX file which sets fontdimens 1--16 as for -a \texttt{T1} encoded font but does not set any slots. Since -\texttt{psyr.mtx} reinterpreted as an ETX file sets slots but no -fontdimens, these complement each other nicely. - - - -\subsection{Bounding boxes} - -Han The Thanh has created an implementation of bounding box support -for \fontinst, and it is a modified form of that support -is distributed with \fontinst as the file \texttt{bbox.sty}. To load -this, begin your command file with -\begin{verbatim} - \input fontinst.sty - \input bbox.sty -\end{verbatim} -The reason for not making it default is that keeping track of bounding -boxes increases some of \fontinst's memory requirements quite a lot. - -One important -characteristic of this implementation is that the dimensions of the -bounding box are not bundled into the same data structure (the -|\g-|\meta{glyph} macros) as the glyph's width, height, depth, and -italic correction are, but stored in a separate data structure (the -|\gb-|\meta{glyph} macros). A glyph doesn't need to have its bounding -box set, it is simply a piece of information that \fontinst -will store if you tell it to and which you can later retrieve. - -The bounding box will be stored as coordinates of the sides in the -normal AFM coordinate system. The commands for retrieving these -coordinates are -\begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{ll} - \textbf{Command}& \textbf{Side}\\ - |\bbtop|\marg{glyph}& top ($y$-coordinate)\\ - |\bbbottom|\marg{glyph}& bottom ($y$-coordinate)\\ - |\bbleft|\marg{glyph}& left ($x$-coordinate)\\ - |\bbright|\marg{glyph}& right ($x$-coordinate) - \end{tabular} -\end{center} -In Thanh's implementation the command names were |\ury|, |\lly|, -|\llx|, and |\urx| respectively instead, but I think the former are -easier to remember. If no bounding box has been set for a glyph then -the above commands will instead report the corresponding coordinate of -the glyph's \TeX\ box (i.e.\ |\height|\marg{glyph}, -|\neg{\depth|\marg{glyph}|}|, |0|, and |\width|\marg{glyph} -respectively). - -The command for setting the bounding box of a glyph is -\begin{quote} - |\setglyphbb|\marg{glyph}\marg{left}\marg{bottom}\marg{right}% - \marg{top} -\end{quote} - - - -\section{Miscellaneous notes} - -\subsection{On verbatim, typewriter, and monowidth fonts} - -The verbatim, typewriter, and monowidth concepts are common sources -of confusion for those who use \fontinst to install fonts -with \LaTeX; in particular -there are many misconceptions about the relation between them. The -official view (of which not much has actually been brought forward) -is that these concepts are really about three quite different things. - -A font is a \emph{monowidth} (monospaced, fixed-pitch) font if all -glyphs in it have exactly the same width. Some font formats make -special provisions for such fonts; the most notable example is the -AFM format, where a single \texttt{CharWidth} keyword specifies the -width for all glyphs in the font. \Fontinst responds to this -by including the command -\begin{quote} - |\setint{monowidth}{1}| -\end{quote} -in the MTX file generated from an AFM, but that is everything that is -hard-wired into the program. That a font is monowidth is however -something that one should take note of when installing it for \TeX, -as it means many of the glyphs in it have such a strange appearance -that they are (pretty much) useless. The \texttt{endash} is for -example usually only half as long as the \texttt{hyphen} and the -letters in ligature glyphs are only half as wide as normal letters. -Many of the ETX and MTX files that come with \fontinst -contain special commands to avoid making use of such degenerate -glyphs. - -That a font is a \emph{typewriter} font really only means that it has -a typewriterish look about it. The two most familiar typewriter fonts -are probably Computer Modern Typewriter (\texttt{cmtt}) and Courier. -Both of these fonts are monowidth, but there is no absolute rule about -this. One of the standard \TeX\ fonts is for example Computer Modern -Variable-width Typewriter (\texttt{cmvtt}), which is not a monowidth -font, as Figure~\ref{Fig:TTvsVTT} shows. -\begin{figure} - \begin{tabular}{ll} - \texttt{cmtt}:& \fontfamily{cmtt}\selectfont - The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.\\ - \texttt{cmvtt}:& \fontfamily{cmvtt}\selectfont - The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog. - \end{tabular} - \caption{Two typewriter fonts} - \label{Fig:TTvsVTT} -\end{figure} - -The verbatim concept has very little to do with fonts at all; in -\LaTeX\ it is considered to be a property of the environment -(\texttt{verbatim}, \texttt{macrocode}, etc.) rather than a property -of the font. The connection there is with fonts is that the encoding -of the font must contain visible ASCII (as defined in Appendix~C -of \emph{The \TeX book}%~\cite{TeXbook} -) as a subset for the text to -be rendered correctly. The \texttt{cmtt} family is the only one amongst -the original Computer Modern fonts which meets this criterion and -that is the primary grounds for the idea that these three concepts -should be connected. Today that reason is at best a very weak one, as -all \texttt{T1}-encoded fonts also meet the criterion of containing -visible ASCII as a subset. - -A circumstance which has probably added to the confusion is that -\texttt{OT1} is usually claimed to be an encoding. In reality the -Computer Modern fonts that are declared in \LaTeX\ as being -\texttt{OT1} display as many as five different encodings, as shown in -Table~\ref{Tab:OT1-fonts}. -\begin{table} - \begin{tabular}{lccc} - & \texttt{TEX TEXT}& - \begin{tabular}[b]{c}\texttt{TEX TEXT WITHOUT}\\ - \texttt{F-LIGATURES}\end{tabular}& - \texttt{TEX TYPEWRITER TEXT}\\ - \noalign{\medskip} - non-italic& - \begin{tabular}{l} - \texttt{cmb10}\\ - \texttt{cmbx5}--\texttt{12}\\ - \texttt{cmbxsl10}\\ - \texttt{cmdunh10}\\ - \texttt{cmff10}\\ - \texttt{cmfib8}\\ - \texttt{cmr6}--\texttt{17}\\ - \texttt{cmsl8}--\texttt{12}\\ - \texttt{cmss8}--\texttt{17}\\ - \texttt{cmssbx10}\\ - \texttt{cmssdc10}\\ - \texttt{cmssi8}--\texttt{17}\\ - \texttt{cmssq8}\\ - \texttt{cmssqi8}\\ - \texttt{cmvtt10} - \end{tabular}& - \begin{tabular}{l} - \texttt{cmcsc8}--\texttt{10}\\ - \texttt{cmr5} - \end{tabular}& - \begin{tabular}{l} - \texttt{cmsltt10}\\ - \texttt{cmtcsc10}\\ - \texttt{cmtt8}--\texttt{12} - \end{tabular}\\ - \noalign{\medskip} - italic& - \begin{tabular}{l} - \texttt{cmbxti10}\\ - \texttt{cmfi10}\\ - \texttt{cmti7}--\texttt{12}\\ - \texttt{cmu10} - \end{tabular}&& - \begin{tabular}{l} - \texttt{cmitt10} - \end{tabular} - \end{tabular} - \caption{``\texttt{OT1}-encoded'' Computer Modern fonts, collected - according to the actual font encoding} - \label{Tab:OT1-fonts} -\end{table} -Since most monowidth fonts are only used for setting verbatim text, -there is some code in \texttt{ot1.etx} which automatically chooses a -\texttt{TEX TYPEWRITER TEXT} encoding for the font when the -\texttt{monowidth} integer is set. The only reason for this is the -guess that this is what the user wanted. - - - -\section*{Acknowledgements} - -I'd like to thank all of the \fontinst $\alpha$-testers, especially -Karl Berry, Damian Cugley, Steve Grahthwohl, Yannis Haralambous, Alan -Hoenig, Rob Hutchings, Constantin Kahn, Peter Busk Laursen, Ciar{\'a}n {\'O} -Duibh{\'\i}n, Hilmar Schlegel, Paul Thompson, Norman Walsh and John Wells, -who made excellent bug-catchers! - -Thanks to Barry Smith, Frank Mittelbach, and especially Sebastian -Rahtz for many useful email discussions on how virtual fonts should -interact with \LaTeXe. - -Thanks to Karl Berry and Damain Cugley for detailed comments on this -documentation. - -Thanks to David Carlisle for the use of his \texttt{trig} macros for -calculating trigonometry. - - -% \section*{Warranty and distribution} -% -% There is no warranty for the \fontinst package, to the extent -% permitted by applicable law. Except when otherwise stated in writing, -% the author provides the program `as is' without warranty of any kind, -% either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the -% implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular -% purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the -% program is with you. Should the package prove defective, you assume -% the cost of all necessary servicing, repair or correction. -% -% In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing -% will the author be liable to you for damages, including any general, -% special, incidental or consequential damages arising out of the use or -% inability to use the program (including but not limited to loss of -% data or data being rendered inaccurate or losses sustained by you or -% third parties or a failure of the program to operate with any other -% programs), even if such holder or other party has been advised of the -% possibility of such damages. -% -% Redistribution of unchanged files is allowed provided that all files -% listed in the \texttt{MANIFEST} file are distributed. -% -% If you receive only some of these files from someone, or if you -% receieve altered files, then complain! - -\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.dvi b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.dvi Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d272df5088e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.dvi +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3f517608d16..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 0e7c485ab6c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1330 +0,0 @@ -%%% ==================================================================== -%%% @LaTeX-file{ -%%% author = "Alan Jeffrey and Rowland McDonnell and -%%% Ulrik Vieth and Lars Hellstr{\"o}m", -%%% version = "1.927", -%%% date = "28 July 2004", -%%% time = "23:20:27 CEST", -%%% filename = "intro98.tex", -%%% email = "fontinst@tug.org", -%%% checksum = "", -%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII", -%%% keywords = "fontinst, TeX, PostScript, documentation", -%%% supported = "yes", -%%% abstract = "This is documentation for the fontinst -%%% font installation package.", -%%% package = "fontinst", -%%% dependencies = "ltxguide.cls, url.sty, xspace.sty" -%%% } -%%% ==================================================================== - -% Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996 Alan Jeffrey - -% Modified by Rowland McDonnell June 1998 -% Modified and revised by Ulrik Vieth June 1998 - -\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxguide} -\usepackage[OT1]{fontenc} -\usepackage{url,xspace} -\usepackage{graphicx} -%\renewcommand\rmdefault{ppl} -%\renewcommand\rmdefault{padx} -%\renewcommand\rmdefault{pmnx} - - -% Title page and running heads. - -\makeatletter -\newcommand{\subtitle}[1]{\renewcommand{\@subtitle}{#1}} -\newcommand{\version}[1]{\renewcommand{\@version}{#1}} -\newcommand{\illustration}[1]{\renewcommand{\@illustration}{#1}} - -\newcommand{\@subtitle}{} -\newcommand{\@version}{???} -\newcommand{\@illustration}{cover.eps} - -\pagestyle{myheadings} -\AtBeginDocument{\markright{\small\itshape - \@author\hfill\@title: \@subtitle\quad}} - - -\renewcommand{\maketitle}{{% - \thispagestyle{empty}% - \normalfont\centering - \null - {\fontsize{100}{100}\textit{\@title}}% - \par\bigskip - {\Large\textbf{\@subtitle}}% - \vfill - \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{\@illustration}% - \vfill - {\Large\textbf{% - \@author\\[\smallskipamount] \@title~v\@version - \quad\textperiodcentered\quad \@date}}% - \clearpage -}} -\makeatother - - -% Set lists tighter (assuming non-zero \parskip). - -\makeatletter -\renewcommand{\@listI}{% - \leftmargin\leftmargini - \parsep\medskipamount - \itemsep\z@ % + parsep - \topsep\z@ % + parskip - \partopsep\z@ -} -\makeatother - -% Set spacing around captions. - -\setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{\medskipamount} -\setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{\medskipamount} - -% Markup for logos, file types, programs, etc. - -\newcommand*{\cs}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\ #1}\xspace} - -\newcommand*{\OzTeX}{O\kern-.03em z\kern-.15em\TeX} -\newcommand*{\OzMF}{O\kern-.03em zMF} -\newcommand*{\OzTools}{O\kern-.03em z\kern-.15em Tools} - -\newcommand{\PS}{Post\-Script\xspace} -\newcommand{\TT}{True\-Type\xspace} - -\newcommand*{\setfilename}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand*{\setdotfilename}[1]{\setfilename{.#1}} -\newcommand*{\setpackagename}[1]{\textsc{#1}} - -\newcommand{\dvips} {\setpackagename{dvips}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Dvips} {\setpackagename{Dvips}\xspace} -\newcommand{\fontinst}{\setpackagename{font\-inst}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Fontinst}{\setpackagename{Font\-inst}\xspace} - -% \show\fontname -\newcommand{\fontnamekb}{fontname\xspace} -\newcommand{\Fontnamekb}{Fontname\xspace} - -\newcommand{\mf} {\setfilename{mf}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Mf} {\setfilename{Mf}\xspace} -\newcommand{\vf} {\setfilename{vf}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Vf} {\setfilename{Vf}\xspace} -\newcommand{\pl} {\setfilename{pl}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Pl} {\setfilename{Pl}\xspace} -\newcommand{\fd} {\setfilename{fd}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Fd} {\setfilename{Fd}\xspace} -\newcommand{\pk} {\setfilename{pk}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Pk} {\setfilename{Pk}\xspace} -\newcommand{\afm}{\setfilename{afm}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Afm}{\setfilename{Afm}\xspace} -\newcommand{\vpl}{\setfilename{vpl}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Vpl}{\setfilename{Vpl}\xspace} -\newcommand{\tfm}{\setfilename{tfm}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Tfm}{\setfilename{Tfm}\xspace} -\newcommand{\mtx}{\setfilename{mtx}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Mtx}{\setfilename{Mtx}\xspace} -\newcommand{\etx}{\setfilename{etx}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Etx}{\setfilename{Etx}\xspace} -\newcommand{\pfa}{\setfilename{pfa}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Pfa}{\setfilename{Pfa}\xspace} -\newcommand{\pfb}{\setfilename{pfb}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Pfb}{\setfilename{Pfb}\xspace} -\newcommand{\dvi}{\setfilename{dvi}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Dvi}{\setfilename{Dvi}\xspace} -\newcommand{\ttf}{\setfilename{ttf}\xspace} -\newcommand{\Ttf}{\setfilename{Ttf}\xspace} - -\newcommand{\vftovp}{\setpackagename{vftovp}\xspace} -\newcommand{\vptovf}{\setpackagename{vptovf}\xspace} -\newcommand{\pltotf}{\setpackagename{pltotf}\xspace} -\newcommand{\tftopl}{\setpackagename{tftopl}\xspace} - - -% Stolen from Dr Knuth -\makeatletter % borrow the private macros of PLAIN (with care) -\def\oct#1{\hbox{\rm\'{}\kern-.2em\it#1\/\kern.05em}} % octal constant -\def\hex#1{\hbox{\rm\H{}\tt#1}} % hexadecimal constant -% macros for font tables -\def\oddline#1{\cr - \noalign{\nointerlineskip} - \multispan{19}\hrulefill& - \setbox0=\hbox{\lower 2.3pt\hbox{\hex{#1x}}}\smash{\box0}\cr - \noalign{\nointerlineskip}} -\def\evenline{\cr\noalign{\hrule}} -\def\chartstrut{\lower4.5pt\vbox to14pt{}} -\def\beginchart#1{$$\global\count@=0 #1 - \halign to\hsize\bgroup - \chartstrut##\tabskip0pt plus10pt& - &\hfil##\hfil&\vrule##\cr - \lower6.5pt\null - &&&\oct0&&\oct1&&\oct2&&\oct3&&\oct4&&\oct5&&\oct6&&\oct7&\evenline} -\def\endchart{\raise11.5pt\null&&&\hex 8&&\hex 9&&\hex A&&\hex B& - &\hex C&&\hex D&&\hex E&&\hex F&\cr\egroup$$} -\def\*{\global\advance\count@ by1 } -\def\:{\setbox0=\hbox{\char\count@}% - \ifdim\ht0>7.5pt\reposition - \else\ifdim\dp0>2.5pt\reposition\fi\fi - \box0\global\advance\count@ by1 } -\def\reposition{\setbox0=\hbox{$\vcenter{\kern2pt\box0\kern2pt}$}} -\def\smallchart{% -%\global\advance\count@ by16 - &\oct{00x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline0 - &\oct{01x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{02x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline1 - &\oct{03x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{04x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline2 - &\oct{05x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{06x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline3 - &\oct{07x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{10x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline4 - &\oct{11x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{12x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline5 - &\oct{13x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{14x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline6 - &\oct{15x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{16x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline7 - &\oct{17x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline} - -\def\bigchart{% -%\global\advance\count@ by16 - &\oct{00x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline0 - &\oct{01x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{02x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline1 - &\oct{03x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{04x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline2 - &\oct{05x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{06x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline3 - &\oct{07x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{10x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline4 - &\oct{11x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{12x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline5 - &\oct{13x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{14x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline6 - &\oct{15x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{16x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline7 - &\oct{17x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{20x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline8 - &\oct{21x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{22x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline9 - &\oct{23x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{24x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{A} - &\oct{25x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{26x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{B} - &\oct{27x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{30x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{C} - &\oct{31x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{32x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{D} - &\oct{33x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{34x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{E} - &\oct{35x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline - &\oct{36x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{F} - &\oct{37x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline} - -% \font\xrm = cmr10 at 10pt % change this line to test font -% \beginchart\xrm \normalchart \endchart - -\newcommand{\smallfontchart}[1]{% - \font\xrm = #1 \beginchart\xrm \smallchart \endchart} -\newcommand{\bigfontchart}[1]{% - \font\xrm = #1 \beginchart\xrm \bigchart \endchart} - -% \smallfontchart{cmr10 at 10pt} -% \bigfontchart{ecrm1000 at 10pt} -\makeatother -% End stolen from Dr Knuth - - - -\title{fontinst} -\subtitle{Font installation software for \TeX} -\author{Alan Jeffrey and Rowland McDonnell} -\illustration{roadmap.eps} -\version{1.8} -\date{30 June 1998} - -\begin{document} - -\maketitle - - -\begin{small} - This is the tutorial part of the 1998 \fontinst manual, chiefly - written by Rowland McDonnell and conveying his then-view on related - subjects. Although most of it is still correct, - the passing of time has rendered it somewhat antiquated, and the - average current (2004) user new to \fontinst would probably find - Philipp Lehman's \emph{The Font Installation Guide} - (\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/Type1fonts/fontinstallationguide/}) - more relevant. -\end{small} - -\tableofcontents - - -\clearpage - -\section{Introduction} - -The \fontinst package is a set of \TeX\ macros written to create -virtual fonts for use with \TeX. Its main use is creating the -files needed so you can use PostScript Type 1 fonts with \LaTeX. - -\Fontinst needs information about the fonts it works with. This -information needs to be supplied in an Adobe Font Metric (\afm) or -\TeX\ Property List (\pl) file. \pl files can be created from -\tfm files using \tftopl, a program normally included with a \TeX\ -system. - -The job that \fontinst does is complicated, but it can be used for -many tasks by people who are not \TeX\ font wizards. Having said -that, you do need to understand at least the basics of \LaTeXe's -font selection mechanism, which is documented in -\texttt{fntguide.tex}, part of the standard \LaTeX\ distribution. -\url{ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/fntguide.tex} -will fetch a copy if you don't have one to hand. - -To get the most benefit out of \fontinst, it's important to -understand and use Karl Berry's `\Fontnamekb' naming scheme. The -definitive version of this is available from your nearest CTAN -server. The following URL will fetch all the files needed -compressed into a single ZIP archive: -\url{ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/info/fontname.zip}. I -suggest that you print out the \Fontnamekb documentation and have -it handy when you're learning about \fontinst. - -The \fontinst package: -\begin{itemize} -\item Is written in \TeX, for maximum portability (at the cost of - speed). -\item Supports the OT1 (Computer Modern) and T1 (Cork) encodings. -\item Allows fonts to be generated with arbitrary `fake' - characters; for example the `ij' character can be faked if - necessary by putting an `i' next to a `j'. -\item Allows caps and small caps fonts with letter spacing and - kerning. -\item Allows kerning to be shared between characters, for example - `ij' can be kerned on the left as if it were an `i' and on the - right as if it were a `j'. This is useful, since many - PostScript fonts only include kerning information for characters - without diacriticals. -\item Allows the generation of math fonts with \verb|nextlarger|, - \verb|varchar|, and arbitrary font dimensions. -\item Allows more than one PostScript font to contribute to a - \TeX\ font, for example the `ffi' ligatures for a font can be - taken from the Expert encoding, if you have it. -\item Can automatically generate a \fd file for use with \LaTeXe. -\item Can be customized by the user to deal with arbitrary font - encodings. -\end{itemize} -Fontinst has been a stable piece of software since mid-1994. All -further updates will be upwardly compatible with the interface -described in this document. - -\subsection{What does \fontinst do?} - -\Fontinst is a tool written in \TeX\ that can create the various -extra files needed so you can use \PS fonts with \LaTeX\ and \TeX. -It can read in \afm files, and produces the necessary \vpl, \pl, -and \fd files to use the fonts (the human-readable \vpl and \pl -files produced by \fontinst are turned into the machine-readable -\vf and \tfm forms by \vptovf and \pltotf). It does not help you -configure your DVI driver. - -There also exists a \texttt{perl} front-end to \fontinst, intended -specifically for use with a Unix \TeX\ system, which takes care of -routine tasks such as running \vptovf and \pltotf on the generated -files after \fontinst has finished it's job. It also generates a -font map file for use with \dvips. - -\Fontinst's main job is creating \vf files (virtual fonts). Not -all \TeX\ systems can use them. As far as I know, all current -(1998) free and shareware \TeX\ systems can; virtual fonts have -been in widespread use with \TeX\ since 1990. If you have a TeX -system that can't use virtual fonts, \fontinst is most likely -useless to you. - -There are some nice things about having a tool written in \TeX\ to -do this: it's completely portable and you can modify its behaviour -using \TeX\ commands. The only real problem is that it's -relatively slow: you can expect a typical \fontinst run to take -something like 10--20 minutes on, say, a 40~MHz 80486SX PC or a -25~MHz 68LC040 Macintosh. - -\Fontinst can do its work on any font for which you have a -corresponding \afm or \tfm metric file, so it's not limited to -working with \PS fonts; I have used it to produce the files I -needed to use \TT fonts with \LaTeX. Whether or not you can do -this depends on whether or not you have suitable metric files and -whether or not your \TeX\ system can use \TT fonts. In -particular, the pdf\TeX\ program supports \TT fonts and includes a -utility \texttt{ttf2afm} to generate \afm files from \ttf fonts. - -Some people have used \fontinst to produce `special effects' with -normal \TeX\ fonts. One example is the \setpackagename{eco} set -of fonts (available from CTAN: -\url{ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/fonts/eco/}). These fonts -are the same as the standard EC (European Modern) fonts, but with -normal numerals replaced with old style numerals -- -\oldstylenums{12345} rather than 12345 -- everywhere except in -maths mode. - -\subsection{Installation} - -To install \fontinst, put the contents of the \url{inputs/tex}, -\url{inputs/etx}, \url{inputs/mtx} and \url{examples} directories -into a directory read by \TeX, for example -\url{TEXMF/tex/generic/fontinst}. - -When you use \fontinst, you need to make sure that the \afm and -\pl files it will work on are in a directory searched by \TeX. - -If you are using \texttt{web2c} \TeX\ on a Unix system with the -\TeX\ directory structure (TDS), you might put all the \afm files -in subdirectories of \url{TEXMF/fonts/afm/*}. And then say: -\begin{verbatim} - setenv TEXINPUTS $TEXMF/fonts/afm//:: -\end{verbatim}%$ -Note that \pl files are not normally kept in \TeX\ installations, so -if you want to use MF fonts with \fontinst you have to generate the -corresponding \pl files from \tfm files and put them in your working -directory before running \fontinst. - -You could adopt a similar strategy with other \TeX\ systems: -create directories for the required files and then change the -relevant parameter (\url{input_folders} in the default -configuration file with \OzTeX, for example). - -The approach I use is this: I write a file containing commands for -\fontinst to process, and put the \afm and \pl files needed in the -same directory as that file. When \fontinst has finished working, -I delete the \afm and \pl files because they are not needed and -waste space on my hard disc drive. Some application programs on -some computers need \afm files, so it's not always a good idea to -remove them completely. - -\subsection{Why do we need \fontinst?} - -\TeX\ refers to characters by number when it's typesetting. When -you use a command like \verb|\i|, \TeX\ puts a number (16 if -you're using OT1, 25 if you're using T1) into the \dvi file. If -you're using a font designed for use with \TeX, this number will -correspond to the character `\i'. Assuming OT1 encoding for the -moment, when you come to print out your \dvi file, the DVI driver -will see the number 16 in the \dvi file, and select the character -that sits in position 16 of the corresponding printer font file (a -\pk file in the case of normal \TeX\ fonts). Unless something has -gone wrong, that will result in the character `\i' being placed on -the page. - -It's useful to think of these numbers and the actual characters -corresponding to each number as sets called `encodings'. A -particular set of characters are assigned particular numbers. An -example of an encoding is shown in table~\ref{OT1table}. - -\TeX\ began life using 7-bit fonts. This means the original \TeX\ -fonts used the numbers 0--127 to represent characters: -128~characters per font. \TeX\ can now use 8-bit fonts: -256~numbers from 0--255, but even so, most typesetting with \TeX\ -still uses the original 7-bit encoding, now called `OT1' (Old -\TeX~1 encoding). This has a correspondance between numbers and -characters shown in table~\ref{OT1table}. The numbers used in -that table are hexadecimal and octal because it makes for a neat -table and anyway I stole the code to generate it from Donald Knuth -and that's how he did it. - -\begin{table}[!t] -\smallfontchart{cmr10 at 10pt} -\caption{The OT1 font encoding}\label{OT1table} -\end{table} - -Returning to the example above, if you've a number 16 in your \dvi -file (expecting `\i', a dotless~i), but rather than printing -with an OT1 encoded font, you print using a non re-encoded \PS -font in Adobe standard encoding, you'll get a blank, because the -Adobe standard encoding has nothing in that character position. - -There are several ways round this problem; I'll consider two cases -here. If you are using \LaTeX\ you can tell it about a new -encoding and re-define the commands that produce characters like -`\i' that live in different positions in different encodings, or -you can use a tool to re-encode the font so that it has the -expected characters in the appropriate positions. - -Re-encoding is the approach \fontinst uses: it can produce files -to map the characters in the new font to one of \TeX's existing -encodings; this works with formats other than \LaTeX. - -The first approach is used to define the standard encodings that -\LaTeX\ uses. See, for example, the file \texttt{ot1enc.def} that -comes with the current \LaTeX\ distribution, which defines the a -few commands that refer to characters which aren't in the -positions \TeX\ would otherwise assume. This works only with -modern versions of \LaTeX. - -The second approach is used to allow you to use fonts in other -encodings with any dialect of \TeX. It has the some advantages -over the first method: it works with any \TeX\ format; and it -improves portability, because you can typeset a document using a -standard \TeX\ encoding, sure that the same document will print -correctly on a different kind of computer using a font with a -different encoding. For example, you might say: -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{times} -\end{verbatim} -in the preamble of your document. On my computer, that means my -DVI driver will use a Macintosh encoded \TT version of Times. On -your computer, it might mean the dvi driver will use a Unicode -encoded \PS version of Times-Roman. The results will be identical -in either case, without needing to modify the document. - -\subsection{How do you use \fontinst?} - -\Fontinst works on \afm files named (more-or-less) according to -Karl Berry's font naming scheme (see -\url{ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/info/fontname} at CTAN). -Let's say you want to use the Adobe Times fonts. You can get the -metric files for this font from CTAN: -\begin{center} -\begin{small} -\begin{tabular}{ll} - \emph{Location of file at CTAN} & \emph{Rename to} \\ - \url{fonts/psfonts/adobeafm/base35/tib_____.afm} & - \texttt{ptmb8a.afm} \\ - \url{fonts/psfonts/adobeafm/base35/tibi____.afm} & - \texttt{ptmbi8a.afm} \\ - \url{fonts/psfonts/adobeafm/base35/tii_____.afm} & - \texttt{ptmri8a.afm} \\ - \url{fonts/psfonts/adobeafm/base35/tir_____.afm} & - \texttt{ptmr8a.afm} -\end{tabular} -\end{small} -\end{center} -The new name is the name you should give the \tfm files so that -\fontinst understands what each file contains. The initial `|p|' -means `Adobe'; `|tm|' means `Times'; `|b|' bold, `|r|' roman, -`|i|' italic; and `|8a|' means `Adobe standard encoding'. - -The simplest use of \fontinst is to put the four \afm files in the -same directory as \texttt{fontinst.sty} and run \TeX\ on -\texttt{fontinst.sty}. At the \verb|*| prompt type: -\begin{verbatim} - *\latinfamily{ptm}{} \bye -\end{verbatim} - -Some time later (about 17 minutes on my rather old computer), -\fontinst will have finished, having created: -\begin{itemize} -\item Two \pl files for each \afm file -\item One \vpl file for each \TeX\ font -\item One \fd file for each family -\end{itemize} -The \pl files come in pairs: for example, \texttt{ptmb8a.pl} and -\texttt{ptmb8r.pl}. The |8a| version has the same encoding as the -original font; the |8r| version is re-encoded to |TeXBase1| (|8r|) -encoding, and is the font that is the base on which the T1 and OT1 -encoded versions are based on. The raw |8a| (Adobe standard) -encoded font is not normally used. - -These can be converted to \TeX\ fonts using \pltotf or \vptovf. -If you have \OzTeX, launch \OzMF, select \pltotf (or \vptovf) from -the Tools menu, and say `Do all files'. - -If you use the \texttt{bash} shell on a Unix system, you can -process all files using these one-liners at the \verb|$| prompt: -\begin{verbatim} - $ for f in in *.pl; do pltotf $f; done - $ for f in in *.vpl; do vptovf $f; done -\end{verbatim}%$ -(This assumes that \pltotf and \vptovf can deduce the file names -of the corresponding \tfm and \vf files automatically.) - -You should then: -\begin{itemize} -\item Move the \tfm files to your \TeX\ fonts directory\\ - (e.g.~\url{TEXMFLOCAL/fonts/tfm/*}). -\item Move the \vf files to your virtual fonts directory\\ - (e.g.~\url{TEXMFLOCAL/fonts/vf/*}). -\item Move the \fd files to your \TeX\ inputs directory\\ - (e.g.~\url{TEXMFLOCAL/tex/latex/psfonts/*}). -\end{itemize} -If your \TeX\ installation is organized using the \TeX\ directory -structure (TDS), it is customary to subdivide the \tfm and \vf -files into subdirectories by supplier and typeface name. - -The \pl, \vpl, and \mtx files are debris that can now be deleted. -\mtx files are font metric files \fontinst creates for its own use -from \afm and \pl files. They're just more convenient for \TeX\ -to read than other forms -- think of them as \fontinst readable -\afm and \pl files. - -By now, you have all the files in place to produce a \dvi file -using the new fonts. You can make Adobe Times the default roman -font in your document by putting this in your preamble: -\begin{verbatim} - \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm} -\end{verbatim} - -\TeX\ will now happily produce a perfectly good \dvi file -including the new font, which your DVI driver will choke on -because you've not yet told it about the new fonts. Exactly how -you do this depends on the dvi driver, but they all need the same -information: the name of a \TeX\ font; the printer font name it -corresponds to; some information to handle an re-encoding needed; -and (in the case of a \PS driver) perhaps an instruction to -download the font to the printer. You don't need to download the -Times font to a \PS printer, because Times is built in to every -\PS printer. - -If you use \dvips, these lines added to your \texttt{psfonts.map} -file will do the job: -\begin{verbatim} - ptmr8r Times-Roman "TeXBase1Encoding ReEncodeFont" <<8r.enc - ptmri8r Times-Italic "TeXBase1Encoding ReEncodeFont" <<8r.enc - ptmb8r Times-Bold "TeXBase1Encoding ReEncodeFont" <<8r.enc - ptmbi8r Times-BoldItalic "TeXBase1Encoding ReEncodeFont" <<8r.enc - ptmro8r Times-Roman "0.167 SlantFont TeXBase1Encoding ReEncodeFont" <<8r.enc - ptmbo8r Times-Bold "0.167 SlantFont TeXBase1Encoding ReEncodeFont" <<8r.enc -\end{verbatim} -And now you can print a \dvi file containing the new fonts. If -you really do want to use the `raw' |8a| encoded fonts for some -reason, you need to add these lines to your \texttt{psfonts.map} -file: -\begin{verbatim} - ptmr8a Times-Roman - ptmri8a Times-Italic - ptmb8a Times-Bold - ptmbi8a Times-BoldItalic - ptmro8a Times-Roman "0.167 SlantFont" - ptmbo8a Times-Bold "0.167 SlantFont" -\end{verbatim} - -Assuming that you're using the \fd file that \fontinst has -produced, and that you've asked for the Adobe Times family (|ptm|) -in medium series (|m|) and upright shape (|n| for normal) using -the NFSS font selection commands: -\begin{verbatim} - \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm} - \rmfamily \mdseries \upshape -\end{verbatim} -Assuming further that you are using the \fd file \texttt{t1ptm.fd} -produced by \fontinst, the \TeX\ font (\tfm file) \texttt{ptmr8t.tfm} -will be selected by the above commands, as you can see from the -relevant line in \texttt{t1ptm.fd}: -\begin{verbatim} - \DeclareFontShape{T1}{ptm}{m}{n}{<<->> ptmr8t}{} -\end{verbatim} - -This is what happens: -\begin{itemize} -\item \TeX\ typesets your document using the font metric file - \texttt{ptmr8t.tfm}; this is the font that is put in the \dvi - file. -\item \Dvips looks at the \dvi file, and sees a reference to the - font \texttt{ptmr8t}. -\item \Dvips searches for a \vf file corresponding to - \texttt{ptmr8t}; when it finds \texttt{ptmr8t.vf}, it knows it - has a virtual font on its hands. - %\footnote{This is a slight lie--why?} -\item \Dvips follows the instructions in the \vf file, which map - characters in \texttt{ptmr8t.tfm} to characters in the font - \texttt{ptmr8r.tfm}. That is, when it sees a number~25 in the - \dvi file (dotless~i -- `\i' -- in T1 encoding), it replaces it - with a number~17, which is a dotless~i in |8r| encoding. -\item Then \dvips looks up the name of each number according to - the scheme given in the file \texttt{8r.enc}, and replaces each - number with the name of the character, in this case, number~17 - is listed as `dotlessi'. -\item And finally, \dvips tells the printer to print the named - character. -\end{itemize} - -Not all DVI drivers can manage re-encoding as well as \dvips can. -For example, \OzTeX's built-in non-\PS \dvi driver can only work -with numbers, so if I'm using a \PS font, I can't print characters -(such as Eth) that don't have a number in Macintosh text encoding -unless I use \dvips and print on a \PS printer. \Dvips works with -character names, so it's not subject to this restriction. In the -example above, \OzTeX\ would replace the number~17 for `dotlessi' -in |8r| encoding with a number~245 for `dotlessi' in Macintosh -text encoding. - -The details of the \LaTeXe{} font selection scheme are described -in \emph{\LaTeXe{} font selection} (distributed with \LaTeXe\ as -the file \texttt{fntguide.tex}) and \emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion} -(Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin, Addison-Wesley). -%You might also find useful the file \url{info/simple-nfss.tex} -%available at your nearest comprehensive \TeX\ archive network -%(CTAN) FTP server. - -The files you need to use Times, Helvetica, Courier, and the rest -of the `standard' \PS fonts are distributed as part of the -\setpackagename{PSNFSS} bundle available from CTAN, so there's no -need to create new files to use these fonts. - -A more involved example of \fontinst use can be seen in the file -\texttt{fontptcm.tex} which creates the files you need to use a -combination of Times, Symbol, Zapf Chancery and Computer Modern as -\TeX\ math fonts. - - -\section{Installing your own font family} - -The \fontinst package has a command \verb|\latinfamily| meant to -do most of the work to install a `normal' set (family) of roman -text fonts from Adobe. Assuming you have a set of \afm files to -match the fonts you wish to use, the first step is to rename the -\afm files according to the \Fontnamekb naming scheme. - -A `normal' set of text fonts usually includes the basic upright -roman version, bold, italic, and bold italic. Sometimes there -will also be small caps versions, perhaps some `expert' fonts, and -maybe some other weights such as light, medium, semi bold, black -or ultra bold. - -The most important point to note is this: no matter what sort of -computer you're using and no matter what font encoding it uses -normally, \afm files for text fonts are almost always in |8a| -encoding (Adobe standard encoding), so the \afm files when renamed -normally end in |8a|. - -A typical set of four \afm files re-named for use with \fontinst -is this: -\begin{verbatim} - ptmr8r.afm Times-Roman - ptmri8r.afm Times-Italic - ptmb8r.afm Times-Bold - ptmbi8r.afm Times-BoldItalic -\end{verbatim} -Not all \afm files use |8a| encoding. If you open an \afm file -using a text editor, you'll see a line looking like this somewhere -near the top: -\begin{verbatim} - EncodingScheme AdobeStandardEncoding -\end{verbatim} -and if you see exactly that, the \afm file should end with |8a|. -If you see something like this: -\begin{verbatim} - EncodingScheme FontSpecific -\end{verbatim} -have a look at the name of the font in the \afm file. If you see -something like this: -\begin{verbatim} - FontName AGaramondExp-Regular - FullName Adobe Garamond Regular Expert -\end{verbatim} -you have an `expert' encoded font on your hands, and the \afm file -should end with |8x| to indicate this to \fontinst. An |8x| -encoded font contains extra glyphs like old style numerals, small -capital letters, more ligatures, and so on. - -%% UV: taken out -- repeated below -%% -%If you have an expert font, you can tell \fontinst to use it when -%it's processing a \verb|\latinfamily| command by putting an `|x|' -%on the end of the family name: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \latinfamily{padx}{} -%\end{verbatim} -%If you want to tell \fontinst to use expert fonts to install fonts -%with old style numerals, you can do so by putting an `|j|' on the -%end of the family name: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \latinfamily{padj}{} -%\end{verbatim} - -The |\latinfamily| command is used like this: -\begin{decl} - |\latinfamily|\arg{family}\arg{commands} -\end{decl} -This installs a Latin family of fonts. - -For example, to install Adobe Times, you say: -\begin{verbatim} - \latinfamily{ptm}{} -\end{verbatim} -The \textit{commands} issued by \LaTeX\ each time a font from that -family is loaded. This is most often used with typewriter fonts, -to switch off hyphenation. For example, Adobe Courier can be -installed with: -\begin{verbatim} - \latinfamily{pcr}{\hyphenchar\font=-1} -\end{verbatim} -Once the installation is over (which may take some time) the fonts -can be used in \LaTeX\ by selecting an appropriate -\verb|\fontfamily|, for example Adobe Times can be selected with: -\begin{verbatim} - \fontfamily{ptm}\selectfont -\end{verbatim} -If the fourth letter of the family name is `|x|' then \fontinst -will use expert fonts in creating the fonts. If the fourth letter -is `|j|' (or for backward compatibility `|9|') then \fontinst will -use expert fonts to create fonts with old style digits. - -For example, to install Adobe Garamond using expert fonts, you say: -\begin{verbatim} - \latinfamily{padx}{} -\end{verbatim} -To install Adobe Garamond using expert fonts with oldstyle digits, -you say: -\begin{verbatim} - \latinfamily{padj}{} -\end{verbatim} - -When you have expert fonts, and you've told \fontinst to use -them, it will carry on as normal, but the resulting font family -will have the name `|padx|' or `|padj|', and it will use expert -glyphs whenever possible, so you'll have a real (rather than -faked) small caps font, real (rather than faked) `ffl' ligatures, -and so on. - -Before using these commands, you will need to make sure that you -have the Adobe Font Metric (\afm) files for the fonts, and that -they have appropriate names. The \fontinst package uses the -\LaTeX\ convention for naming fonts, and uses a \emph{font family} -name which consists of: -\begin{itemize} -\item a \emph{supplier} (or foundry), such as `|p|' for Adobe. -\item a \emph{typeface}, such as `|ad|' for Adobe Garamond. -\item up to two \emph{variants}, such as `|j|' or `|x|' for `old - style digits' or `expert'. -\end{itemize} -So the family name `|padj|' indicates Adobe Garamond with old -style digits. Note that the variants `|j|' or `|x|' are -interpreted by \fontinst itself and do not appear in external font -names, whereas other variants are passed through as part of the -font names. (This is needed for families which have a sans serif -or typewriter variant.) - -The \emph{supplier} must be one letter, and the \emph{typeface} -must be two (this is an attempt to fit all filenames into MS-DOS -format). Each variant is one letter. The full list of foundries, -typefaces, shapes and variants is given in Karl Berry's -`\emph{Filenames for fonts}' (available by anonymous FTP from -\url{ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/info/fontname}), but the more -common ones are given in -Tables~\ref{Tab:foundry}--\ref{Tab:typeface}. - -\begin{table}[!t] -\begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth} - \small - \begin{tabular}{ll} - |b| & Bitstream \\ - |f| & `free' (public domain) \\ - |h| & Bigelow \& Holmes \\ - |i| & ITC \\ - |l| & Linotype \\ - |m| & Monotype \\ - |p| & Adobe (|p| for \PS) \\ - |r| & `raw' (obsolete) \\ - |u| & URW \\ - |z| & bizarre - \end{tabular} - \caption{A partial list of foundries} - \label{Tab:foundry} - \begin{tabular}{ll} - |a| & alternate \\ - |d| & display, titling \\ - |f| & fraktur, handtooled \\ - |j| & oldstyle digits \\ - |n| & informal, casual \\ - |p| & ornaments \\ - |s| & sans serif \\ - |t| & typewriter \\ - |w| & script, handwriting, swash \\ - |x| & expert \\ - \end{tabular} - \caption{A partial list of variants} - \label{Tab:variant} - \begin{tabular}{ll} - |c| & small caps \\ - |i| & italic \\ - |o| & oblique (i.e.,~slanted) \\ - |u| & unslanted italic \\ - \end{tabular} - \caption{A partial list of shapes} - \label{Tab:shape} -\end{minipage} -\begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth} - \small - \begin{tabular}{ll} - |ac| & Adobe Caslon \\ - |ad| & Adobe Garamond \\ - |ag| & Avantgarde \\ - |bb| & Bembo \\ - |bd| & Bodoni \\ - |bk| & Bookman \\ - |bv| & Baskerville \\ - |ca| & Caslon \\ - |ch| & Charter \\ - |cr| & Courier \\ - |fr| & Frutiger \\ - |fu| & Futura \\ - |gl| & Galliard \\ - |gm| & Garamond \\ - |gs| & Gill Sans \\ - |hv| & Helvetica \\ - |mn| & Minion \\ - |lc| & Lucida \\ - |lh| & Lucida Bright \\ - |ls| & Lucida Sans \\ - |nb| & New Baskerville \\ - |nc| & New Century Schoolbook \\ - |op| & Optima \\ - |pl| & Palatino \\ - |sy| & Symbol \\ - |tm| & Times \\ - |ut| & Utopia \\ - |zc| & Zapf Chancery \\ - |zd| & Zapf Dingbats \\ - \end{tabular} - \caption{A partial list of faces} - \label{Tab:typeface} -\end{minipage} -\end{table} - -The \fontinst package uses Karl Berry's naming scheme for \afm -files. The full naming scheme is rather more flexible than the -subset used by \fontinst, which uses filenames consisting of: -\begin{itemize} -\item a \emph{supplier}, such as `|p|' for Adobe. -\item a \emph{typeface}, such as `|hv|' for Helvetica. -\item a \emph{weight}, such as `|r|' for regular. -\item up to two \emph{shapes} or \emph{variants}, such as `|o|' - for oblique. -\item an \emph{encoding}, such as `|7t|' for Knuth's 7-bit \TeX{} - encoding. -\item an optional \emph{width}, such as `|n|' for narrow. -\item a \emph{file extension}, such as `\texttt{.tfm}' - for \TeX{} Font Metric. -\end{itemize} -So the filename name `\texttt{phvro7tn.tfm}' indicates Adobe -Helvetica regular oblique narrow, in the 7-bit \TeX{} encoding. - -The full list of shapes, encodings and weights is given in Karl -Berry's `\emph{Filenames for fonts}', but the more common ones are -given in Tables~\ref{Tab:shape}--\ref{Tab:weight}. - -\begin{table} -\begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth} - \small - \begin{tabular}{ll} - |b| & bold \\ - |c| & black \\ - |d| & demibold \\ - |h| & heavy \\ - |k| & book \\ - |l| & light \\ - |m| & medium \\ - |r| & regular \\ - |s| & semibold \\ - |u| & ultra bold \\ - |x| & extra bold \\ - \end{tabular} - \caption{A partial list of weights} - \label{Tab:weight} - \begin{tabular}{ll} - |c| & condensed \\ - |n| & narrow \\ - |w| & wide \\ - |x| & extended \\ - \end{tabular} - \caption{A partial list of widths} - \label{Tab:width} -\end{minipage} -\begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth} - \small - \begin{tabular}{ll} - |8a| & Adobe Standard \\ - |8x| & Adobe Expert \\ - |8r| & \TeX{} 8-bit `raw' (\texttt{TeXBase1}) \\ - |8y| & \TeX{} 8-bit `raw' (\texttt{TeXnANSI}) \\ - |7t| & \TeX{} 7-bit text (\texttt{OT1}) \\ - |7m| & \TeX{} 7-bit math italic (\texttt{OML}) \\ - |7y| & \TeX{} 7-bit math symbol (\texttt{OMS}) \\ - |7v| & \TeX{} 7-bit math extension (\texttt{OMX}) \\ - |8t| & \TeX{} 8-bit text (\texttt{T1}) \\ - |8c| & \TeX{} 8-bit text symbols (\texttt{TS1}) \\ - |9t| & \TeX{} 7-bit text with expert glyphs \\ - |9o| & \TeX{} 7-bit text with expert glyphs \\ - & and old-style digits \\ - |9e| & \TeX{} 8-bit text with expert glyphs \\ - |9d| & \TeX{} 8-bit text with expert glyphs \\ - & and old-style digits \\ - |9c| & \TeX{} 8-bit symbols with expert glyphs \\ - & and old-style digits \\ - \end{tabular} - \caption{A partial list of encodings} -\end{minipage} -\end{table} - -For example, to install Adobe Garamond including the expert fonts, you -would need to rename the \afm files: -\begin{center} -\begin{small} -\begin{tabular}{lll} - \emph{Adobe name} & \emph{ATM name} & \emph{Fontinst name} \\ - |AGaramond-Bold.afm| & |gdb_____.afm| & |padb8a.afm| \\ - |AGaramond-BoldItalic.afm| & |gdbi____.afm| & |padbi8a.afm| \\ - |AGaramond-Italic.afm| & |gdi_____.afm| & |padri8a.afm| \\ - |AGaramond-Regular.afm| & |gdrg____.afm| & |padr8a.afm| \\ - |AGaramond-Semibold.afm| & |gdsb____.afm| & |pads8a.afm| \\ - |AGaramond-SemiboldItalic.afm| & |gdsbi___.afm| & |padsi8a.afm| \\ - |AGaramondExp-Bold.afm| & |geb_____.afm| & |padb8x.afm| \\ - |AGaramondExp-BoldItalic.afm| & |gebi____.afm| & |padbi8x.afm| \\ - |AGaramondExp-Italic.afm| & |gei_____.afm| & |padri8x.afm| \\ - |AGaramondExp-Regular.afm| & |gerg____.afm| & |padr8x.afm| \\ - |AGaramondExp-Semibold.afm| & |gesb____.afm| & |pads8x.afm| \\ - |AGaramondExp-SemiboldItalic.afm| & |gesbi___.afm| & |padsi8x.afm| \\ - |AGaramond-RegularSC.afm| & |gdsc____.afm| & |padrc8a.afm| \\ - |AGaramond-SemiboldSC.afm| & |gdsbs___.afm| & |padsc8a.afm| \\ -\end{tabular} -\end{small} -\end{center} -You can then run \TeX{} on the following document to install the -Adobe Garamond family: -\begin{verbatim} - \input fontinst.sty - \latinfamily{padx}{} - \latinfamily{padj}{} - \bye -\end{verbatim} -Not all font families can be installed using the \verb|\latinfamily| -command, nor does it always produce optimal results. The main -interfaces to \fontinst are at a slightly lower level, where all font -names appear explicitly in command arguments, and at that level it is -possible to fine tune the font generation. The \verb|\latinfamily| -command is mainly a clever collection of macros which expand to a -mostly fixed\footnote{Commands that would refer to files which are -not present are skipped, and in some cases there is a ``Plan B'' -when ``Plan A'' would have made use of such a nonexistent file, but -that is about it.} sequence of lower level \fontinst commands. - -\begin{bfseries} - Descriptions of the sub-\verb|\latinfamily| commands can be found - in the main \fontinst manual. -\end{bfseries} - - - -\section{More on the \cs{latinfamily} command} - -The \verb|\latinfamily| command is essentially a short-cut to save you -preparing a huge file with many different \fontinst commands in it. - -It takes \afm or \mtx files as the source of font metric data to work -with. Usually, you have a set of \afm files. They must be named -according to a subset of the \Fontnamekb naming scheme. To illustrate -the process, here is an edited part of the console log from a use of -\verb|\latinfamily|: -\begin{verbatim} - \latinfamily{pad}{} -\end{verbatim} -This log does not show \fontinst `in action'; it's just to illustrate -which fonts are looked for when you use the \verb|\latinfamily| -command. -\begin{verbatim} - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,n,>> seek padr8r.mtx - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,sc,>> seek padrc8r.mtx - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,sl,>> seek padro8r.mtx - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,it,>> seek padri8r.mtx - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,n,c>> seek padr8rn.mtx - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,sc,c>> seek padrc8rn.mtx - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,sl,c>> seek padro8rn.mtx - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,it,c>> seek padri8rn.mtx -\end{verbatim} - -The important point to notice is that \fontinst needs an |8r| encoded -\mtx file for each font when you are using the \verb|latinfamily| -command. If it can't find an |8r| encoded \mtx file, it'll look for -for an |8a| encoded \afm file. It will automatically turn the file it -finds into an |8r| encoded \mtx file. So when \fontinst says -`\verb|seek padr8r.mtx|', it is in fact looking for -\texttt{padr8r.mtx} and \texttt{padr8a.afm}. Whatever it finds, it -will end up with \verb|padr8r.mtx| to work on. - -The first line of the log shows that \fontinst is trying to create a -\vpl file for |pad/m/n|. That is, font family |pad| (Adobe Garamond), -font series |m| (normal `book' or `regular' weight), and font shape -|n| (normal upright). - -If it finds what it's looking for, it will create the files: -\begin{verbatim} - padr7t.vpl - padr8t.vpl - padr8c.vpl -\end{verbatim} -And add these lines to the given \fd files: -\begin{verbatim} - OT1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{pad}{m}{n}{<<->> padr7t}{} - T1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{m}{n}{<<->> padr8t}{} - TS1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{TS1}{pad}{m}{n}{<<->> padr8c}{} -\end{verbatim} -This means you will have three new fonts to use in \LaTeX: the OT1, T1 -and TS1 encoded versions of |pad/m/n|. You'll be able to select (say) -|T1/pad/m/n| by saying: -\begin{verbatim} - \fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{pad}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\selectfont -\end{verbatim} -This is the clumsiest way of selecting that particular font, but I've -done it to illustrate exactly what's happening. - -The next line: -\begin{verbatim} - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,sc,>> seek padrc8r.mtx -\end{verbatim} -shows that \fontinst is trying to install a small caps font. If you -have a real small caps metric file named \texttt{padrc8r.mtx} (don't -forget it'll look for an |8a| encoded \afm file), \fontinst will go -ahead and create the \vpl file and \fd file entry as expected. - -But you don't normally have a real small caps font, so \fontinst will -quite happily produce a fake small caps font. To do this, it looks -for a suitable metric file by dropping the `|c|': -\begin{quote} - `Hmm\ldots\ I can't find \texttt{padrc8r}, so I'll look for - \texttt{padr8r}.' -\end{quote} -And you will eventually have: -\begin{verbatim} - padrc7t.vpl - padrc8t.vpl -\end{verbatim} -And add these lines to the given \fd files: -\begin{verbatim} - OT1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{pad}{m}{sc}{<<->> padrc7t}{} - T1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{m}{sc}{<<->> padrc8t}{} -\end{verbatim} -(Note that it won't install a TS1-encoded small caps font because -TS1 is a text symbol font, which would look the same in the upright -and small caps shape.) - -The next log line shows \fontinst trying to create a \vpl for the -oblique version of Adobe Garamond: -\begin{verbatim} - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,sl,>> seek padro8r.mtx -\end{verbatim} -It's quite usual for an oblique version to be unavailable, but -\fontinst has a way round this: it can fake an oblique font from the -corresponding `straight' version: -\begin{quote} - `Oh dear: I can't find \texttt{padro8r}, so I'll look for - \texttt{padr8r} and use clever maths to fake a slanted version.' -\end{quote} -This is not as straightforward as the small caps case. \Fontinst -only works out what the metrics ought to be if the entire font is -slanted to the right. It's up to the DVI driver to actually print a -slanted font. \Dvips can do this. - -You will eventually have: -\begin{verbatim} - padro7t.vpl - padro8t.vpl - padro8c.vpl -\end{verbatim} -And these lines added to the given \fd files: -\begin{verbatim} - OT1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{pad}{m}{sl}{<<->> padro7t}{} - T1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{m}{sl}{<<->> padro8t}{} - TS1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{TS1}{pad}{m}{sl}{<<->> padro8c}{} -\end{verbatim} - -The next line is straightforward: -\begin{verbatim} - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,it,>> seek padri8r.mtx -\end{verbatim} -If \fontinst can't find a suitable metrics file (\texttt{padri8r.mtx} -or \texttt{padri8a.afm}), it carries on without doing anything. If it -does find a suitable metrics file, it churns away until you will -eventually have: -\begin{verbatim} - padri7t.vpl - padri8t.vpl - padri8c.vpl -\end{verbatim} -And these lines added to the given \fd files: -\begin{verbatim} - OT1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{pad}{m}{it}{<<->> padri7t}{} - T1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{m}{it}{<<->> padri8t}{} - TS1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{TS1}{pad}{m}{it}{<<->> padri8c}{} -\end{verbatim} - -The next line is a bit different. \Fontinst is now trying to create a -\vpl file for a \emph{condensed} font: -\begin{verbatim} - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,n,c>> seek padr8rn.mtx -\end{verbatim} -If it finds a suitable metric file (Adobe Garamond, medium weight, -normal upright shape, condensed), it will eventually produce: -\begin{verbatim} - padr7tn.vpl - padr8tn.vpl - padr8cn.vpl -\end{verbatim} -And these lines added to the given \fd files: -\begin{verbatim} - OT1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{pad}{mc}{n}{<<->> padr7tn}{} - T1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{mc}{n}{<<->> padr8tn}{} - TS1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{TS1}{pad}{mc}{n}{<<->> padr8cn}{} -\end{verbatim} -There is no standard \LaTeX\ command like \verb|\bfseries| to select -the medium condensed (|mc|) series created here. If you want to use -this font, you must do something like: -\begin{verbatim} - \fontfamily{pad}\fontseries{mc}\selectfont -\end{verbatim} -If it doesn't find a suitable metric file for a narrow series, -\fontinst will just skip over and continue, unless you specifically -tell it to fake a narrow series. - -And so the process continues: \fontinst attempts to create \vpl files -for condensed versions of all the font shapes met so far, and then -goes on to: -\begin{verbatim} - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,n,>> seek padb8r.mtx -\end{verbatim} -And again, if it finds a suitable metric file (\texttt{padb8r.mtx} or -\texttt{padb8a.afm}), it'll potter off and create the files: -\begin{verbatim} - padb7t.vpl - padb8t.vpl - padb8c.vpl -\end{verbatim} -And these lines added to the given \fd files: -\begin{verbatim} - OT1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{pad}{b}{n}{<<->> padb7t}{} - T1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{b}{n}{<<->> padb8t}{} - TS1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{TS1}{pad}{b}{n}{<<->> padb8c}{} -\end{verbatim} -With this step done, fontinst will try to create \vpl files for the -small caps, slanted, and italic versions of |pad/b|; and then it'll -try to create condensed versions of all those: -\begin{verbatim} - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,n,>> seek padb8r.mtx - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,sc,>> seek padbc8r.mtx - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,sl,>> seek padbo8r.mtx - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,it,>> seek padbi8r.mtx - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,n,c>> seek padb8rn.mtx - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,sc,c>> seek padbc8rn.mtx - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,sl,c>> seek padbo8rn.mtx - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,it,c>> seek padbi8rn.mtx -\end{verbatim} -If it manages to find the files it needs to create the \vpl files to -use all those fonts with \LaTeX, you'll end up with the following -lines in the T1 \fd file (I've ignored the OT1 \fd file to save some -space): -\begin{verbatim} - \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{b} {n} {<<->> padb8t}{} - \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{b} {sc}{<<->> padbc8t}{} - \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{b} {sl}{<<->> padbo8t}{} - \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{b} {it}{<<->> padbi8t}{} - \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{bc}{n} {<<->> padb8tn}{} - \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{bc}{sc}{<<->> padbc8tn}{} - \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{bc}{sl}{<<->> padbo8tn}{} - \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{bc}{it}{<<->> pckbi8tn}{} -\end{verbatim} -To translate into English: Adobe Garamond bold in `normal', small -caps, slanted, and italic versions, as well as condensed versions of -all four. - -Again, because there's no convenient way of selecting the condensed -versions with existing \LaTeX\ commands, you need to say something -like: -\begin{verbatim} - \fontfamily{pad}\fontseries{bc}\selectfont -\end{verbatim} -to use the bold condensed (|bc|) versions of this font; you can of -course use \verb|\itshape|, \verb|\scshape|, \verb|\slshape|, and -\verb|upshape| to switch between the italic, small caps, slanted, and -`normal' versions of Adobe Garamond bold condensed once you've got -|pad/bc| selected. - -So far, you've seen \verb|\latinfamily| look at two different weights -and two different widths. For each weight, \verb|\latinfamily| will -try and install eight different fonts as you can see above. It will -try and install the same eight different fonts for each of the -following different weights: -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{lll} - \emph{\LaTeX} & \emph{Fontname} & \emph{description} \\ - |ul| & |a| & ultra light \\ - |el| & |i| & extra light \\ - |l| & |l| & light \\ - |m| & |k|, |r| & book, regular \\ - |mb| & |m| & medium \\ - |db| & |d| & demi bold \\ - |sb| & |s| & semi bold \\ - |b| & |b| & bold \\ - |eb| & |c|, |h|, |x| & black, heavy, extra bold \\ - |ub| & |u| & ultra bold -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -The \LaTeX\ column contains the label that will be used in the -\verb|\DeclareFontShape| command to specify the font series. The -\Fontnamekb column contains the width specifier used to name the font -metric file that \fontinst will look for in that case. - -In other words, at some stage \fontinst will look for: -\begin{verbatim} - INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,sb,n,>> seek pads8r.mtx -\end{verbatim} -and if it finds a suitable metric file (\texttt{pads8r.mtx} or -\texttt{pads8a.afm}), it will create: -\begin{verbatim} - pads7t.vpl - pads8t.vpl - pads8c.vpl -\end{verbatim} -and \fd file entries like this: -\begin{verbatim} - OT1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{pad}{sb}{n}{<<->> pads7t}{} - T1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{sb}{n}{<<->> pads8t}{} - TS1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{TS1}{pad}{sb}{n}{<<->> pads8c}{} -\end{verbatim} -and since |sb| is not a normal \LaTeX\ font series, you'll need to use -something like: -\begin{verbatim} - \fontfamily{pad}\fontseries{sb}\selectfont -\end{verbatim} -to use this font. - -% For example, \verb|\latinfamily{ptm}{}| is -% syntactic sugar for: -% \begin{verbatim} -% \transformfont{ptmr8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{ptmr8a}}} -% \transformfont{ptmri8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{ptmri8a}}} -% \transformfont{ptmb8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{ptmb8a}}} -% \transformfont{ptmbi8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{ptmbi8a}}} -% \transformfont{ptmro8r}{\slantfont{167}{\frommtx{ptmr8r}}} -% \transformfont{ptmbo8r}{\slantfont{167}{\frommtx{ptmb8r}}} -% \installfonts -% \installfamily{T1}{ptm}{} -% \installfamily{OT1}{ptm}{} -% \installfont{ptmr8t}{ptmr8r,latin}{T1}{T1}{ptm}{m}{n}{} -% \installfont{ptmr7t}{ptmr8r,latin}{OT1}{OT1}{ptm}{m}{n}{} -% \installfont{ptmrc8t}{ptmr8r,latin}{T1c}{T1}{ptm}{m}{sc}{} -% \installfont{ptmrc7t}{ptmr8r,latin}{OT1c}{OT1}{ptm}{m}{sc}{} -% \installfont{ptmri8t}{ptmri8r,latin}{T1}{T1}{ptm}{m}{it}{} -% \installfont{ptmri7t}{ptmri8r,latin}{OT1i}{OT1}{ptm}{m}{it}{} -% \installfont{ptmro8t}{ptmro8r,latin}{T1}{T1}{ptm}{m}{sl}{} -% \installfont{ptmro7t}{ptmro8r,latin}{OT1}{OT1}{ptm}{m}{sl}{} -% \installfont{ptmb8t}{ptmb8r,latin}{T1}{T1}{ptm}{b}{n}{} -% \installfont{ptmb7t}{ptmb8r,latin}{OT1}{OT1}{ptm}{b}{n}{} -% \installfont{ptmbc8t}{ptmb8r,latin}{T1c}{T1}{ptm}{b}{sc}{} -% \installfont{ptmbc7t}{ptmb8r,latin}{OT1c}{OT1}{ptm}{b}{sc}{} -% \installfont{ptmbi8t}{ptmbi8r,latin}{T1}{T1}{ptm}{b}{it}{} -% \installfont{ptmbi7t}{ptmbi8r,latin}{OT1i}{OT1}{ptm}{b}{it}{} -% \installfont{ptmbo8t}{ptmbo8r,latin}{T1}{T1}{ptm}{b}{sl}{} -% \installfont{ptmbo7t}{ptmbo8r,latin}{OT1}{OT1}{ptm}{b}{sl}{} -% \endinstallfonts -% \end{verbatim} - - -The \texttt{basicex.tex} file in the \texttt{examples} directory of -the main \fontinst distribution is an annotated command file which -does roughly the same things as the \verb|\latinfamily| command for -the \texttt{pad} family of fonts. - - -\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/roadmap.eps b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/roadmap.eps deleted file mode 100644 index 8ca14df79de..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/roadmap.eps +++ /dev/null @@ -1,265 +0,0 @@ -%!PS-Adobe-2.0 EPSF-2.0 -%%Title: roadmap.fig -%%Creator: fig2dev Version 3.1 Patchlevel 1 -%%CreationDate: Sat Sep 16 18:24:06 1995 -%%For: alanje@rsuna.crn.cogs.susx.ac.uk (Alan Jeffrey, Research Fellow) -%%Orientation: Portrait -%%BoundingBox: 0 0 298 312 -%%Pages: 0 -%%BeginSetup -%%IncludeFeature: *PageSize A4 -%%EndSetup -%%EndComments -/$F2psDict 200 dict def -$F2psDict begin -$F2psDict /mtrx matrix put -/col-1 {} def -/col0 {0.000 0.000 0.000 srgb} bind def -/col1 {0.000 0.000 1.000 srgb} bind def -/col2 {0.000 1.000 0.000 srgb} bind def -/col3 {0.000 1.000 1.000 srgb} bind def -/col4 {1.000 0.000 0.000 srgb} bind def -/col5 {1.000 0.000 1.000 srgb} bind def -/col6 {1.000 1.000 0.000 srgb} bind def -/col7 {1.000 1.000 1.000 srgb} bind def -/col8 {0.000 0.000 0.560 srgb} bind def -/col9 {0.000 0.000 0.690 srgb} bind def -/col10 {0.000 0.000 0.820 srgb} bind def -/col11 {0.530 0.810 1.000 srgb} bind def -/col12 {0.000 0.560 0.000 srgb} bind def -/col13 {0.000 0.690 0.000 srgb} bind def -/col14 {0.000 0.820 0.000 srgb} bind def -/col15 {0.000 0.560 0.560 srgb} bind def -/col16 {0.000 0.690 0.690 srgb} bind def -/col17 {0.000 0.820 0.820 srgb} bind def -/col18 {0.560 0.000 0.000 srgb} bind def -/col19 {0.690 0.000 0.000 srgb} bind def -/col20 {0.820 0.000 0.000 srgb} bind def -/col21 {0.560 0.000 0.560 srgb} bind def -/col22 {0.690 0.000 0.690 srgb} bind def -/col23 {0.820 0.000 0.820 srgb} bind def -/col24 {0.500 0.190 0.000 srgb} bind def -/col25 {0.630 0.250 0.000 srgb} bind def -/col26 {0.750 0.380 0.000 srgb} bind def -/col27 {1.000 0.500 0.500 srgb} bind def -/col28 {1.000 0.630 0.630 srgb} bind def -/col29 {1.000 0.750 0.750 srgb} bind def -/col30 {1.000 0.880 0.880 srgb} bind def -/col31 {1.000 0.840 0.000 srgb} bind def - -end -save --112.0 334.0 translate -1 -1 scale - -/clp {closepath} bind def -/ef {eofill} bind def -/gr {grestore} bind def -/gs {gsave} bind def -/l {lineto} bind def -/m {moveto} bind def -/n {newpath} bind def -/s {stroke} bind def -/slc {setlinecap} bind def -/slj {setlinejoin} bind def -/slw {setlinewidth} bind def -/srgb {setrgbcolor} bind def -/rot {rotate} bind def -/sc {scale} bind def -/tr {translate} bind def -/tnt {dup dup currentrgbcolor - 4 -2 roll dup 1 exch sub 3 -1 roll mul add - 4 -2 roll dup 1 exch sub 3 -1 roll mul add - 4 -2 roll dup 1 exch sub 3 -1 roll mul add srgb} - bind def -/shd {dup dup currentrgbcolor 4 -2 roll mul 4 -2 roll mul - 4 -2 roll mul srgb} bind def - /DrawEllipse { - /endangle exch def - /startangle exch def - /yrad exch def - /xrad exch def - /y exch def - /x exch def - /savematrix mtrx currentmatrix def - x y tr xrad yrad sc 0 0 1 startangle endangle arc - closepath - savematrix setmatrix - } def - -/$F2psBegin {$F2psDict begin /$F2psEnteredState save def} def -/$F2psEnd {$F2psEnteredState restore end} def -%%EndProlog - -$F2psBegin -10 setmiterlimit - 0.06000 0.06000 sc -7.500 slw -% Arc -n 4813.51 1452.05 m 4800.00 1575.00 l 4754.06 1460.15 l gs col-1 s gr -n 4284.38 1645.31 520.40 -91.03 -7.77 arc -gs col-1 s gr - -% Arc -n 3045.94 1460.15 m 3000.00 1575.00 l 2986.49 1452.05 l gs col-1 s gr -n 3515.62 1645.31 520.40 -88.97 -172.23 arcn -gs col-1 s gr - -% Arc -n 2771.84 3251.35 m 2775.00 3375.00 l 2714.02 3267.38 l gs col-1 s gr -n 2279.17 3512.50 514.55 -84.89 -15.50 arc -gs col-1 s gr - -% Arc -n 3285.98 3267.38 m 3225.00 3375.00 l 3228.16 3251.35 l gs col-1 s gr -n 3720.83 3512.50 514.55 -95.11 -164.50 arcn -gs col-1 s gr - -% Arc -n 4247.24 2906.08 m 4125.00 2925.00 l 4223.95 2850.78 l gs col-1 s gr -n 3525.00 1500.00 1546.16 39.09 67.17 arc -gs col-1 s gr - -% Arc -n 3403.37 4702.50 m 3525.00 4725.00 l 3407.09 4762.39 l gs col-1 s gr -n 3493.27 4214.42 511.56 164.63 86.44 arcn -gs col-1 s gr - -% Arc -n 4394.64 4681.42 m 4275.00 4650.00 l 4395.35 4621.42 l gs col-1 s gr -n 4291.72 3239.01 1411.09 -3.62 90.68 arc -gs col-1 s gr - -% Arc -n 4398.18 4811.29 m 4275.00 4800.00 l 4389.00 4752.00 l gs col-1 s gr -n 3787.50 1650.00 3187.50 28.07 81.20 arc -gs col-1 s gr - -% Arc -n 4306.30 4511.76 m 4200.00 4575.00 l 4264.03 4469.17 l gs col-1 s gr -n 2769.64 3133.93 2030.42 0.45 45.21 arc -gs col-1 s gr - -% Ellipse -n 3900 2962 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr - -% Ellipse -n 3900 562 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr - -% Ellipse -n 3900 1762 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr - -% Ellipse -n 3000 1762 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr - -% Ellipse -n 4800 1762 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr - -% Ellipse -n 4800 2962 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr - -% Ellipse -n 5700 2962 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr - -% Ellipse -n 6600 2962 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr - -% Ellipse -n 2100 2962 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr - -% Ellipse -n 3000 4162 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr - -% Ellipse -n 3900 5362 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr - -% Polyline -n 3525 975 m 4275 975 l 4275 1275 l 3525 1275 l clp gs col-1 s gr -% Polyline -n 3525 2175 m 4275 2175 l 4275 2475 l 3525 2475 l clp gs col-1 s gr -% Polyline -n 4425 2175 m 5175 2175 l 5175 2475 l 4425 2475 l clp gs col-1 s gr -% Polyline -n 2625 3375 m 3375 3375 l 3375 3675 l 2625 3675 l clp gs col-1 s gr -% Polyline -n 3525 4575 m 4275 4575 l 4275 4875 l 3525 4875 l clp gs col-1 s gr -% Polyline -n 3900 750 m 3900 975 l gs col-1 s gr -n 3930.00 855.00 m 3900.00 975.00 l 3870.00 855.00 l gs col-1 s gr -% Polyline -n 3900 1275 m 3900 1575 l gs col-1 s gr -n 3930.00 1455.00 m 3900.00 1575.00 l 3870.00 1455.00 l gs col-1 s gr -% Polyline -n 3900 1950 m 3900 2175 l gs col-1 s gr -n 3930.00 2055.00 m 3900.00 2175.00 l 3870.00 2055.00 l gs col-1 s gr -% Polyline -n 3900 2475 m 3900 2775 l gs col-1 s gr -n 3930.00 2655.00 m 3900.00 2775.00 l 3870.00 2655.00 l gs col-1 s gr -% Polyline -n 4800 1950 m 4800 2175 l gs col-1 s gr -n 4830.00 2055.00 m 4800.00 2175.00 l 4770.00 2055.00 l gs col-1 s gr -% Polyline -n 4800 2475 m 4800 2775 l gs col-1 s gr -n 4830.00 2655.00 m 4800.00 2775.00 l 4770.00 2655.00 l gs col-1 s gr -% Polyline -n 3000 1950 m 3000 3375 l gs col-1 s gr -n 3030.00 3255.00 m 3000.00 3375.00 l 2970.00 3255.00 l gs col-1 s gr -% Polyline -n 3000 3675 m 3000 3975 l gs col-1 s gr -n 3030.00 3855.00 m 3000.00 3975.00 l 2970.00 3855.00 l gs col-1 s gr -% Polyline -n 3900 3150 m 3900 4575 l gs col-1 s gr -n 3930.00 4455.00 m 3900.00 4575.00 l 3870.00 4455.00 l gs col-1 s gr -% Polyline -n 3900 4875 m 3900 5175 l gs col-1 s gr -n 3930.00 5055.00 m 3900.00 5175.00 l 3870.00 5055.00 l gs col-1 s gr -/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont -3900 3000 m -gs 1 -1 sc (tfm) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr -/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont -3900 600 m -gs 1 -1 sc (afm) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr -/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont -3900 1800 m -gs 1 -1 sc (pl) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr -/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont -4800 1800 m -gs 1 -1 sc (vpl) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr -/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont -3000 1800 m -gs 1 -1 sc (fd) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr -/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont -4800 3000 m -gs 1 -1 sc (vf) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr -/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont -5700 3000 m -gs 1 -1 sc (pfa) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr -/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont -6600 3000 m -gs 1 -1 sc (pfb) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr -/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont -2100 3000 m -gs 1 -1 sc (tex) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr -/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont -3000 4200 m -gs 1 -1 sc (dvi) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr -/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont -3900 5400 m -gs 1 -1 sc (ps) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr -/Palatino-Italic findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont -3900 1175 m -gs 1 -1 sc (fontinst) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr -/Palatino-Italic findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont -3900 2375 m -gs 1 -1 sc (pltotf) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr -/Palatino-Italic findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont -4800 2375 m -gs 1 -1 sc (vptovf) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr -/Palatino-Italic findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont -3000 3575 m -gs 1 -1 sc (latex) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr -/Palatino-Italic findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont -3900 4775 m -gs 1 -1 sc (dvips) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr -$F2psEnd -restore diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/talks/et99-font-tables.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/talks/et99-font-tables.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8d6c2b593c7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/talks/et99-font-tables.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/talks/et99-font-tutorial.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/talks/et99-font-tutorial.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4ae8a1eeb75..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/talks/et99-font-tutorial.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/comparemetrics.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/comparemetrics.sty deleted file mode 100644 index 7864da89731..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/comparemetrics.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,941 +0,0 @@ -% We start by making some default catcode assignments, in case we are -% using ini\TeX{}. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*pkg> -\catcode`\{=1 -\catcode`\}=2 -\catcode`\#=6 -\catcode`\^=7 -%</pkg> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \package{fontinst} uses some unusual, but convenient, settings of -% |\catcode|. |@| and |_| are made letters, |~| is made a space, and -% space and newline are ignored. Before setting those however, we save -% the current values of the catcodes, so that they can be restored at -% the end of \texttt{fontinst.sty}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*pkg> -\edef\spacecatcode{\the\catcode`\ } -\edef\nlcatcode{\the\catcode`\^^M} -\edef\atcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} -\edef\underscorecatcode{\the\catcode`\_} -\edef\tildecatcode{\the\catcode`\~} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\catcode`\ =9 -\catcode`\^^M=9 -\catcode`\@=11 -\catcode`\_=11 -\catcode`\~=10 -%</pkg> -% \end{macrocode} -% - - -\newlinechar=`\^^J - -% \begin{macro}{\a_read} -% \begin{macro}{\b_read} -% \begin{macro}{\a_filelineno} -% \begin{macro}{\b_filelineno} -% These control sequences are used for keeping track of the ``physical'' -% side of the two input files. |\a_read| and |\b_read| are the stream -% numbers. |\a_filelineno| and |\b_filelineno| are the respective -% line numbers of the lines most recently read from these files. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newread\a_read -\newread\b_read -\newcount\a_filelineno -\newcount\b_filelineno -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\a_lineno} -% \begin{macro}{\b_lineno} -% \begin{macro}{\a_bufbase} -% \begin{macro}{\b_bufbase} -% \begin{macro}{\a_bufmid} -% \begin{macro}{\b_bufmid} -% \begin{macro}{\a_buftop} -% \begin{macro}{\b_buftop} -% These count registers are used for managing the buffert of lines -% that are read from the input files when a match between lines is -% being looked for. This buffert consists of lines which are saved in -% the macros -% \begin{quote} -% |\|\meta{letter}|_saved-|\meta{ofs} -% \end{quote} -% where \meta{letter} is |a| or |b| and \meta{ofs} is an integer, -% being the index into the buffert. |\a_bufbase| and |\b_bufbase| -% contain the \meta{ofs} of the first line currently in the buffert, -% whereas |\a_buftop| and |\b_buftop| contain the \meta{ofs} of the -% last such line. |\a_bufmid| and |\b_bufmid| hold the buffert -% positions of the lines which are currently considered the next by -% |\get_next_line|. If \(\mathtt{buftop}<\mathtt{bufmid}\) then the -% buffert is empty. |\a_lineno| and |\b_lineno| are the respective -% line numbers of the |\a_bufbase| and |\b_bufbase| lines. -% -% All these registers should be set globally. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\a_lineno \newcount\b_lineno -\newcount\a_bufbase \newcount\b_bufbase -\newcount\a_bufmid \newcount\b_bufmid -\newcount\a_buftop \newcount\b_buftop -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} -% \end{macro}\end{macro} - - -% \begin{macro}{\get_next_line} -% The |\get_next_line| macro is called as -% \begin{quote} -% |\get_next_line|\marg{letter} -% \end{quote} -% where \meta{letter} is |a| or |b|. This sets the -% |\|\meta{letter}|_line| macro to the next line of that file and -% updates the value of |\|\meta{letter}|_lineno|. -% -% The ``next line'' is normally read from input stream -% |\|\meta{letter}|_read|, but if a line mismatch recently occured -% then it might happen that the next line has already been read from -% the file, and in that case it is taken from one of the -% |\|\meta{letter}|_saved-|\meta{ofs} macros. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\get_next_line#1{ - \ifnum \csname#1_buftop\endcsname<\csname#1_bufmid\endcsname - \ifeof \csname#1_read\endcsname - \x_cs\let{#1_line}\end_of_file_line - \else - \read\csname#1_read\endcsname t\x_cs{o}{#1_line} - \global\advance \csname#1_filelineno\endcsname \@ne - \fi - \else - \expandafter\let \csname#1_line\expandafter\endcsname - \csname#1_saved-\the\csname#1_bufmid\endcsname\endcsname - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - -% \begin{macro}{\end_of_file_line} -% This macro expands to the text \verb*|(ENDOFFILE) | with the -% catcodes it would have if read from an input file. It is used as an -% end-of-file marker. -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup - \catcode`\(=13 - \catcode`\)=13 - \gdef\end_of_file_line{(ENDOFFILE)~} -\endgroup -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - -% \begin{macro}{\the_line} -% The |\the_line| macro is called as -% \begin{quote} -% |\the_line|\marg{letter}\marg{ofs} -% \end{quote} -% where \meta{letter} is |a| or |b|, and \meta{ofs} is a \TeX\ number. -% It expands to the control sequence |\|\meta{letter}|_saved-|^^A -% \meta{ofs}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\the_line#1#2{\csname#1_saved-\number#2\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - -% \begin{macro}{\initialise_search} -% The |\initialise_search| macro sets everything up for a search for -% a match between lines. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\initialise_search{ - \global\a_bufbase=\a_bufmid - \global\b_bufbase=\b_bufmid - \add_to_buffert{a} - \add_to_buffert{b} - \global\advance \a_bufmid \@ne - \global\advance \b_bufmid \@ne -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - -% \begin{macro}{\add_to_buffert} -% The |\add_to_buffert| macro is called as -% \begin{quote} -% |\add_to_buffert|\marg{letter} -% \end{quote} -% It adds the line returned by |\get_next_line| to the corresponding -% buffert (if it wasn't already there) and updates the counters for -% that buffert. After this, the line following the line being put into -% the buffert will be the line that |\get_next_line| returns. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\add_to_buffert#1{ - \ifnum \csname#1_buftop\endcsname<\csname#1_bufmid\endcsname - \expandafter\let - \csname#1_saved-\the\csname#1_bufmid\endcsname - \expandafter\endcsname - \csname#1_line\endcsname - \global\advance \csname#1_buftop\endcsname \@ne - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - - - -\newcount\first_integer -\newcount\second_integer - -% \begin{macro}{\match_lines} -% The |\match_lines| macro tests if two lines can be considered the -% same (up to metrics changes, which need not be small). It is called as -% \begin{quote} -% |\match_lines|\marg{line a}\marg{line b} -% \end{quote} -% \meta{line a} and \meta{line b} may be any amount of text which -% eventually expands to the lines in question. |\match_lines| returns -% its answer by setting the |_a_| switch to |false| (if the lines -% match) or |true| (if the lines don't match). -% -% |\match_lines| also causes the |\first_dimen| and |\second_dimen| -% registers, as well as the |_histogram_dimen_| switch to be updated, -% so it can be immediately followed by a test of the metrics. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\match_lines#1#2{ - \first_integer=\z@ - \second_integer=\z@ - \first_dimen=\z@ - \second_dimen=\z@ - \x_cs\let{string-+}\empty_command - \x_cs\let{string--}\empty_command -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\sign{+} - #1\line_stop - \def\sign{-} - #2\line_stop -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} - \_a_false - \expandafter\ifx \csname cmd-+ \expandafter\endcsname - \csname cmd--\endcsname - \else \_a_true \fi - \ifnum \first_integer=\z@ \else \_a_true \fi - \ifnum \second_integer=\z@ \else \_a_true \fi - \expandafter\ifx \csname string-+ \expandafter\endcsname - \csname string--\endcsname - \else \_a_true \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - -% \begin{macro}{\try_matching} -% \begin{macro}{\a_bufP} -% \begin{macro}{\b_bufP} -% The |\try_matching| descends through the buffert until the |_a_| -% switch gets |false| or it has tried the bottommost lines in the -% buffert. Since |\body| is already defined by the |\loop| in -% |\process_lines|, |\try_matching| uses an explicit end recursion to -% make the loop. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\a_bufP -\newcount\b_bufP -\def\try_matching{ - \global\advance \a_bufP \m@ne - \global\advance \b_bufP \m@ne -% % Begin debug -% \wlog{a_bufbase:~\the\a_bufbase\space\space\space -% b_bufbase:~\the\b_bufbase} -% \wlog{a_bufmid:~\the\a_bufmid\space\space\space -% b_bufmid:~\the\b_bufmid} -% \wlog{a_buftop:~\the\a_buftop\space\space\space -% b_buftop:~\the\b_buftop} -% \wlog{a_bufP:~\the\a_bufP\space\space\space -% b_bufP:~\the\b_bufP} -% \begingroup -% \def\do_left_paren{(}\def\do_right_paren{)} -% \wlog{a_line:~\a_line} -% \wlog{b_buf_line:~\the_line{b}{\b_bufP}} -% \wlog{b_line:~\b_line} -% \wlog{a_buf_line:~\the_line{a}{\a_bufP}^^J} -% \endgroup -% % End debug - \match_lines{\a_line}{\the_line{b}{\b_bufP}} - \if_a_ - \match_lines{\the_line{a}{\a_bufP}}{\b_line} - \if_a_ \else - \global\a_bufmid=\a_bufP - \fi - \else - \global\b_bufmid=\b_bufP - \fi - \ifnum \a_bufP>\a_bufbase \if_a_ - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\try_matching - \fi \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - -% \begin{macro}{\report_mismatch} -% The |\report_mismatch| macro does precisely what it says. It also increases -% the \texttt{bufbase} and \texttt{lineno} registers to point at the -% matching lines. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\report_mismatch{ - \begingroup - \def\do_left_paren{(} - \def\do_right_paren{)} - \wlog{Mismatch~in~first~file~(at~\the\a_lineno):} - \loop - \wlog{\the_line{a}{\a_bufbase}} - \ifnum \a_bufbase<\a_bufmid - \global\advance \a_bufbase \@ne - \global\advance \a_lineno \@ne - \repeat - \wlog{Match~found~at~line~\the\a_lineno.} - \wlog{Mismatch~in~second~file~(at~\the\b_lineno):} - \loop - \wlog{\the_line{b}{\b_bufbase}} - \ifnum \b_bufbase<\b_bufmid - \global\advance \b_bufbase \@ne - \global\advance \b_lineno \@ne - \repeat - \wlog{Match~found~at~line~\the\b_lineno.} - \endgroup - \glyphified_location - \ifnum 4>\compared_status - \global\chardef\compared_status=4 - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - -\def\glyphified_location{ - \ifx \encoding_name\empty_command - \ifnum \m@ne<\last_character - \wlog{This~is~related~to~slot~\the\last_character.^^J} - \else - \wlog{This~is~in~the~header.^^J} - \fi - \else - \if_undefined{name-\encoding_name-\the\last_character}\then - \ifnum \last_character=\m@ne - \wlog{This~is~in~the~header.^^J} - \else - \wlog{This~is~related~to~slot~\the\last_character\space - (unencoded).^^J} - \fi - \else - \wlog{This~is~related~to~the~glyph~ - \csname name-\encoding_name-\the\last_character\endcsname - .^^J} - \fi - \fi -} -% \begin{macro}{\compared_status} -% |\compared_status| is a \meta{chardef token} which stores the -% current status of the comparision, according to the following table -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item[0] The property lists are equal---there may be checksum -% differences, but nothing else. -% \item[1] The property lists are almost equal---there are -% differences in the metrics, but these are within the |\tolerance| -% level. -% \item[2] The property lists are essentially equal---there are -% differences in the metrics, but these are within the |\tolerance| -% level, with the exception of some \texttt{CHARHT}, -% \texttt{CHARDP}, and \texttt{CHARIC} values. -% \item[3] The property lists have metric differences---there are -% metric differences not with category 2. -% \item[4] The property lists are not completely matched. -% \end{enumerate} -% \end{macro} - -% \begin{macro}{\step_linenos} -% The |\step_linenos| macro increments the |_lineno| line numbers. If -% the current line was fetched from the buffert, then it also -% increments the |_bufmid| and |_bufbase| registers, and checks -% whether the buffert ended (in which case it is normalized to its -% starting position, to conserve hash table space). -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\step_linenos{ - \global\advance \a_lineno \@ne - \ifnum \a_bufmid=\a_buftop - \global\a_bufbase=\z@ - \global\a_bufmid=\z@ - \global\a_buftop=\m@ne - \else\ifnum \a_bufmid<\a_buftop - \global\advance \a_bufmid \@ne - \global\advance \a_bufbase \@ne - \fi\fi - \global\advance \b_lineno \@ne - \ifnum \b_bufmid=\b_buftop - \global\b_bufbase=\z@ - \global\b_bufmid=\z@ - \global\b_buftop=\m@ne - \else\ifnum \b_bufmid<\b_buftop - \global\advance \b_bufmid \@ne - \global\advance \b_bufbase \@ne - \fi\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - - -\newdimen\first_dimen -\newdimen\second_dimen -\newcount\ht_hist_i -\newcount\ht_hist_ii -\newcount\ht_hist_iii -\newcount\ht_hist_iv -\newcount\dp_hist_i -\newcount\dp_hist_ii -\newcount\dp_hist_iii -\newcount\dp_hist_iv -\newcount\ic_hist_i -\newcount\ic_hist_ii -\newcount\ic_hist_iii -\newcount\ic_hist_iv - -% \begin{macro}{\clear_histograms} -% This macro clears all the histograms. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\clear_histograms{ - \global\ht_hist_i=\z@ - \global\ht_hist_ii=\z@ - \global\ht_hist_iii=\z@ - \global\ht_hist_iv=\z@ - \global\dp_hist_i=\z@ - \global\dp_hist_ii=\z@ - \global\dp_hist_iii=\z@ - \global\dp_hist_iv=\z@ - \global\ic_hist_i=\z@ - \global\ic_hist_ii=\z@ - \global\ic_hist_iii=\z@ - \global\ic_hist_iv=\z@ -} -% \enc{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - -% \begin{macro}{\present_histograms} -% This macro writes the histogram data to the log file. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\present_histograms{ - \wlog{\string\tolerance*~\space CHARHT~\space CHARDP~\space CHARIC} - \wlog{~\space\space 1--~\space\space 10\hist_to_eight{ht}{i} - \hist_to_eight{dp}{i}\hist_to_eight{ic}{i}} - \wlog{~\space 10--~\space 100\hist_to_eight{ht}{ii} - \hist_to_eight{dp}{ii}\hist_to_eight{ic}{ii}} - \wlog{~100--~1000\hist_to_eight{ht}{iii}\hist_to_eight{dp}{iii} - \hist_to_eight{ic}{iii}} - \wlog{1000--10000\hist_to_eight{ht}{iv}\hist_to_eight{dp}{iv} - \hist_to_eight{ic}{iv}} -} -\def\hist_to_eight#1#2{\x_cs\hist_to_eight_i{#1_hist_#2}} -\def\hist_to_eight_i#1{ - \ifnum #1<\@M - \four_spaces - \ifnum #1<\one_hundred - \space\space - \ifnum 10>#1 ~\fi - \else \ifnum #1<\one_thousand \space\fi \fi - \else - \ifnum 1000000>#1 - \space\space - \ifnum 100000>#1 ~\fi - \else \ifnum 1000000>#1 ~\fi \fi - \fi - \the#1 -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - - -% \begin{macro}{\metric_statistics} -% \begin{macro}{\metric_origin} -% The |\metric_statistics| macro takes care of comparing the metrics -% by inspecting the values of |\first_dimen| and |\second_dimen|. It -% has four classes of differences, which are represented by -% |\compared_status| values 0--3: no difference, tolerable (almost no) -% difference, histogrammed (essentially no) difference, and -% non-tolerable difference. If a non-tolerable difference is found, -% then the current lines are written to the log file. Histogrammed -% differences causes the corresponding -% |\|\meta{type}|_hist_|\meta{group} register to be incremented, and -% tolerable differences only affect the value of |\compared_status|. -% -% The |\metric_origin| macro contains the \meta{type} of the metric -% data. It is usually empty, but PL properties with metrics that have -% histograms set it so that the correct histogram is updated. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\metric_statistics{ - \_a_false - % - \ifdim \first_dimen<\z@ \first_dimen=-\first_dimen \fi - \ifdim \first_dimen=\z@ - \else\ifdim \first_dimen<\tolerance - \ifnum 1>\compared_status - \global\chardef\compared_status=1 - \fi - \else\ifx \metric_origin\empty_command - \_a_true - \else - \a_count=\@ne - \def\a_macro{10} - \loop\ifdim \a_macro\tolerance<\first_dimen - \edef\a_macro{\a_macro 0} - \advance \a_count \@ne - \repeat - \if_undefined{\metric_origin _hist_ \romannumeral\a_count}\then - \_a_true - \else - \global\advance \csname \metric_origin _hist_ - \romannumeral\a_count \endcsname \@ne - \ifnum 2>\compared_status - \global\chardef\compared_status=2 - \fi - \fi - \fi\fi\fi - % - \ifdim \second_dimen<\z@ \second_dimen=-\second_dimen \fi - \ifdim \second_dimen=\z@ - \else\ifdim \second_dimen<\tolerance - \ifnum 1>\compared_status - \global\chardef\compared_status=1 - \fi - \else\ifx \metric_origin\empty_command - \_a_true - \else - \a_count=\@ne - \def\a_macro{10} - \loop\ifdim \a_macro\tolerance<\second_dimen - \edef\a_macro{\a_macro 0} - \advance \a_count \@ne - \repeat - \if_undefined{\metric_origin _hist_ \romannumeral\a_count}\then - \_a_true - \else - \global\advance \csname \metric_origin _hist_ - \romannumeral\a_count \endcsname \@ne - \ifnum 2>\compared_status - \global\chardef\compared_status=2 - \fi - \fi - \fi\fi\fi - % - \if_a_ - \ifnum 3>\compared_status - \global\chardef\compared_status=3 - \fi - \begingroup - \def\do_left_paren{(} - \def\do_right_paren{)} - \wlog{Metric~differences~at~lines~\the\a_lineno\space - and~\the\b_lineno\space respectively:} - \wlog{\a_line} - \wlog{\b_line} - \endgroup - \glyphified_location - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro}\end{macro} - - - - -\newif\if_b_ - -% \begin{macro}{\process_lines} -% The |\process_lines| macro is the cheif executive in the comparision. -% Its normal mode of operation is to retrive the next two lines from -% the input files, match them, and update the metric differences -% statistics. If the lines do not match, however, it starts building a -% buffert of lines in which it searches for two matching lines. When -% these two lines are found the mismatching portions of the files are -% written to the log file, and the metric difference statistics are -% updated for the two lines that matched. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\process_lines{ - \get_next_line{a} - \get_next_line{b} - \match_lines{\a_line}{\b_line} - \if_a_ -% \end{macrocode} -% Now the process of trying to find a match begins. At each step of -% the search for a match, it tries all possible matches with the -% lines read so far that haven't been tried at an earlier step. -% \begin{macrocode} -% \tracingmacros=\@ne\tracingcommands=\tw@ % DEBUG - \initialise_search - \loop - \get_next_line{a} - \get_next_line{b} - \add_to_buffert{a} - \add_to_buffert{b} - \match_lines{\a_line}{\b_line} - \if_a_ - \global\a_bufP=\a_bufmid - \global\b_bufP=\b_bufmid - \try_matching - \fi - \if_a_ - \global\advance \a_bufmid \@ne - \global\advance \b_bufmid \@ne - \ifnum \a_bufmid>\sixt@@n - \errmessage{Big~buffert.~\the\a_lineno[\the\a_filelineno]: - \the\b_lineno[\the\b_filelineno]} - \fi % DEBUG - \repeat - \report_mismatch -% \tracingcommands=\z@\tracingmacros=\z@ % DEBUG -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} - \fi - \metric_statistics - \step_linenos - \par % DEBUG - \if \ifx \a_line\end_of_file_line - \ifx \b_line\end_of_file_line 1\else 0\fi\else 0\fi 0 - % then - \expandafter\process_lines - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - -\def\loadencoding#1{{ - \def\do_slot{\x_cs\xdef{name-#1-\the\slot_number}{\slot_name}} - \inputetx{#1} -}} - -% \begin{macro}{\comparePLs} -% The |\comparePLs| command compares two property lists files. It is -% geared against verifying that two different such files are as good -% as equal, and it might take a very long time before it gives up on -% trying to find any resemblance between them. It is furthermore only -% meant to be used on (V)PL files generated by \package{TFtoPL} or -% \package{VFtoVP}, because it assumes the property lists follow a -% stricter syntax than \package{PLtoTF} and \package{VPtoVF} requires -% them to. Finally it needs to be said that the comparision is rather -% stupid in many respects, as it is completely line-oriented and -% takes no notice of what kind of property list it is reading. This -% may in some cases cause it to find ``matches'' between lines which -% for syntactical reasons alone cannot match. -% -% |\comparePLs| is called as -% \begin{quote} -% |\comparePLs|\marg{first PL}\marg{second PL}\marg{encoding} -% \end{quote} -% where \meta{first PL} and \meta{second PL} are the complete names -% (including extensions) of the files to compare. \meta{encoding} is -% the name of the encoding to use when translating slots to glyph -% names; leave it empty if you don't want to specify one. (One could -% use the \texttt{CODINGSCHEME} property to determine the encoding in -% that case, but this is not currently done). The slot to glyph -% translation is only done to make it easier to locate the position of -% some mismatch; it has not effect on the actual comparision. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\last_character -\def\comparePLs#1#2#3{{ - \def\encoding_name{#3} - \last_character=\m@ne - \openin\a_read=#1\x_relax - \openin\b_read=#2\x_relax - \immediate\write\sixt@@n{#1~and^^J #2} - \pl_catcodes - \let\do_left_paren=\do_property - \let\do_right_paren=\empty_command - \global\chardef\compared_status=\z@ - \clear_histograms - \global\a_filelineno=\@ne - \global\b_filelineno=\@ne - \global\a_lineno=\@ne - \global\b_lineno=\@ne - \global\a_bufbase=\z@ - \global\b_bufbase=\z@ - \global\a_bufmid=\z@ - \global\b_bufmid=\z@ - \global\a_buftop=\m@ne - \global\b_buftop=\m@ne - \process_lines - \closein\a_read - \closein\b_read - \ifcase \compared_status - \immediate\write\sixt@@n{are~equal.^^J} - \or - \immediate\write\sixt@@n{are~almost~equal.^^J} - \or - \immediate\write\sixt@@n{are~essentially~equal.} - \or - \immediate\write\sixt@@n{have~non-tolerated~metric~differences.} - \or - \immediate\write\sixt@@n{do~not~completely~match.} - \else - \immediate\write\sixt@@n{could~not~be~matched!} - \fi - \ifnum 1<\compared_status - \immediate\write\sixt@@n{See~log~file~for~specification.} - \present_histograms - \immediate\write\sixt@@n{} - \fi -}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - - -\begingroup - \catcode`\(=13 \catcode`\)=13 - \gdef\pl_catcodes{ - \catcode`\(=13 \def({\do_left_paren} - \catcode`\)=13 \def){\do_right_paren} - } -\endgroup - -\def\do_property#1~{ - \x_cs\edef{cmd-\sign}{#1} - \let\metric_origin=\empty_command - \x_cs\ifx{pl-#1}\x_relax - \expandafter\ignore_parens - \else - \csname pl-#1 \expandafter\endcsname - \fi -} -\def\pl_def_s#1(#2){\x_cs\def{pl-#1}#2~} -\begingroup - \catcode`\!=13\lccode`\!=`\) -\lowercase{\endgroup - \def\pl_def_p#1(#2){\x_cs\def{pl-#1}#2!} -} -\def\pl_let#1#2{ - \expandafter\let - \csname pl-#1 \expandafter\endcsname \csname pl-#2 \endcsname -} - - - -\newdimen\tolerance \tolerance=110sp - -% The following is for gobbling to the next unmatched right parenthesis. -% The |\catcode| trick used by the PL-to-MTX converter's -% |\ignore_parens| cannot be used since the characters are already -% tokenized, but one can do something similar with an |\edef| since one -% does not have to worry about the PL files containing material which -% expands in an undesirable way. -% -% The |\line_stop| is so that linebreaks in the parenthesis being -% gobbled will not cause total havok (although the parenthesis won't be -% gobbled completely). It inserts end-of-group tokens until the |\edef| -% is terminated, and then the |\afterassignment| token will close the -% group and restore the normal definition. - -\def\ignore_parens{ - \begingroup - \def\do_left_paren{{\iffalse}\fi} - \def\do_right_paren{\iffalse{\fi}} - \def\line_stop{\do_right_paren\line_stop} - \afterassignment\endgroup - \edef\a_macro{\iffalse}\fi -} -\def\line_stop{\x_relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% -\begingroup - \catcode`\(=1 - \catcode`\)=2 - \gdef\pl_string{ - \begingroup - \def\do_left_paren{(\iffalse)\fi} - \def\do_right_paren{\iffalse(\fi)} - \def\line_stop{\iffalse{\fi}\line_stop} - \afterassignment\pl_string_i - \edef\a_macro{\iffalse}\fi - } -\endgroup -\def\pl_string_i{ - \expandafter\endgroup \expandafter\def - \csname string-\sign \expandafter\endcsname - \expandafter{\a_macro} -} - -\def\pl_real#1{\sign#1\hundred_pt} -\newdimen\hundred_pt \hundred_pt=100pt - -% Convert a PL int to a \TeX{} int, assuming it's prefixed -% by |C|, |D|, |O|, or |H|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\pl_int#1#2{ - \sign \ifx#1C `#2 - \else\ifx#1D #2 - \else\ifx#1O '#2 - \else\ifx#1H "#2 - \else -1\errmessage{Unknown~PL~number~prefix~`#1'} - \fi\fi\fi\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} - - -% \begin{macrocode} -\pl_def_p{NEXTLARGER}(#1~#2){\advance \first_integer \pl_int{#1}{#2}} -\pl_let{BOUNDARYCHAR}{NEXTLARGER} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\x_cs\let{pl-VTITLE}=\pl_string -\pl_let{FONTNAME}{VTITLE} -\pl_let{FONTAREA}{VTITLE} -% \pl_let{CHECKSUM}{VTITLE} -% % Not really a string, but unsigned numbers can become too large for TeX. -% \pl_let{FONTCHECKSUM}{CHECKSUM} -% Commented out since checksums vary too much. -\pl_def_p{FONTAT}(R~#1){\advance \first_dimen \pl_real{#1}} -\pl_let{FONTDSIZE}{FONTAT} -\pl_let{SELECTFONT}{NEXTLARGER} -\pl_let{SETCHAR}{NEXTLARGER} -\pl_def_p{SETRULE}(R~#1~R~#2){ - \advance \first_dimen \pl_real{#1} - \advance \second_dimen \pl_real{#2} -} -\x_cs\let{pl-POP}\empty_command -\pl_let{PUSH}{POP} -\pl_let{MOVERIGHT}{FONTAT} -\pl_let{MOVELEFT}{FONTAT} -\pl_let{MOVEUP}{FONTAT} -\pl_let{MOVEDOWN}{FONTAT} -\pl_let{SPECIAL}{VTITLE} -\pl_let{SPECIALHEX}{VTITLE} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% - -\pl_let{CODINGSCHEME}{VTITLE} -\pl_let{DESIGNSIZE}{FONTAT} - -\def\pl_parameter#1#2#3{ - \advance \first_integer \pl_int{#1}{#2} - \advance \first_dimen \pl_real{#3} -} - -\pl_def_p{PARAMETER}(#1~#2~R~#3){\pl_parameter{#1}{#2}{#3}} - -\pl_def_p{SLANT}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{1}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{SPACE}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{2}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{STRETCH}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{3}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{SHRINK}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{4}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{XHEIGHT}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{5}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{QUAD}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{6}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{EXTRASPACE}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{7}{#1}} - -\pl_def_p{NUM1}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{8}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{NUM2}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{9}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{NUM3}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{10}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{DENOM1}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{11}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{DENOM2}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{12}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{SUP1}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{13}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{SUP2}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{14}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{SUP3}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{15}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{SUB1}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{16}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{SUB2}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{17}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{SUPDROP}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{18}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{SUBDROP}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{19}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{DELIM1}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{20}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{DELIM2}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{21}{#1}} -\pl_def_p{AXISHEIGHT}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{22}{#1}} - -\pl_let{DEFAULTRULETHICKNESS}{NUM1} -\pl_let{BIGOPSPACING1}{NUM2} -\pl_let{BIGOPSPACING2}{NUM3} -\pl_let{BIGOPSPACING3}{DENOM1} -\pl_let{BIGOPSPACING4}{DENOM2} -\pl_let{BIGOPSPACING5}{SUP1} - -\def\boundarychar_name{BOUNDARYCHAR} -\pl_def_s{LABEL}(#1){ - \def\a_macro{#1} - \ifx \a_macro\boundarychar_name - \x_cs\let{string-\sign}\a_macro - \else - \def\a_macro{\csname pl-LABEL(i\endcsname #1~} - \expandafter\a_macro - \fi -} -\pl_def_p{LABEL(i}(#1~#2){ - \last_character=\first_integer - \advance \first_integer \pl_int{#1}{#2} -} -\pl_def_p{LIG}(#1~#2~#3~#4){ - \advance \first_integer \pl_int{#1}{#2} - \advance \second_integer \pl_int{#3}{#4} -} -\pl_let{/LIG}{LIG} -\pl_let{/LIG>}{LIG} -\pl_let{LIG/}{LIG} -\pl_let{LIG/>}{LIG} -\pl_let{/LIG/}{LIG} -\pl_let{/LIG/>}{LIG} -\pl_let{/LIG/>>}{LIG} - -\pl_let{HEADER}{LIG} - -% \def\pl_lig#1~#2~#3~#4~#5~{ -% \x_cs\def{string-\sign}{#1} -% \def\LIG#1~{ -% \if\ifx #1C 0 -% \else\ifx #1D 0 -% \else\ifx #1H 0 -% \else\ifx #1O 0 \else 1\fi\fi\fi\fi 0 -% % then -% \expandafter\both_of_two -% \else -% \expandafter\first_of_two -% \fi{\pl_lig LIG}{~}#1~ -% } -% \def\/{\pl_lig/} - -\pl_let{KRN}{PARAMETER} -\pl_let{SKIP}{NEXTLARGER} - -\pl_def_s{CHARACTER}(#1~#2){ - \last_character=\first_integer - \advance \first_integer \pl_int{#1}{#2} -} -\pl_let{CHARWD}{FONTAT} -\pl_def_p{CHARHT}(R~#1){ - \def\metric_origin{ht} - \advance \first_dimen \pl_real{#1} -} -\pl_def_p{CHARDP}(R~#1){ - \def\metric_origin{dp} - \advance \first_dimen \pl_real{#1} -} -\pl_def_p{CHARIC}(R~#1){ - \def\metric_origin{ic} - \advance \first_dimen \pl_real{#1} -} - -\pl_let{TOP}{NEXTLARGER} -\pl_let{MID}{NEXTLARGER} -\pl_let{BOT}{NEXTLARGER} -\pl_let{REP}{NEXTLARGER} - -\pl_let{FONTDIMEN}{POP} -\pl_let{LIGTABLE}{POP} -\pl_let{VARCHAR}{POP} -\pl_def_s{MAPFONT}(#1~#2){\advance \first_integer \pl_int{#1}{#2}} -\pl_let{MAP}{POP} - - -% \begin{macrocode} -\catcode`\@=\atcatcode -\catcode`\^^M=\nlcatcode -\catcode`\ =\spacecatcode -\catcode`\~=\tildecatcode -\catcode`\_=\underscorecatcode -% \end{macrocode} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/comparepls.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/comparepls.tex deleted file mode 100644 index a735a34ed79..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/comparepls.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ -\input fontinst.sty -\input comparemetrics.sty - -% % \tracingmacros=1\tracingcommands=2 -% \comparePLs{cmr5.pl}{cmr5.pl} -% -% \bye - -\tracingstats=1 - -\def\oldf{::efficiency:saved:v1.912:} -\def\newf{::efficiency:saved:v1.913:} - -\loadencoding{t1} -\loadencoding{ot1} -\loadencoding{ts1} -\loadencoding{8r} - -\comparePLs{\oldf padb7t.vpl}{\newf padb7t.vpl}{ot1} %OK 11sp -\comparePLs{\oldf padb8c.vpl}{\newf padb8c.vpl}{ts1} %OK 11sp -\comparePLs{\oldf padb8t.vpl}{\newf padb8t.vpl}{t1} %OK 11sp -\comparePLs{\oldf padbc7t.vpl}{\newf padbc7t.vpl}{ot1} %OK 11sp -\comparePLs{\oldf padbc8t.vpl}{\newf padbc8t.vpl}{t1} -\comparePLs{\oldf padbi7t.vpl}{\newf padbi7t.vpl}{ot1} -\comparePLs{\oldf padbi8c.vpl}{\newf padbi8c.vpl}{ts1} -\comparePLs{\oldf padbi8t.vpl}{\newf padbi8t.vpl}{t1} -\comparePLs{\oldf padbo7t.vpl}{\newf padbo7t.vpl}{ot1} %OK 11sp -\comparePLs{\oldf padbo8c.vpl}{\newf padbo8c.vpl}{ts1} %OK 11sp -\comparePLs{\oldf padbo8t.vpl}{\newf padbo8t.vpl}{t1} -\comparePLs{\oldf padr7t.vpl}{\newf padr7t.vpl}{ot1} %OK 11sp -\comparePLs{\oldf padr8c.vpl}{\newf padr8c.vpl}{ts1} %OK 11sp -\comparePLs{\oldf padr8t.vpl}{\newf padr8t.vpl}{t1} %OK 11sp -\comparePLs{\oldf padrc7t.vpl}{\newf padrc7t.vpl}{ot1} %OK 11sp -\comparePLs{\oldf padrc8t.vpl}{\newf padrc8t.vpl}{t1} %OK 11sp -\comparePLs{\oldf padri7t.vpl}{\newf padri7t.vpl}{ot1} -\comparePLs{\oldf padri8c.vpl}{\newf padri8c.vpl}{ts1} %OK 11sp -\comparePLs{\oldf padri8t.vpl}{\newf padri8t.vpl}{t1} -\comparePLs{\oldf padro7t.vpl}{\newf padro7t.vpl}{ot1} %OK 11sp -\comparePLs{\oldf padro8c.vpl}{\newf padro8c.vpl}{ts1} %OK 11sp -\comparePLs{\oldf padro8t.vpl}{\newf padro8t.vpl}{t1} -\comparePLs{\oldf pads7t.vpl}{\newf pads7t.vpl}{ot1} -\comparePLs{\oldf pads8c.vpl}{\newf pads8c.vpl}{ts1} -\comparePLs{\oldf pads8t.vpl}{\newf pads8t.vpl}{t1} -\comparePLs{\oldf padsc7t.vpl}{\newf padsc7t.vpl}{ot1} -\comparePLs{\oldf padsc8t.vpl}{\newf padsc8t.vpl}{t1} %OK 11sp -\comparePLs{\oldf padsi7t.vpl}{\newf padsi7t.vpl}{ot1} -\comparePLs{\oldf padsi8c.vpl}{\newf padsi8c.vpl}{ts1} %OK 11sp -\comparePLs{\oldf padsi8t.vpl}{\newf padsi8t.vpl}{t1} -\comparePLs{\oldf padso7t.vpl}{\newf padso7t.vpl}{ot1} -\comparePLs{\oldf padso8c.vpl}{\newf padso8c.vpl}{ts1} -\comparePLs{\oldf padso8t.vpl}{\newf padso8t.vpl}{t1} - -\comparePLs{\oldf padb8a.pl}{\newf padb8a.pl}{} -\comparePLs{\oldf padb8r.pl}{\newf padb8r.pl}{8r} -\comparePLs{\oldf padbi8a.pl}{\newf padbi8a.pl}{} -\comparePLs{\oldf padbi8r.pl}{\newf padbi8r.pl}{8r} -\comparePLs{\oldf padbo8r.pl}{\newf padbo8r.pl}{8r} -\comparePLs{\oldf padr8a.pl}{\newf padr8a.pl}{} -\comparePLs{\oldf padr8r.pl}{\newf padr8r.pl}{8r} -\comparePLs{\oldf padrc8a.pl}{\newf padrc8a.pl}{} -\comparePLs{\oldf padrc8r.pl}{\newf padrc8r.pl}{8r} -\comparePLs{\oldf padri8a.pl}{\newf padri8a.pl}{} -\comparePLs{\oldf padri8r.pl}{\newf padri8r.pl}{8r} -\comparePLs{\oldf padro8r.pl}{\newf padro8r.pl}{8r} -\comparePLs{\oldf pads8a.pl}{\newf pads8a.pl}{} -\comparePLs{\oldf pads8r.pl}{\newf pads8r.pl}{8r} -\comparePLs{\oldf padsc8a.pl}{\newf padsc8a.pl}{} -\comparePLs{\oldf padsc8r.pl}{\newf padsc8r.pl}{8r} -\comparePLs{\oldf padsi8a.pl}{\newf padsi8a.pl}{} -\comparePLs{\oldf padsi8r.pl}{\newf padsi8r.pl}{8r} -\comparePLs{\oldf padso8r.pl}{\newf padso8r.pl}{8r} - -\bye
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/scaledtest.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/scaledtest.tex deleted file mode 100644 index f5e9dd03a2d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/scaledtest.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -%&Plain -\input fontinst.sty - -\installfonts - \installfont{foo}{scaledtest scaled 300}{ot1}{OT1}{zzz}{m}{n}{} -\endinstallfonts - -\bye
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/speedtest1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/speedtest1.tex deleted file mode 100644 index a92823e7210..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/speedtest1.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ -\input fontinst.sty - -\edef\spacecatcode{\the\catcode`\ } -\edef\nlcatcode{\the\catcode`\^^M} -\edef\atcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} -\edef\underscorecatcode{\the\catcode`\_} -\edef\tildecatcode{\the\catcode`\~} -\catcode`\ =9 -\catcode`\^^M=9 -\catcode`\@=11 -\catcode`\_=11 -\catcode`\~=10 - -\def\Mtxtopl#1#2{{ - \open_out{#2.pl} - \top_of_pl_hook - \out_line{(COMMENT~raw~font~#2~created~by~fontinst~ - v\fontinstversion)} - \out_line{} - \out_line{(COMMENT~Filename:~#2.pl)} - \out_line{(COMMENT~Created~by:~tex~\jobname)} - \out_line{(COMMENT~Created~using:~\string\mtxtopl{#1}{#2})} - \out_line{} - \out_line{(COMMENT~This~file~can~be~turned~into~a~ligless~TeX~font~ - with)} - \out_line{(COMMENT~pltotfm~#2.pl~#2.tfm)} - \out_line{} - \out_line{(COMMENT~THIS~FILE~CAN~THEN~BE~DELETED.)} - \out_line{} - \out_line{(DESIGNSIZE~R~10.0)} - \out_line{} - \let\setglyph=\iffalse - \let\endsetglyph=\fi - \let\setkern=\gobble_three - \let\setrawglyph=\Pl_raw_glyph - \inputmtx{#1} - \out_line{} - \out_line{(COMMENT~END~OF~FILE~#2.pl)} - \close_out{Raw~font} -}} -\def\Pl_raw_glyph#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{ - \a_count=#4 - \out_line{(CHARACTER~\vpl_int\a_count\space(COMMENT~#1)} - \out_lline{(CHARWD~R~\make_factor{#5})} - \out_lline{(CHARHT~R~\make_factor{#6})} - \out_lline{(CHARDP~R~\make_factor{#7})} - \out_lline{(CHARIC~R~\make_factor{#8})} - \out_lline{)} -} - - -\catcode`\@=\atcatcode -\catcode`\^^M=\nlcatcode -\catcode`\ =\spacecatcode -\catcode`\~=\tildecatcode -\catcode`\_=\underscorecatcode - -\batchmode -\for(n){1}{500}{1}\Mtxtopl{cmr5}{cmr5.new}\endfor(n) - -\bye - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/testfont.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/testfont.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 544642aae45..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/testfont.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,208 +0,0 @@ -% A testbed for font evaluation (see The METAFONTbook, Appendix H) - -\tracinglostchars=0 -\tolerance=1000 -\raggedbottom -\nopagenumbers -\parindent=0pt -\newlinechar=`@ -\hyphenpenalty=200 -\doublehyphendemerits=30000 -\hyphenation{prom-i-nent} - -\newcount\m \newcount\n \newcount\p \newdimen\dim -\chardef\other=12 - -\def\today{\ifcase\month\or - January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or - July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi - \space\number\day, \number\year} -\def\hours{\n=\time \divide\n 60 - \m=-\n \multiply\m 60 \advance\m \time - \twodigits\n\twodigits\m} -\def\twodigits#1{\ifnum #1<10 0\fi \number#1} - -\def\init{\message{@Name of the font to test = } - \read-1 to\fontname \startfont - \message{Now type a test command (\string\help\space for help):}} -\def\startfont{\font\testfont=\fontname \spaceskip=0pt - \leftline{\sevenrm Test of \fontname\unskip\ on \today\ at \hours} - \medskip - \testfont \setbaselineskip - \ifdim\fontdimen6\testfont<10pt \rightskip=0pt plus 20pt - \else\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \fi - \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\testfont % space between words (\raggedright) - \xspaceskip=\fontdimen2\testfont \advance\xspaceskip by\fontdimen7\testfont} - -{\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=\other -|gdef|help{|message{% -\init switches to another font;@% -\end or \bye finishes the run;@% -\table prints the font layout in tabular format;@% -\text prints a sample text, assuming TeX text font conventions;@% -\sample combines \table and \text;@% -\mixture mixes a background character with a series of others;@% -\alternation interleaves a background character with a series;@% -\alphabet prints all lowercase letters within a given background;@% -\ALPHABET prints all uppercase letters within a given background;@% -\series prints a series of letters within a given background;@% -\lowers prints a comprehensive test of lowercase;@% -\uppers prints a comprehensive test of uppercase;@% -\digits prints a comprehensive test of numerals;@% -\math prints a comprehensive test of TeX math italic;@% -\names prints a text that mixes upper and lower case;@% -\punct prints a punctuation test;@% -\bigtest combines many of the above routines;@% -\help repeats this message;@% -and you can use ordinary TeX commands (e.g., to \input a file).}}} - -\def\setbaselineskip{\setbox0=\hbox{\n=0 -\loop\char\n \ifnum \n<255 \advance\n 1 \repeat} -\baselineskip=6pt \advance\baselineskip\ht0 \advance\baselineskip\dp0 } - -\def\setchar#1{{\escapechar-1\message{\string#1 character = }% - \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials - \read-1 to\next - \expandafter\finsetchar\next\next#1}} -\def\finsetchar#1#2\next#3{\global\chardef#3=`#1 - \ifnum #3=`\# \global\chardef#3=#2 \fi} -\def\promptthree{\setchar\background - \setchar\starting \setchar\ending} - -\def\mixture{\promptthree \domix\mixpattern} -\def\alternation{\promptthree \domix\altpattern} -\def\mixpattern{\0\1\0\0\1\1\0\0\0\1\1\1\0\1} -\def\altpattern{\0\1\0\1\0\1\0\1\0\1\0\1\0\1\0\1\0} -\def\domix#1{\par\chardef\0=\background \n=\starting - \loop \chardef\1=\n #1\endgraf - \ifnum \n<\ending \advance\n 1 \repeat} - -\def\!{\discretionary{\background}{\background}{\background}} -\def\series{\promptthree \!\doseries\starting\ending\par} -\def\doseries#1#2{\n=#1\loop\char\n\!\ifnum\n<#2\advance\n 1 \repeat} -\def\complower{\!\doseries{`a}{`z}\doseries{'31}{'34}\par} -\def\compupper{\!\doseries{`A}{`Z}\doseries{'35}{'37}\par} -\def\compdigs{\!\doseries{`0}{`9}\par} -\def\alphabet{\setchar\background\complower} -\def\ALPHABET{\setchar\background\compupper} - -\def\lowers{\docomprehensive\complower{`a}{`z}{'31}{'34}} -\def\uppers{\docomprehensive\compupper{`A}{`Z}{'35}{'37}} -\def\digits{\docomprehensive\compdigs{`0}{`4}{`5}{`9}} -\def\docomprehensive#1#2#3#4#5{\par\chardef\background=#2 - \loop{#1} \ifnum\background<#3\m=\background\advance\m 1 - \chardef\background=\m \repeat \chardef\background=#4 - \loop{#1} \ifnum\background<#5\m=\background\advance\m 1 - \chardef\background=\m \repeat} - -\def\names{ {\AA}ngel\aa\ Beatrice Claire - Diana \'Erica Fran\c{c}oise Ginette H\'el\`ene Iris - Jackie K\=aren {\L}au\.ra Mar{\'\i}a N\H{a}ta{\l}{\u\i}e {\O}ctave - Pauline Qu\^eneau Roxanne Sabine T\~a{\'\j}a Ur\v{s}ula - Vivian Wendy Xanthippe Yv{\o}nne Z\"azilie\par} -\def\punct{\par\dopunct{min}\dopunct{pig}\dopunct{hid} - \dopunct{HIE}\dopunct{TIP}\dopunct{fluff} - \$1,234.56 + 7/8 = 9\% @ \#0\par} -\def\dopunct#1{#1,\ #1:\ #1;\ `#1'\ ?`#1?\ !`#1!\ (#1)\ [#1]\ #1*\ #1.\par} - -\def\bigtest{\sample - hamburgefonstiv HAMBURGEFONSTIV\par - \names \punct \lowers \uppers \digits} - -\def\math{\textfont1=\testfont \skewchar\testfont=\skewtrial - \mathchardef\Gamma="100 \mathchardef\Delta="101 - \mathchardef\Theta="102 \mathchardef\Lambda="103 \mathchardef\Xi="104 - \mathchardef\Pi="105 \mathchardef\Sigma="106 \mathchardef\Upsilon="107 - \mathchardef\Phi="108 \mathchardef\Psi="109 \mathchardef\Omega="10A - \def\ii{i} \def\jj{j} - \def\\##1{|##1|+}\mathtrial - \def\\##1{##1_2+}\mathtrial - \def\\##1{##1^2+}\mathtrial - \def\\##1{##1/2+}\mathtrial - \def\\##1{2/##1+}\mathtrial - \def\\##1{##1,{}+}\mathtrial - \def\\##1{d##1+}\mathtrial - \let\ii=\imath \let\jj=\jmath \def\\##1{\hat##1+}\mathtrial} -\newcount\skewtrial \skewtrial='177 -\def\mathtrial{$\\A \\B \\C \\D \\E \\F \\G \\H \\I \\J \\K \\L \\M \\N \\O - \\P \\Q \\R \\S \\T \\U \\V \\W \\X \\Y \\Z \\a \\b \\c \\d \\e \\f \\g - \\h \\\ii \\\jj \\k \\l \\m \\n \\o \\p \\q \\r \\s \\t \\u \\v \\w \\x \\y - \\z \\\alpha \\\beta \\\gamma \\\delta \\\epsilon \\\zeta \\\eta \\\theta - \\\iota \\\kappa \\\lambda \\\mu \\\nu \\\xi \\\pi \\\rho \\\sigma \\\tau - \\\upsilon \\\phi \\\chi \\\psi \\\omega \\\vartheta \\\varpi \\\varphi - \\\Gamma \\\Delta \\\Theta \\\Lambda \\\Xi \\\Pi \\\Sigma \\\Upsilon - \\\Phi \\\Psi \\\Omega \\\partial \\\ell \\\wp$\par} -\def\mathsy{\begingroup\skewtrial='060 % for math symbol font tests - \def\mathtrial{$\\A \\B \\C \\D \\E \\F \\G \\H \\I \\J \\K \\L - \\M \\N \\O \\P \\Q \\R \\S \\T \\U \\V \\W \\X \\Y \\Z$\par} - \math\endgroup} - -\def\oct#1{\hbox{\rm\'{}\kern-.2em\it#1\/\kern.05em}} % octal constant -\def\hex#1{\hbox{\rm\H{}\tt#1}} % hexadecimal constant -\def\setdigs#1"#2{\gdef\h{#2}% \h=hex prefix; \0\1=corresponding octal - \m=\n \divide\m by 64 \xdef\0{\the\m}% - \multiply\m by-64 \advance\m by\n \divide\m by 8 \xdef\1{\the\m}} -\def\testrow{\setbox0=\hbox{\penalty 1\def\\{\char"\h}% - \\0\\1\\2\\3\\4\\5\\6\\7\\8\\9\\A\\B\\C\\D\\E\\F% - \global\p=\lastpenalty}} % \p=1 if none of the characters exist -\def\oddline{\cr - \noalign{\nointerlineskip} - \multispan{19}\hrulefill& - \setbox0=\hbox{\lower 2.3pt\hbox{\hex{\h x}}}\smash{\box0}\cr - \noalign{\nointerlineskip}} -\newif\ifskipping -\def\evenline{\loop\skippingfalse - \ifnum\n<256 \m=\n \divide\m 16 \chardef\next=\m - \expandafter\setdigs\meaning\next \testrow - \ifnum\p=1 \skippingtrue \fi\fi - \ifskipping \global\advance\n 16 \repeat - \ifnum\n=256 \let\next=\endchart\else\let\next=\morechart\fi - \next} -\def\morechart{\cr\noalign{\hrule\penalty5000} - \chartline \oddline \m=\1 \advance\m 1 \xdef\1{\the\m} - \chartline \evenline} -\def\chartline{&\oct{\0\1x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&} -\def\chartstrut{\lower4.5pt\vbox to14pt{}} -\def\table{$$\global\n=0 - \halign to\hsize\bgroup - \chartstrut##\tabskip0pt plus10pt& - &\hfil##\hfil&\vrule##\cr - \lower6.5pt\null - &&&\oct0&&\oct1&&\oct2&&\oct3&&\oct4&&\oct5&&\oct6&&\oct7&\evenline} -\def\endchart{\cr\noalign{\hrule} - \raise11.5pt\null&&&\hex 8&&\hex 9&&\hex A&&\hex B& - &\hex C&&\hex D&&\hex E&&\hex F&\cr\egroup$$\par} -\def\:{\setbox0=\hbox{\char\n}% - \ifdim\ht0>7.5pt\reposition - \else\ifdim\dp0>2.5pt\reposition\fi\fi - \box0\global\advance\n 1 } -\def\reposition{\setbox0=\vbox{\kern2pt\box0}\dim=\dp0 - \advance\dim 2pt \dp0=\dim} -\def\centerlargechars{ - \def\reposition{\setbox0=\hbox{$\vcenter{\kern2pt\box0\kern2pt}$}}} - -\def\text{{\advance\baselineskip-4pt -\setbox0=\hbox{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz} -\ifdim\hsize>2\wd0 \ifdim 15pc>2\wd0 \hsize=15pc \else \hsize=2\wd0 \fi\fi -On November 14, 1885, Senator \& Mrs.~Leland Stanford called -together at their San Francisco mansion the 24~prominent men who had -been chosen as the first trustees of The Leland Stanford Junior University. -They handed to the board the Founding Grant of the University, which they -had executed three days before. This document---with various amendments, -legislative acts, and court decrees---remains as the University's charter. -In bold, sweeping language it stipulates that the objectives of the University -are ``to qualify students for personal success and direct usefulness in life; -and to promote the publick welfare by exercising an influence in behalf of -humanity and civilization, teaching the blessings of liberty regulated by -law, and inculcating love and reverence for the great principles of -government as derived from the inalienable rights of man to life, liberty, -and the pursuit of happiness.'' \moretext -(!`THE DAZED BROWN FOX QUICKLY GAVE 12345--67890 JUMPS!)\par}} -\def\moretext{?`But aren't Kafka's Schlo{\ss} and {\AE}sop's {\OE}uvres -often na{\"\i}ve vis-\`a-vis the d{\ae}monic ph{\oe}nix's official r\^ole -in fluffy souffl\'es? } -\def\omitaccents{\let\moretext=\relax} - -\def\sample{\table\text} - -\ifx\noinit!\else\init\fi diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/testsc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/testsc.tex deleted file mode 100644 index c54452d45e1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/testsc.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -\input fontinst.sty - -\transformfont{padr8r} {\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padr8a}}} -\transformfont{padrc8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padrc8a}}} -\transformfont{pads8r} {\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{pads8a}}} -\transformfont{padsc8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padsc8a}}} -\fromafm{padr8x} -\fromafm{pads8x} - -\installfonts - -\installfamily{T1}{pad} {} -\installfamily{T1}{padx}{} -\installfamily{T1}{padj}{} - -\installfont{padrc8t}{padrc8r,latin} - {T1}{T1}{pad}{m}{sc}{} -\installfont{padrc9e} - {kernoff,padr8r,padr8x,kernon,glyphoff,padrc8r,glyphon, - resetsc,latinsc} - {T1c}{T1}{padx}{m}{sc}{} -\installfont{padrc9d} - {kernoff,padr8r,padr8x,kernon,glyphoff,padrc8r,glyphon, - resetosf,resetsc,latinsc} - {T1cj}{T1}{padj}{m}{sc}{} - -\installfont{padsc8t}{padsc8r,latin} - {T1}{T1}{pad}{m}{sc}{} -\installfont{padsc9e} - {kernoff,pads8r,pads8x,kernon,glyphoff,padsc8r,glyphon, - resetsc,latinsc} - {T1c}{T1}{padx}{sb}{sc}{} -\installfont{padsc9d} - {kernoff,pads8r,pads8x,kernon,glyphoff,padrc8r,glyphon, - resetosf,resetsc,latinsc} - {T1cj}{T1}{padj}{sb}{sc}{} - -\endinstallfonts -\bye - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1901test.mtx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1901test.mtx deleted file mode 100644 index 624a39bf81d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1901test.mtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -\relax - -% This is a test MTX file for the new implementation of -% the \transformfont stuff. - -\metrics - -\setint{italicslant}{0} -\setint{italicslant}{100} -\setint{xheight}{400} - -\setrawglyph{a}{v1901test}{10.95pt}{10} {500}{400}{0}{40} -\setrawglyph{g}{v1901test}{10.95pt}{10} {500}{400}{-300}{40} - -\setkern{a}{g}{100} - -\setglyph{ag} - \glyphpcc{a}{0}{500} - \glyphpcc{g}{500}{0} -\endsetglyph - -\endmetrics
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1901test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1901test.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 81a6218f679..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1901test.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,214 +0,0 @@ -% Test of fontinst v1.901. -% Started 1999/03/13. -\input fontinst.sty - -% Part one---test of pooled file allocation. -\catcode`\_=11 -\catcode`\@=11 - -\def\show_out_filenames{% - \immediate\write16{\string\count17=\the\count17}% - \for(i){-1}{16}{1}% - \immediate\write16{Stream \strint{i}: - \x_cs\meaning{out_filename-\strint{i}}% - }% - \endfor(i)% -} - -% %1 Standard usage -% \show_out_filenames -% \open_pout\tF{\jobname.out} -% \show_out_filenames -% \pout_line\tF{Hello world!} -% \close_pout\tF{Test output} -% \show_out_filenames -% % Seems to work fine. - -% %2 Allocating LOTS of files. -% \newcount\j_count -% \newcount\k_count -% \j_count=0 -% \k_count=1 -% \for(o){1}{48}{1} -% \x_cs\open_pout{F-\strint{o}}{\jobname.\strint{o}}% -% \ifodd \int{o} \else -% \x_cs\pout_line{F-\the\k_count}{% -% open=\strint{o} close=\the\j_count\space write=\the\k_count -% }% -% \multiply \k_count \thr@@ -% \advance \k_count \@ne -% \d_count=\k_count -% \divide \d_count \int{o}% -% \multiply \d_count \int{o}% -% \advance \k_count -\d_count -% \advance \k_count \@ne -% \advance \j_count \@ne -% \x_cs\close_pout{F-\the\j_count}{Test data}% -% \fi -% \d_count=\int{o}% -% \divide \d_count 8% -% \multiply \d_count 8% -% \advance \d_count -\int{o}% -% \ifnum 0=\d_count \show_out_filenames \fi -% \endfor(o) -% % Seems to work fine as well. - - -%% Part two---test of reimplemented \transformfont stuff -%% Part two B---test of \recordtransforms stuff - -\recordtransforms{mapfrags.tex} -\transformfont{v1901test1}{ - \xscalefont{2000}{\reencodefont{t1c}{\frommtx{v1901test}}} -} -\transformfont{v1901test2}{ - \yscalefont{500}{\xscalefont{2000}{\frommtx{v1901test}}} -} -\transformfont{v1901test3}{ - \reencodefont{t1}{\slantfont{100}{\frommtx{v1901test}}} -} -\endrecordtransforms - - -\bye - -%% Part three---test of reglyphing - -\reglyphfonts - \resetcommand\iftokeep#1\then{\ifnum 0<#1} - % This means that an AFM command will survive the conversion only if - % it refers to at least one renamed glyph and not refer to any killed - % glyph. - -% \offmtxcommand\setrawglyph -% \offmtxcommand\setglyph -% % This reglyphing file is inteded for extracting information from the -% % AFM file of a Caps, Small caps, and Oldstyle figures fonts--with the -% % intention to build a corresponding virtual font with glyphs that are -% % present in the Regular and Expert Regular variants instead. Hence -% % there is no need for \setrawglyph or \setglyph commands (the -% % dimensions of the characters are known from the Reg. and Exp.Reg. -% % AFM's), but the \setkern commands are most interesting (since 8x -% % fonts don't contain any upper case letters, and hence has no kerning -% % pairs between these and the small caps either). - - - \renameglyph{dollaroldstyle}{dollar} - \renameglyph{ampersandsmall}{ampersand} - - \renameglyph{zerooldstyle}{zero} - \renameglyph{oneoldstyle}{one} - \renameglyph{twooldstyle}{two} - \renameglyph{threeoldstyle}{three} - \renameglyph{fouroldstyle}{four} - \renameglyph{fiveoldstyle}{five} - \renameglyph{sixoldstyle}{six} - \renameglyph{sevenoldstyle}{seven} - \renameglyph{eigtholdstyle}{eight} - \renameglyph{nineoldstyle}{nine} - - \renameglyph{Asmall}{a} - \renameglyph{Bsmall}{b} - \renameglyph{Csmall}{c} - \renameglyph{Dsmall}{d} - \renameglyph{Esmall}{e} - \renameglyph{Fsmall}{f} - \renameglyph{Gsmall}{g} - \renameglyph{Hsmall}{h} - \renameglyph{Ismall}{i} - \renameglyph{Jsmall}{j} - \renameglyph{Ksmall}{k} - \renameglyph{Lsmall}{l} - \renameglyph{Msmall}{m} - \renameglyph{Nsmall}{n} - \renameglyph{Osmall}{o} - \renameglyph{Psmall}{p} - \renameglyph{Qsmall}{q} - \renameglyph{Rsmall}{r} - \renameglyph{Ssmall}{s} - \renameglyph{Tsmall}{t} - \renameglyph{Usmall}{u} - \renameglyph{Vsmall}{v} - \renameglyph{Wsmall}{w} - \renameglyph{Xsmall}{x} - \renameglyph{Ysmall}{y} - \renameglyph{Zsmall}{z} - - \renameglyph{centoldstyle}{cent} - - % \renameglyph{FIsmall}{fi} - % \renameglyph{FLsmall}{fl} - % These two aren't really necessary, since the ligature `fi' looks - % exactly as the letters `f'`i' next to each others. - \killglyph{fi} - \killglyph{fl} - - \renameglyph{Gravesmall}{grave} - \renameglyph{Acutesmall}{acute} - \renameglyph{Circumflexsmall}{circumflex} - \renameglyph{Tildesmall}{tilde} - \renameglyph{Macronsmall}{macron} - \renameglyph{Brevesmall}{breve} - \renameglyph{Dotaccentsmall}{dotaccent} - \renameglyph{Dieresissmall}{dieresis} - \renameglyph{Ringsmall}{ring} - \renameglyph{Cedillasmall}{cedilla} - \renameglyph{Ogoneksmall}{ogonek} - \renameglyph{Caronsmall}{caron} - - \renameglyph{AEsmall}{ae} - \renameglyph{dotlessIsmall}{dotlessi} - \renameglyph{Lslashsmall}{lslash} - \renameglyph{Oslashsmall}{oslash} - \renameglyph{OEsmall}{oe} - % \renameglyph{SSsmall}{germandbls} - % This isn't really needed in the AGaramond font family, since `SSsmall' - % looks exactly like `Ssmall'`Ssmall' - \killglyph{germandbls} - - \renameglyph{Oacutesmall}{oacute} - \renameglyph{Odieresissmall}{odieresis} - \renameglyph{Ucircumflexsmall}{ucircumflex} - - \renameglyph{Uacutesmall}{uacute} - \renameglyph{Eacutesmall}{eacute} - \renameglyph{Iacutesmall}{iacute} - \renameglyph{Icircumflexsmall}{icircumflex} - - \renameglyph{Thornsmall}{thorn} - \renameglyph{Yacutesmall}{yacute} - - \renameglyph{Ocircumflexsmall}{ocircumflex} - \renameglyph{Otildesmall}{otilde} - \renameglyph{Ntildesmall}{ntilde} - \renameglyph{Ydieresissmall}{ydieresis} - \renameglyph{Ethsmall}{eth} - \renameglyph{Acircumflexsmall}{acircumflex} - \renameglyph{Aringsmall}{aring} - \renameglyph{Ccedillasmall}{ccedilla} - - \renameglyph{Ugravesmall}{ugrave} - \renameglyph{Zcaronsmall}{zcaron} - \renameglyph{Idieresissmall}{idieresis} - \renameglyph{Agravesmall}{agrave} - - \renameglyph{Ogravesmall}{ograve} - - \renameglyph{Udieresissmall}{udieresis} - \renameglyph{Edieresissmall}{edieresis} - \renameglyph{Aacutesmall}{aacute} - \renameglyph{Igravesmall}{igrave} - \renameglyph{Idieresissmall}{idieresis} - \renameglyph{Adieresissmall}{adieresis} - - \renameglyph{Scaronsmall}{scaron} - \renameglyph{Egravesmall}{egrave} - \renameglyph{Atildesmall}{atilde} - \renameglyph{Ecircumflexsmall}{ecircumflex} - - \reglyphfont{K-padrc}{gdsc} - \reglyphfont{K-padsc}{padsc8a} -\endreglyphfonts - - -\bye
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1902test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1902test.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 7274fb76597..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1902test.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,11 +0,0 @@ -\input fontinst.sty - -\generalpltomtx{cmr5}{cmr5;1}{pl}{OT1} -\generalpltomtx{padr9d}{padr9d;1}{vpl}{} -\generalpltomtx{padr9d}{padr9d;2}{vpl}{OT1} - -\transformfont{cmr5;2}{\fromplgivenetx{cmr5}{OT1}} -\transformfont{padr9d;3}{\fromvpl{padr9d}} -\transformfont{padr9d;4}{\fromvplgivenetx{padr9d}{OT1}} - -\bye
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1905test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1905test.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 47117acc5fb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1905test.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -\input fontinst.sty -\catcode`\_=11\catcode`\ =9\catcode`\^^M=9 -\catcode`\~=10\catcode`\@=11 - -\fontinst_error{Hungarian}{ - I~will~not~buy~this~record,\message_break - it~is~scratched -}\error_help_a - -\fontinst_warning{Hungarian}{Your~hovercraft~is~full~of~eels} - -\fontinst_info{Hungarian}{That~will~be~six~pence,~please} - -\fontinst_warning_no_line{Hungarian}{ - Do~you~want~to~come~home~to~my~place\message_break - and~pantsy~pantsy? -} - - - - -\bye
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1906test.mtx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1906test.mtx deleted file mode 100644 index 94306a07b32..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1906test.mtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ -\relax -% v1906test.mtx -% -% A test of the nokerning commands and the \glyphbboxright IE. - - -\metrics - -\for(i){0}{20}{1} - \setglyph{c\strint{i}} - \glyphrule{20}{\mul{\add{\int{i}}{1}}{20}} - \movert{\mul{20}{\int{i}}} - \endsetglyph -\endfor(i) - - -\setglyph{d} - \for(i){5}{10}{1} - \glyphpcc{c\strint{i}}{\int{i}}{\int{i}} - \endfor(i) - \resetint{j}{\glyphbboxright} - \immediate\write16{\string\glyphbboxright=\strint{j}} - \glyph{c20}{1000} - \resetint{j}{\glyphbboxright} - \immediate\write16{\string\glyphbboxright=\strint{j}} -\endsetglyph - - -\for(i){0}{20}{1} - \for(j){0}{20}{1} - \setkern{c\strint{i}}{c\strint{j}}{\mul{\int{i}}{\int{j}}} - \endfor(j) -\endfor(i) - -\noleftkerning{c1,c3,c5,c7,c9,c11,c13,c15,c17,c19} -\immediate\write16{\expandafter\meaning\csname a_macro\endcsname} -\norightkerning{c1,c3,c5,c7,c9} - -% \resetint{i}{0} -% \loop -% \setkern{c\strint{i}}{c\strint{i}}{-50} -% \resetint{j}{\sub{20}{\int{i}}} -% \resetkern{c\strint{i}}{c\strint{j}}{-100} -% \ifnum 20>\int{i} -% \resetint{i}{\add{\int{i}}{1}} -% \repeat - - -% \resetint{i}{0} -% \loop -% \ifiskern{c3}{c\strint{i}}\then -% \resetint{T}{\kerning{c3}{c\strint{i}}} -% \message{c3:c\strint{i} has kern \strint{T} units^^J} -% \else -% \message{c3:c\strint{i} no kern^^J} -% \fi -% \ifnum 20>\int{i} -% \resetint{i}{\add{\int{i}}{1}} -% \repeat - - - -\endmetrics - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1906test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1906test.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 92ed6281198..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1906test.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,12 +0,0 @@ -%&Plain -% Test of fontinst v1.906. -% Begun 1999/08/01. -\input fontinst.sty - -\installfonts - \installfamily{U}{ztest1}{} - \installfont{v1906test}{v1906test}{v1906test}{U}{ztest1}{m}{n}{} -\endinstallfonts - -\bye - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1913test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1913test.tex deleted file mode 100644 index b9382cdf898..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1913test.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -\input fontinst.sty - -\recordtransforms{v1913test.recs} - -\transformfont{padr8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padr8a}}} -\transformfont{padr8r-ys}{\yscalefont{\div{397000}{663}}{\frommtx{padr8r}}} -\reglyphfonts - \renameglyph{oneoldstyle}{one} - \reglyphfont{padr8r-ys2}{padr8r-ys} -\endreglyphfonts - -\installfonts - \installfamily{T1}{pad}{} - \installfamily{8r}{pad}{} - \installfont{padr9d}{padr8r,padr8r-ys2,padr8x,latin}{t1j}{T1}{pad}{m}{n}{} - \installrawfont{padr8r2}{padr8r-ys}{8r}{8r}{pad}{m}{n}{} -\endinstallfonts - -\endrecordtransforms - -\bye
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914test.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 73b271b986c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914test.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ -\input fontinst.sty - -%1 -\recordtransforms{v1914test.recs} - -\transformfont{padr8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padr8a}}} -\for(x){0}{2}{1} - \for(y){0}{2}{1} - \transformfont{p-ad-rr--8r--\strint{x}=\strint{y}}{ - \xscalefont{\add{\mul{\int{x}}{300}}{700}}{ - \yscalefont{\add{\mul{\int{y}}{300}}{700}}{ - \frommtx{padr8r}}}} - \endfor(y) -\endfor(x) - -\installfonts - \installfamily{T1}{padxy}{} - \installfamily{8r}{padxy}{} - \for(x){0}{2}{1} - \for(y){0}{2}{1} - \installfont{p-ad-rr--8t--\strint{x}=\strint{y}} - {p-ad-rr--8r--\strint{x}=\strint{y},latin} - {t1}{T1}{padxy}{m\strint{x}\strint{y}}{n}{} - \installrawfont{p-ad-rr--8r--\strint{x}=\strint{y}} - {p-ad-rr--8r--\strint{x}=\strint{y},8r} - {8r}{8r}{padxy}{m\strint{x}\strint{y}}{n}{} - \endfor(y) - \endfor(x) -\endinstallfonts - -\endrecordtransforms - -% % \tracingmacros=1\tracingcommands=2 -% %2 -% \installfonts -% \installrawfont{cmr5}{cmr5,\metrics -% \resetint{xheight}{\mul{\int{xheight}}{2}},kernoff}{ot1}{OT1} -% {cmr}{m}{n}{5} -% \installfont{padr18t}{padr8r scaled 856,% -% \metrics \message{% -% \ifisint{rawscale}\then\strint{rawscale}\else None\fi -% }% -% \expandafter\show \csname g-A\endcsname -% ,latin,% -% \metrics \message{% -% \ifisint{rawscale}\then\strint{rawscale}\else None\fi -% }}{t1}{T1}{pad}{m}{ns}{} -% \endinstallfonts - -\bye
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914testmap.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914testmap.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 9b1921bbc8d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914testmap.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -\input finstmsc.sty - -\resetstr{PSfontsuffix}{.pfb} -\adddriver{dvipdfm}{v1914test.dvipdfm} -\adddriver{pltotf}{v1914test.sh} % v1.915 feature, actually -\input v1914test.recs -\donedrivers - -\AssumeLWFN -\adddriver{dvips}{v1914test.map} -\adddriver{debug}{v1914test.debug} -\debugvalue{PS_font_file} -\input v1914test.recs -\donedrivers - - -\bye diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914testshow.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914testshow.tex deleted file mode 100644 index bd7a957b0a8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914testshow.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -\documentclass{article} - - -\newcommand\fontxy[2]{% - \usefont{T1}{padxy}{m#1#2}{n}% - Flygande b\"ackasiner s\"oka hwila p\r{a} mjuka tuvor% -} - - -\begin{document} - -$$ - \hss - \begin{tabular}{lll} - \fontxy00& \fontxy10& \fontxy20\\ - \fontxy01& \fontxy11& \fontxy21\\ - \fontxy02& \fontxy12& \fontxy22 - \end{tabular} - \hss -$$ -\end{document} - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1915test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1915test.tex deleted file mode 100644 index b60946a402b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1915test.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -\input fontinst.sty - -% %1: Catcodes -% \def\do#1{Catcode of `\string#1 = \the\catcode`#1 ^^J} -% \def\showcatcodes{\message{\do{\ }\do{\^^M}\do{\@}\do{\_}\do{\~}}} -% -% \showcatcodes -% \show\fontinstcc -% \fontinstcc -% \showcatcodes -% \show\normalcc -% \normalcc -% \showcatcodes - -%2: Aliased glyphs -\input Knuth:fontinst:New.fontinst:cyrfinst:etc:fnstcorr.tex -\transformfont{padsc8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padsc8a}}} -\def\renameglyph#1#2{\galias{#1}{#2}} -\input csc2x.tex -\transformfont{padscx8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padsc8a}}} -% När glyfnamnen har tagits bort från de omkodade PL-filerna så är -% de i allt väsentligt lika. Sålunda tycks det fungera! - - -\bye
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1915testmap.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1915testmap.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 7e83526cd40..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1915testmap.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,9 +0,0 @@ -\input finstmsc.sty -\adddriver{pltotf}{v1915test.sh} -\input v1914test.recs -\donedrivers -\setstr{TFMfileprefix}{:a:b:c:} -\adddriver{pltotf}{v1915test.sh2} -\input v1913test.recs -\donedrivers -\bye diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test.mtx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test.mtx deleted file mode 100644 index 1829c79d02d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test.mtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -\relax - -\documentclass[twocolumn]{article} -\usepackage{fontdoc} - -\errorcontextlines=999 - -\begin{document} - -\metrics - -\foreach(glyph){a,b,c,d,tilde,\strint{a},db\str{a}ef,AB\str{glyph}CD} - \resetglyph{\str{glyph}} - \glyph{\str{glyph}}{1000} - \resetitalic{0} - \endresetglyph -\endfor(glyph) - - -\endmetrics - - -\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 56f26a51b0f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -% v1916test.tex - -\input fontinst.sty - -% \half and \otherhalf -\fontinstcc -\for(i){-5}{5}{1} - \eval_expr_to\b_count{\half{\int{i}}} - \eval_expr{\otherhalf{\int{i}}} - \immediate\write16{\strint{i}:~\the\b_count \space+~ \the\result} -\endfor(i) -\normalcc - -\bye diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test2.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 8cc954f2615..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test2.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ -%&Plain -\input fontinst.sty - -% %1 \ifareglyphs -% -% \setrawglyph{f}{xfont}{10pt}{102}{375}{750}{375}{50} -% \setrawglyph{g}{xfont}{10pt}{102}{375}{750}{375}{50} -% \setrawglyph{h}{xfont}{10pt}{102}{375}{750}{375}{50} -% -% \ifareglyphs{}\then True \else False \fi -% \ifareglyphs{a}\then True \else False \fi -% \ifareglyphs{f}\then True \else False \fi -% \ifareglyphs{f,a}\then True \else False \fi -% \ifareglyphs{a,f}\then True \else False \fi -% \ifareglyphs{f,g}\then True \else False \fi -% \ifareglyphs{f,g,a}\then True \else False \fi - -%2 \setfontdimen -\generalpltomtx{ecrm1000}{ecrm1000}{pl}{t1draft} -\generalpltomtx{ecss1000}{ecss1000}{pl}{t1draft} -\transformfont{ecdh-shrunk}{% - \yscalefont{500}{\fromplgivenetx{ecdh1000}{t1draft}}% -} - -\bye - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1923test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1923test.tex deleted file mode 100644 index ede00d90444..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1923test.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ -%&Plain - -\input fontinst.sty - -% %1 -% \transformfont{padr8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padr8a}}} -% \transformfont{padri8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padri8a}}} -% -% \installfonts -% \installfamily{T1}{pad2}{} -% \installfont{zpad2i8t}{padri8r scaled 1009,% -% padr8r scaled 999 suffix -upright scaled 1009,\metrics -% % \expandafter\show \csname r-T-upright\endcsname -% \unsetglyph{parenleft} -% \setglyph{parenleft} -% \glyph{parenleft-upright}{1000} -% \endsetglyph -% \resetglyph{parenright} -% \glyph{parenright-upright}{1000} -% \endresetglyph,latin}{t1}{T1}{pad2}{m}{it}{} -% \endinstallfonts - -% %2 -% -% \installfonts -% \installfamily{U}{fad}{} -% \installfont{fadrr}{fadrr}{textfdim,fadrr mtxasetx}{U}{fad}{m}{n}{} -% \endinstallfonts - -% %3 -% \transformfont{pagk8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{pagk8a}}} -% \installfonts -% \installfont{pagk8t}{pagk8r,newlatin}{t1}{T1}{pag}{m}{n}{} -% \endinstallfonts - -%4 -\installfonts - \installfont{test}{rsfs10 encoding rsfs,cmsy10}{oms}{OMS}{xxx}{m}{n}{} -\endinstallfonts -% %4b -% \installfonts -% \installfont{test}{cmsy10,rsfs10 encoding rsfs}{oms}{OMS}{xxx}{m}{n}{} -% \endinstallfonts - - -\bye - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1927test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1927test.tex deleted file mode 100644 index b21f16bf60e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1927test.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -%&Plain - -\input finstmsc.sty - -% %1 -% \etxtoenc{ot1}{temp} - -%2 -\storemapdata{a}{\fromafm{a}{XX}}{} -\storemapdata{a}{\fromafm{a}{XX}}{} -\storemapdata{a}{\fromafm{a}{XY}}{} -\storemapdata{a}{\fromafm{a}{XX}}{} -\storemapdata{a}{\fromafm{a}{XX}}{\reencodefont{8r}} - - - -\bye - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1928test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1928test.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 8242cc3438c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1928test.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,13 +0,0 @@ -%&Plain - -\input finstmsc.sty - -%1 -\etxtocmap{t1draft}{temp} -\etxtocmap{ot1draft}{ot1} -\etxtocmap{omsdraft}{oms} - - - -\bye - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1928test2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1928test2.tex deleted file mode 100644 index c9b099e643c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1928test2.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ -\documentclass{article} - - - - -\def\FontWithCMap#1#2#3{% - \font#1=#2\relax - \immediate\pdfobj stream file {#3}% - \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% -} -\def\AddCMapToFont#1#2{% - \immediate\pdfobj stream file {#2}% - \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% -} - - -\begin{document} - - -\FontWithCMap\test{cmr12}{ot1.cmap} -\test abcdef ghijkl mnopqr stuvwx yz fi fl ffi ffl - - -\begin{math} - a - \AddCMapToFont{\textfont2}{oms.cmap} - \mathcal{A} - \mathcal{B} + \mathcal{C} * \mathcal{D} \cdot - \mathcal{E} \bullet \mathcal{F} \spadesuit -\end{math} - - -\end{document} |